Home

TVP Animation Pro 8.5 User Guide

Contents

1. The Navigator The other buttons specifically used for navigation on the project surface are found in the Navigator window which is accessible in the Windows main menu This panel also allows you to have a low quality preview of your ij froa00 ale sequence animation which can be useful by pressing the L button Ellie iste Button N shown above is used to open a new project window The red rectangle indicates the current display area in your window relative to the full image The Display popup menu is the same as the one described in lesson 3 page 16 Transform an Image layer into an Animation layer We will now make the sun move It is not necessary to create a new animation layer TVPaint Animation Pro allows you to transform an image layer into an animation layer This option is again offered in the menus reserved for layer handling As soon as the sun image layer is transformed into an animation layer its icon will appear in the timeline Time Line eSheet Prapeets viatort riz i T s La T La il Pl S Mere F Merge Y Clouds il E a ao amp amp F i D alltT 100 ae alier 100 ajoj p House HF 100 Op Sun E allo 100 ol la L7 OBC Grass a l 100 BlO S Ke o Ts P No Sound mn m None Frame i f 4 We obtained here an instance This concept will be deeply
2. If you need to transform an Image layer into an Animation layer you can use the Transform into Animation layer option of the layer main menu it is also located in the contextual menu of the image layer Note that an image layer with several images will be transformed into one instance with several exposure cells Once you try to draw outside a layer in the timeline TVPaint Animation Pro will ask you if you want to stretch the current layer in order to make it reach your position If you are using an image layer the number of images of the layer will be increased Yes No a If you are using an animation layer a new empty instance will be created eo me ee ee a CO ss 0 2 3 t a i j ee o i F 3 b Erasing the content of an image instance Using the erase button x of the main panel on the head cell of an instance makes its content deleted Using the erase button Ed of the main panel on an exposure cell of an instance always breaks the instance into two smaller instances A B E C ily a gt Using the erase button d of the main panel on several cells and or instances turns each cell into an empty single instance A B C a l C 6 14 The steps to create animated graphics Working with instances new Remove cells from an instance Once several images from a layer have been selected
3. The Range option enables you to numerically adjust the tolerance threshold for the aforementioned criteria Fill shape menu For example opposite a green shape is drawn with an airbrush on a transparent surface with a checker background The floodfill option applied in the center of the circle with the color blue provides the image results shown below fill color and opacity expand 0 in all cases below range 0 range 50 range 100 range 200 range 255 Progressively it is noted that the tolerance to border pixels becomes less and less The steps to create animated graphics 6 25 The inking process The Expand option increases the size of the floodfill area to the number of pixels of your choice This enables you to limit the number of border pixels For example you draw a green line with the airbrush A left click with the Floodfill tool and the color blue and you will obtain the following results Floodfill color and opacity range 0 in all cases below expand 0 expand 5 expand 10 expand 15 expand 20 expand 25 expand 30 expand 40 Combine the two options Expand and Range to avoid the result indicated below left and to obtain the result below right Selah cI Ls SO SIC gt gt A alH The Gap option allows you to avoid overspills when you try to fill a surface which is not completely closed Low values are used in the case of smal
4. s Depth of Field EMect 0 de fama Fog Hide HUD Lad Previa ail Apply PX Stack The coordinates X Y and Z of the Camera are in fact the coordinates of the virtual camera filming our scene in accordance with the space dimension described in the chapter above lf for example you change the Z coordinate from 1000 to 1500 units using the mini slider the center of the camera will be moved further away and the image you see will be changed accordingly The Rendering gt Multi plane Camera Effect 15 5 The View tab 2 1500 CL ites ve It is possible to move the camera directly from the window of your choice in the 3D O viewing mode simply click and slide with the left mouse button on the gray line or on the camera icon The Angle and Rotation parameters rotate the camera around the Z axis To simplify matters these two parameters are not taken into account in the 3D view The Field of view parameter represents the camera viewing angle The wider the angle the greater the number of objects illustrated on the screen gt gt Wide field of view Narrow field of view The Depth of Field effect and Focusing Distance parameters will be discussed at the end of this lesson The Planes tab Now that you have placed your camera in space and chosen a viewing angle we will now place our planes one at a time using the Planes tab If you have not used the Wizard this tab
5. This project was created using the Keyframer effect with the Running_Kid_1 tvp sequence as source The multiplane camera wizard You have certainly noticed the Wizard button to the right of the Open stage button This button will help you quickly place the various planes in order to create a sequence using the 15 12 The Rendering gt Multi plane Camera Effect The multiplane camera wizard Multiplane camera effect Naturally it was important to first study the global functions offered by this effect before introducing you to the latter function So now click on the Wizard button The window which then opens asks if Wizard should create planes using external projects or from the layers of the current project These are the 2 most common cases Co WOU Want io create planes trom Open projects 7 cumini project layers 7 a apen projects i Lier morm ciini price Nad 7 Vanga _ Create planes from projects Choosing option 1 implies that you have first opened the projects you wish to use for the planes of your animation Ensure the projects you intend to use are open before validating this window Once validated each project will become a plane in our Multiplane camera effect The next window to appear invites you to stage these planes This staging may be adapted to meet your specific needs This is how the window looks The animation plane is created as the first plane and the other planes are listed in
6. gt gt ey gt We gt A The movement of the brows will depend on the context of the scene It can express astonishement neutrality fatigue etc It will also need an XSheet layer ARW i Tee aN ty ass i E al 8 16 The XSheet Layers and Panel The steps to create a lip sync Here is the result with the XSheet tab Sqr fal co e Y brows rog b iF fa lt E alx al ji H HE 3 Mouth XE alei b E pen Ij a pa a cc mas at Kinie a the method etc anal xs iki dI Dulas ad Li an l l f T 7 Le s assume that our character comes from an animated TV serie It will be possible to re use the same images for the face XSheet layers constructed with You can always transform an XSheet layer into an Animation layer with Instances in the Timeline w pos by using the Transform into Animation Layer option use the layer contextual menu The XSheet Layers and Panel Lesson 9 Working with the FX stack In this lesson you will e Use the FX Stack e Discover the concept of the animation keys e Create our first real world animation Working with the FX stack In lessons
7. laa These two buttons offer direct access to the first and previous frames of the current layer inna These two buttons allow you to move from key to key if your project has keys by passing respectively to the previous or next keys an td These buttons are used to move to the last or next frame Run a fast preview of the current animation ia a Play the animation salut E 2 These buttons are workspace rotation shortcuts with respective angles of 15 and 15 Layer Shaker IT j 1 Shortcut to select either the layer above the current layer or the one below it The steps to create animated graphics 6 19 The Animator Panel AISI oles Bookmark shortcut buttons used to go to the previous bookmark next bookmark or to Activate Deactivate a bookmark in the current image The Image section mH rH ma 1 These buttons are used to create an empty image in the current layer in front of the current image first button or after the current image second button m Har Pi 1 These shortcuts are used to duplicate the current image by placing a new image before or after the current image g5 1 Delete the current image The Layer section Img img m Buttons used to either convert an image layer to an animation layer or to convert the current animation layer image into a single image in an image layer If you select an image sequence this button will create as many Image
8. Ac ao io T A Duplicate Images tie MR leis leieie ga aig 7 ie a iT 100 E E E E a E E a mu fm m a T 18 20 7 H 7 ALTE T Select All Colors eene ie ____ r Select Image A right click on the timeline opens a contextual menu which allows you to duplicate or delete your image above When duplicating you will be asked to indicate the number of copies of the current image you wish to create When deleting you will be asked to confirm the operation To insert one or several empty images in your animation simply call up the same contextual menu It should however be noted that the new empty images inserted will be placed just behind the current image The other images of your layer will be shifted accordingly e Line Sheet Proects HG New imere 7 Auto Fit Hl OF Running Kid EE al gt mi LTl 100 F Hi j ji jo 20 17 T H Wa Sanmi Soon Wiere tu e Rok image 18 duplicated me Line Samea Projects I Mew Tens Auto Fit T ec kepel L Las E a 100 Li Ho Sinmi C Color Mi ram Perri ig y f bld images inserted from image 18 ra menu gt The nsert Duplicate Delete images options are also available in the mage main ks 6 8 The steps to create animated graphics Managing the images of an animation layer It is possible to select several consecutive images of a layer with a simple click _Y Y_ an
9. The four last cells have the same reference as the fourth cell With thumbnails oF calque x x E a LT oo SCC ey i A 7 a h Name Kid 2 Type Project k Project CADocuments a XSheet Layer with its cells Source images and columns AN If you selected an opened project as source the source project will be stretched to fit the XSheet layer In order to fill in the cells of an XSheet layer in other words to add images in a ge XSheet layer you can also drag n drop thumbnails and cells from the source columns into a XSheet layer Select several images in a XSheet layer If you want to select several images in a XSheet layer hold the shift key pressed and do a drag n drop with the LMB on the cells or thumbnails of the XSheet layer Use the mouse button to cancel the selection 8 10 The XSheet Layers and Panel The XSheet Layers and XSheet Panel The icons of the XSheet tab Each icons below has a specific action regarding the XSheet layer or the XSheet tab We will now explain each of them separately in the next page Time Line She t Projects dad ARARA eA sl lal This button creates a new XSheet Layer This button deletes the current XSheet Layer This button toggle the thumbnails cells view For a better readability the icon opposite allows to display hide the columns of the image and animation layers in the XSheet panel This
10. Appendix A 7 The available keyboard shorcuts and commands 131 Layer Next Layer with Selection 203 Zoom Rotation Reset 132 Layer Move Layer Up 204 Zoom Rotate 15 counter clockwise 133 Layer Move Layer Down 205 Zoom Rotate 15 clockwise 134 Layer First Image 206 Zoom Shake 135 Layer Last Image 207 Zoom Show full page 136 Layer Next Image 208 Interface Full Screen 137 Layer Prev Image 209 Zoom Scroll Up 138 Layer First Image with Selection 210 Zoom Scroll Up Left 139 Layer Last Image with Selection 211 Zoom Scroll Left 140 Layer Next Image with Selection 212 Zoom Scroll Down Left 141 Layer Prev Image with Selection 213 Zoom Scroll Down 142 Layer Next Key 214 Zoom Scroll Down Right 143 Layer Prev Key 215 Zoom Scroll Right 144 Layer Next Key with Selection 216 Zoom Scroll Up Right 145 Layer Prev Key with Selection 217 Interface Toggle windows display 146 Layer Create Key 218 Zoom Next Zoom window 147 Layer Delete Key 219 Zoom Prev Zoom window 148 Layer Toggle Auto Key 220 Tools Draw Dot 149 Layer Select All Keys 221 Tools Toggle Stencil 150 Layer Toggle Display All 222 Tools Toggle Paper 151 Layer Toggle Stencil 223 Tools Toggle Transparency 152 Layer Invert Stencil 224 Tools Toggle Red 153 Layer Show All 225 Tools Toggle Green 154 Layer Hide All 226 Tools Toggle Blue 155
11. Full Hide HUD Preview i ADDN Fx Sack The most simple are Velocity and Size any pre defined example may be used to study these two notions The parameters Weight and Bounce are more subtle The Weight of a particle has an influence on its movement if the Gravity parameter in the World tab is not set to zero the heavier a particle the more the force of gravity will accentuate its movement The lighter it is the less effect the force of gravity will have A Weight of zero has the result that the particle is not subjected to the force of gravity If you place the pre defined example nature gt sun in the stack and then modify the gravity parameter you will note that this has no influence on particle movement The Bounce parameter is used to set the particle bounce strength the Alpha Collision box of the World tab must be checked and a collision source chosen Below the Bounce of a tennis ball thrown left to right for different parameter values 85 100 and 115 note that values over 100 cause unnatural bounces relative to the laws of physics pa oa 7 i Faia La ig Ti 7 The Friction parameter is set to slow the particles down If the particles move through the air which is most often the case we are dealing with air resistance The latter is low and a parameter set at a value close to zero will be sufficient There are however other situations let s assume that the balls are thrown at
12. H oo New Fw iiierge AutoFit sy The thumb button allows to swap between the classical XSheet Se display and the thumbnails display see next page on the right You can also use the sliders or the arrow keys of your keyboard to navigate through the XSheet panel 8 4 The XSheet Layers and Panel The XSheet Layers and XSheet Panel iF a a hl M ga pa t f i SSSRBRBEEEEFR i H F iT a i po i l i Ba iwi T i hes ka er Pi ag pa Lee 1a a fia let FA 2 i of UPP RF RR RR islelelslala fq i a a rs Xsheet tab etpar 3 re f g japanmmercoceeuuy 2 p s SE FE ee ee a s a p r s i 5 i Se _ ae e a S 8 8 o See m M M m m z 8 5 The XSheet Layers and Panel The XSheet Layers and XSheet Panel The project tab above allows to manage the opened project It is discussed in lesson 5 A few simple options of the XSheet panel Insert images Dupie ate images Delete Image ener iF Ataf malc Ald EE tere Faleti l Splot irie Hie HAGE SOT l ae ne ian Lett staat Righi aE E Lork A lot of option regarding the layers are both available in the Timeline tab and the XSheet tab A right click with your mouse button on a layer inside the XSheet panel opens a contextual menu comparable to the one encountered via the timeline You
13. The Activate button allows to start the selected external device Device NONE x Format NOME Activate anid The Enable Out button allows to activate the visualization through your external device The Refresh button allows if possible to obtain a realtime display on the external device by default the display is refreshed after each stroke The Keyer button allows to improve the management of the transparent pixels with some external devices The Fit button allows to adjust the dimensions of your current project in order to obtain a better result on the external device y Please read the appendix of this manual to obtain the complete list of external A hardware compatible with TVPaint Animation Pro Handling TVPaint projects 5 15 Lesson 6 The steps to create animated graphics In this lesson you will e Learn one by one the various stages involved in the creation of an animated drawing using this application the scan cleaner light table rotative drawing disk and inking options will be introduced e Use the Animator Panel e Use the scan and print options of the software e Learn how to use instances The steps to create animated graphics Introduction The aim of this section is to sum up the various steps involved in creating a cartoon using TVPaint Animation Pro and to deal with frequently asked questions Some steps will be explained in more detail when study
14. The Lens Flare popup menu creates various types of lens flare effects they may be of the Generic Streaks or Image type It is also possible to rename duplicate or delete these effects at your convenience Generic Rename Streaks Duplicate image Delete Once a type of lens flare has been created its name appears in the Lens Flare popup menu In the header of this menu you will find the name of the lens flare the parameters of which are visible on the screen Generic 1 Streaks 2 Image 3 e Lens Flares of the generic type Yo Lens Flare Genencd Size 100 a omli Here are the various Lens Flare parameters of v ColorMode Color J the generic type Color Alpha 755 dk You may Change the Size of the Lens Flare this value is a percentage of the lens size the size that you have implicitly chosen when setting the lens radius Change the Offset of the Lens Flare in other words modify the position of the lens flare in relation to the center of the lens and light source An offset of 0 places your Lens Flare at the same level as the light source An offset of 1 places the effect at the same level as the lens center An offset of 0 5 places your Lens Flare in the middle of the two aforementioned points It is also possible to use a negative offset or an offset greater than 1 Choose single color or gradient color artifacts see below The effects of the Rendering
15. Gap Closer i i Emanafo e explained on page 16 of this lesson Range a Auto Pick Color Gradient se i f BOWE Brush Wrapping Width giretti X Height Stretch bd Opacity Mapping Show and hide a layer It is possible at any time to only show the layers of your choice The layers visible in the project window are those ticked in green in the first column of the timeline The hidden layers are those which are ticked in red in the same column and the name of which is displayed in gray click on the color fields to toggle a layer from visible state to hidden state and vice versa Whatever the displaying options are once the icon H is ticked only the current layer is displayed a You can draw only on a displayed layer Na Sound Color WF Merge layers When it is no longer useful to work with several layers you have the possibility to merge the layers H S New Y Merge r The Merge popup menu in the timeline offers you three options for this purpose Merge selected layers the non selected layers are not merged Merge visible layers in this case the hidden layers remain intact Merge all layers the layer resulting from this operation contains the current image Layers spatial management 3 9 Layers and timeline O To select an additional layer multi selection press the Ctrl key on the keyboard and left click on its thumb You ma
16. The advanced functions of TV Paint Animation Pro 18 23 How to use the George scripting language a Please read the Initialization File section in the appendix of this user manual if you a want to change the root directory of TVPaint Animation Pro Two examples of libraries are availables in the directory C program files TVPaint Animation Pro George Include for Microsoft Windows Applications TVPaint Animation Pro George Include for Apple OS X They are called Basic grg and Advanced grg and are related to character strings management To make them available in the George Scripts given with the software you only need to add the following lines at the end of those scripts Include include basic grg Include include advanced grg The Startup grg file At startup the first thing that TVPaint Animation Pro does after displaying the main toolbox but before giving control to the user is to run the Startup grg script which should be in the same directory as the other scripts When there is no Startup grg file nothing will happen Otherwise you have at your disposal a startup file that gets run every time you load TVPaint Animation Pro lf for example you rename the Logo grg file to Startup grg it will load the TVPaint Developpement logo to screen every time you run TVPaint Animation Pro You could also thanks to a simple George script define all your preferred parameters
17. To perfectly master the drawing tools The two tools indicated below are very useful to warp the images and give the appearance that they were hand drawn The Warpbrush The Warpbrush may be used to give the impression that a drop of water has fallen on the image Combined with certain types of paper it gives the impression that you are looking at the image through a window There are two types of warps warp out and warp in see below Warp in at top Original image Use of this tool on an image Warp out at bottom The Special brush The special brush functions differently according to the drawing mode selected It shifts the image pixels uniformly in Shift mode degressively in Smear mode by adding color in Mix mode by taking into account the spare image pixels in mpressionist mode Below you will see the results of the first three modes from top to bottom In each case a line was drawn from left to right Mix mode the A color is red Shift mode Smear mode 7 10 Other TVPaint Animation Pro drawing tools To perfectly master the drawing tools As indicated above the mpressionist mode requires a spare image in order to work When drawing a line in this drawing mode the current image is deleted in order to make place for a spare image and the latter is smeared in the direction of the line traced This creates quite an eye catching effect when working with a small tool and with dott
18. When the gravity is increased to e g a value of 10 the water droplets will fall to the ground faster because the distance between the emitter water jet origin and the drop point is shorter Decreasing the value to 0 5 will increase the distance traveled by the droplets The distance between the point where the droplets are emitted and the drop point is longer When the gravity is set to zero there is no gravity and the water droplets will follow a straight trajectory TVPaint Animation Pro offers the possibility to work with negative gravity values which has the effect that the force of gravity may be inverted the water droplets will then go up This is useful in certain cases for example to represent metal particles drawn by a magnet The Rendering gt Particles Generator effect 17 5 The tabs of the Particles Generator effect necessary to attribute a Weight to them We will come back to this when we In order for the force of gravity to have an impact on our particles it is AN talk about the specific particle parameters Let s take a look at the pre defined example objects gt popcorn the popcorn kernels are our particles and they move vertically to the top before falling back under their own weight The parameters Angle Rotation and Wind strength allow you to simulate the impact the wind has on the particles see examples below and to make them more or less move in a direction of
19. When you have scanned an image on a white background you obtain a completely opaque layer With the Luma Keyer effect is is therefore possible to make the white pixels of this image transparent Lip biai FTO ii Prois pr apay Fany com E Add Tolrerce Sub T And Syira Sun L RE Se fat gage msde foes oe MP a Appi FX Dace Let s take a look at the drawing on real paper above Application of the Luma Keyer effect set with correct parameters will render the light pixels transparent independent of their hue and saturation progressively increase the opacity of the medium tone pixels and leave the dark pixels intact This gives us the image shown to the right At this point it is possible to re color the image if desired simply place a layer under the image obtained and spread the colors of your choice on it see example opposite You may also use the shape floodfill tools studied in lesson 6 These are the functions of the Keying gt Luma Keyer effect The Display popup menu is used to choose between viewing the source image and viewing the result The color box is used to choose the color the luminosity of which you wish to render transparent directly on the screen The buttons and are used to adjust the tolerance and softness of pixel cut out The mini sliders allow adjustment of the following depending on the luminosity and with the help of the diagram below The type of pixels which
20. and y The radius of the circle will be assigned to the variable r The button selected by the user to draw the circle will be assigned to the variable called button 1 for RMB O for LMB With the following script lines Param Rectangle Parse result command x1 y1 x2 y2 button The George Script will be launched only if a rectangle is drawn on the project window The character string Rectangle will be assigned to the variable called command if a point is drawn on the screen The coordinates of the points at the ends of the rectangle will be assigned to the variables x1 y1 and x2 y2 see opposite The button selected by the user to draw the rectangle will be assigned to the variable called button 1 for RMB O for LMB EAR EAA al With the two script lines below Param Freehand Parse result command x y button The George Script will be launched only if a freehand curve is drawn on the project window The character string Freehand will be assigned to the variable called command if a curve is drawn on the screen The button selected by the user to draw the curve will be assigned to the variable called button 1 for RMB O for LMB The character strings It is important to Know how to use the character strings because they usually plays a part in numerous situations For example in the following script lines a loop allows to lo
21. our project 16 10 The effects of the Rendering group The Rendering gt Volumetric Light effect The Rendering gt Volumetric Light effect A ij i Fi The Volumetric Light effect is in the same category as the Y UEA a Lighting effect but it works in a different way TP sins z In this effect the light source is located under the current N K layer and it gives the impression of volume to the light Here is an example TV Pa int Create a new project et fill the current image with an opaque black color Set the background as Color in the Timeline The background has to be white Now put a TVPaint Animation Pro logo in Erase mode on this Image layer with the TextBrush tool then change this layer to an Anim layer with about twenty images Make the Center setting move along a path from left to right You should get an animation similar to the one like the image sequence on the left TVPaint The Volumetric Light effect requires to adjust the n position setting of the light source and possibly its Path TVP a i rit its Power and its Length Eo You can also define the light color use a color gradient like in the example on the left or even have a color that depends on the source image You can select one of TVP 2 nt these options in the Color Source menu You can also define one of the various blend mode for this color through the Blend menu The substitute mode is onl
22. will be lost e The Render tab The Render tab allows to choose apie The calculation algorithm of the distortions Blackman or by default J Nini Minor The distortion mode of the image borders The example below illustrates the three modes at your disposal li Pg ile d l Fj F Ppa Fi fi ae EP F PH E ae Lit J fi Li Loop Image Mode 13 18 The effects of the Distortion group The Distortion gt Optical Flow effect e The Display tab Yv optica Plow Progress Protle Show Oniy Selection Show Sre A Shaw Dst Show erior w Ful o Hide Huo Preiera The three buttons Show Src Show Dst and Show Vector allow you to select exactly what you want to see on the H U D the red source points and or the green destination points and or the blue vectors The button Show Only Selection allows to see only the vectors located inside the current selection The effects of the Distortion group 13 19 Lesson 14 The effects of the Motion and Paint groups management of the paths In this lesson you will e Study the AutoPaint effect e Learn how to use paths e Study the Motion gt Keyframer effect e Study the Stabilization effects The Paint gt AutoPaint effect The Paint gt AutoPaint effect Add Fx m opis Bin l wj Auto Paint Progress Prola Flan onl a Stoki Preserve Timing W
23. Anim Momial Pal Adherir Hold Lael Figll Hido HUDI Pairi i 5 q arabic fonts On TVPaint Animation Pro can use non occidental fonts like chinese japanese f The Rendering gt Multiline Text effect omen copes sa he effect Rendering gt Multiline Text is the most G proe pane important titling tool of TVPaint Animation Pro Preagenssess Pritil The first thing to do when using this effect is import text lines To do this you may use text lines stored in an ascii txt files use text lines stored in your clipboard for example if you have cut or copied some text from another software After this choice your text is displayed on the screen Two kind of H U D are available for this effect The parameters directly adjustable on the screen depends on the H U D selected angle size and position on the screen for the position H U D the text itself for the text H U D abode unfghiikl uiynNopqrstuvwxyz 42345 The position HUD The text HUD Several kinds of HUD handle alignments are available by using the nine buttons below The effects of the Rendering group 16 27 The Rendering gt Multiline Text effect Your text lines may be horizontally centered left justified or right justified abcde abcde abcde fghijkl fghijkl fghijkl mnoparstuvwxyzZ mnopaqrstuvwxyz mnopaqrstuvwxyz 12345 12349 12345 Your text
24. Appendix Introduction what is George Finding Editing and Using George Scripts A few examples of George Scripts Programmer en langage George Instructions et commandes An example of program written in George Language Commands Description A few useful options How to use the variables The operators at your disposal The instructions Param and Parse the launching modes The character strings The arrays Functions and procedures How to create librairies of functions and procedures The Startup grg file How to create a Plug in for TVPaint Animation Pro Adding arguments The video cards compatible with TVPaint Animation Pro The digital camera working with the Canon Plug in The George instructions The George language commands The main characteristics of the export formats The available keyboard shorcuts and commands The initialization file The technical support and internet resources 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 A A A A A A A A ono O 10 12 12 12 13 13 13 14 16 17 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 24 24 N of amp W DN 14 Lesson 1 First approach of TVPaint Animation Pro In this lesson you will Learn to open and close TVPaint Animation Pro Discover the various panels and windows Start a project Access InLine help Set your preferences First app
25. It is then possible to obtain the opposite result The effects of the Color and Keying groups 11 19 The effects of the Keying menu The Mix parameter allows to extend or restrict the number of colors located in the transparent area of the resulting image Mix 0 Mix 50 Mix 100 The Edge parameter allows to adjust the mixing level between the transparent and opaque pixels The lower the value will be the less the two regions will differentiate The higher the value will be the sharper the edges will appear be aa Edge 0 O Edge 50 Edge 100 The Spill Removal parameter has the same function as the Spill Removal parameters encountered in the effect Keying gt Chroma Keyer it unsaturates the undesired light reflections In the example below we zoomed on the frontier between the grass and the pathway Source Image Spill Removal 0 Spill Removal 100 11 20 The effects of the Color and Keying groups Lesson 12 The effects of the Stylize group In this lesson you will e Discover some effects of the Stylize group dedicated to the animation e Discover some effects of the Stylize group dedicated to the video editing Introduction Introduction The effects of the Stylize menu are often used to work on logos drawings or video footages We will take the images below as refe
26. Lesson 16 The effects of the Rendering group In this lesson you will e Study the rendering effects relative to the light Lens Flare Volumetric Light Healing Tracker e Study the rendering effects relative to the text Simple text Multiline text Time Code Generator Note The Particle Generator effect will be the main subject of the 17th lesson The Rendering gt Lens Flare effect The Rendering gt Lens Flare effect Lens Flare Frograss Prita kinaa j x a e Porio h l Moin am Y je t linasa x oada a Lone Canip SSE O A Mooni vials a matus 210 262 Lumnia TOD eE ca Obscuration Leper Tyee Mja Source Radia 3 pi Haere biyi planil er o Pint Hihasidi daa Feat An Paced F Y Dace Woce Circle Render Order Calian o Lend Flare jhemegone E orget 07a a Yo Cor Mode Coki Hihi 1 Hk Yo Glade Move Maar Deined Tj Tiad Cours Form Factor os lt volt Reton om Angle 17 00 Potalian i g The Lens Flare is an over illumination effect seen through an optical lens Generally encountered in the world of photography it occurs when the image framed is excessively illuminated and when a non adequate lens is used Several types of lens flare are encountered ring streaks circles They are located along the st
27. The Key tab lets you adjust the keyer in the different color systems The Matte tab has the same function as the previously described Keying gt Alpha Control effect so you can just adjust the cutout process better Finally the Spill Removal tab is also available and works the same as the Keying gt Chroma Keyer one Y at Achainoeed Kiriji Progress Protle mii Res T w a Arhane Kini Progress Profle Emede o J od ol Display Rasa Siairih n i lt i Spill Removal muvanje dd b Tolerance Aiur Hotoht tl w lt ce gt Add Bollness Gain 100 dicb w T dagit m Hide nnm rene Working with the Hue and Saturation component of the HSLO system is the same tl ge than working with the Keying gt Chroma Keyer effect Working with the Luma component of the HSLO system is the same as working with the Keying gt Luma Keyer effect 11 18 The effects of the Color and Keying groups The effects of the Keying menu The Keying gt Cross Keyer effect Ail FM T ica Choss Keyer Progress Profile al Fagin Keep Cro Swap Keep Drop Regions wi Edge dh rar Spill Renmgval o J Eb 2 F ull ri Hine HUD Prewew w The Keying gt Cross Keyer effect works in a different way than the other keying effects It doesn t require to select a range of colors in a color system like RGB TSL YUV etc In this effect you only ne
28. The connections Throughout this lesson we have modified the size power opacity etc of our tools and you have certainly noticed the letters located in a box left of the w Monk corresponding numeric value Bpen These are the Connection parameters The corresponding contextual menu is Lirimin Oneantaban FAAA RAMAT accessible by clicking on the box Most graphic tablets available on the market are sensitive to pressure stylus travel speed and inclination etc PrP ane AnhAe Acero TVPaint Animation Pro takes all these advantages into account and it is Twat therefore possible to imitate the specific aspects of drawing by hand I OPE er Wane el iT Ophans Here are some examples If you connect the Size of the pen tool with the stylus Travel Speed the thickness of the line drawn will be thicker the faster you move your stylus to do this select Speed in the Size connection menu If you connect the stylus Pressure to the airbrush tool Power the more you push down on the tablet with the stylus the brighter the color will be on the screen If you connect the Opacity of the wetbrush tool to the Altitude of the stylus inclining the stylus will render the aquarelle almost transparent A wide variety of setting combinations are available Below we will describe each of them It is then up to you to make the connections according to your needs and creative spirit don t hesitate to experiment The first set
29. Vv Nv KX X w X V VY KX KX XK w X V V VM KX YM s X V o A ee sormace X V V VXXX q ctirarntelpermie pore tomnan pour ee fermat do A 6 Appendix The available keyboard shorcuts and commands The available keyboard shorcuts and commands Commands 0 Tools Right Mouse Button 67 Interface Close Guides Panel 1 Undo Multi Redo 68 Interface Toggle Grid Panel 2 Undo Last Action 69 Interface Open Grid Panel 3 Color Pick 70 Interface Close Grid Panel 4 Color Pick B Color 71 Interface Open Video Grabber Panel 5 TVPaint Animation Magic Number 72 Interface Open Preview Settings Panel 6 TVPaint Animation Help 73 Interface Open Preferences Panel T Image Buffer Hold 14 Interface Open Display Panel 8 Image Buffer Fetch 75 Interface Open Shape Settings Panel 9 Spare Copy To 76 Interface Open Path Manager Panel 10 Spare Exchange Tf Interface Open Pixel Tracker Panel 11 Clipboard Save Image 78 Interface Open Path Recorder Panel 12 Clipboard Load Image 79 Interface Open Connection Panel 13 Clipboard Save Brush 80 Interface Open Custom Panel 14 Clipboard Load Brush 81 File Project Resize 15 File Project New 82 Interface Configure Keyboard 16 File Project Load 83 TVPaint Animation About 17 File Project Save 84 Interface Close Window 18 File Project Save As 85 Interface Next Cursor 19 File Project Clos
30. cs The red points are the source points of your vectors they can t O IN SA DA be moved The green points are the destination points your vectors lt The blue segments are the vectors themselves J 4 For a given picture in your timeline modifying the vector field creates an animation ESS key If more than one animation key is created in the timeline it means that your vector field and thus the distortion will evolve in time The Reset Current Key button reset the vector field of the current picture in the timeline If this picture does not have an animation key a new one will be automatically created The button H allows to modify all the vectors of the field in only one operation This tool is perfect if you need to distort move or pivot an image entirely The more vectors you will use the more time you will need to render the effect 13 16 The effects of the Distortion group The Distortion gt Optical Flow effect The button E allows to change the parameters of your H U D brush i e the purple circle Like the common tools airbrush etc that you use to draw you can set its profile size and also power Let s admit that we will always choose the direction opposite when editing our vector field i e the red arrow The pictures below shows the impact of the different settings at your disposal Protiie Pronte gige 100 ab Sine 5u o Powar i00 4 Powar i0
31. i a di te FI i Li mey SA TVPaint Animation Pro allows you O to work on several projects at the same time The maximum number of projects is limited only by the capabilities of your computer F 7 e T G E T TF 4 Hm View data relative to your project To view data relative to your current project size frame rate ratio etc simply move the cursor over the title bar and hold it there Project Untitled O1 1 1 1 Size B40 x 480 Frame Rate 30 000 Pixel Aspect 1 000 3 A small yellow window then appears with all the Field Progressive information you require Display 100 O Current Layer Untitled 1 1 1 1h Current Image fabrice debarge Name a project The default name for a new project is Untitled 00 Untitled 01 Untitled O2 etc To render these names more understandable it is possible to rename them as you wish To do this simply use the Project gt Rename main menu Working with several projects TVPaint Animation Pro offers the user the possibility to work with several projects on the screen at the same time The Tab key on your keyboard may be used to switch from one to the other It should be noted that the names of the projects present on the screen may be viewed in the Windows main menu The checked name is the current project 1 8 First approach of TVPaint Animation Pro Working with projects S
32. project and load the prehistoric project Merge the layers of this project Stretch them over thirty frames Delete the content of the FX stack Choose the Blur gt Center blur effect The following timeline appears j p i me a Time Line Rheot Projects af w ero A Ses ll a en oF T a E A E A Toole v afi Power 100 i 4 gi p oh Radius a7 4 pa Fu Hide HDT Preview Apply FR Slack Add FA pign Bi wl Center Blur pein Prograce Prota m B i yg vi congor ME X jg To make it easier we have deliberately chosen to work with an animation layer always containing the same image Everything that follows also applies to an animation layer You will see that there are three parameters which may be locked with an animation key the position of the center the power of the blur the radius of the circle in which the blur is not applied The position of the circle in which the blur is not applied as well as its center are shown in the preview see image above Some parameters may be adjusted directly on the screen by clicking and sliding the mouse on the color handles shown opposite When the effect is applied circle and handles will of course have disappeared The parameters directly adjustable on the screen handles circles spline are referred to as HUD HUD stands for Head Up Display The Hide HUD of the FX stack is used to h
33. ry Ry Wl ee Se we LANM UN ae DEVELOPPEMENT TVP Animation Pro 8 5 User Guide TVPaint Animation Pro 1991 2007 TVPaint Developpement All rights reserved This edition of the TVPaint Animation Pro User Guide is protected by copyright 2006 2007 TVPaint Developpement All rights reserved This user guide may not either wholly or partly be copied reproduced translated transferred to a magnetic electronic or optical support or disposed off to third parties without prior written approval of its author and TVPaint Developpement All forms of duplication of the TVPaint Animation Pro software either physical or electronic is strictly forbidden TVPaint Animation Pro is a registered trademark of TVPaint Developpement All other products or brands mentioned in this user guide are registered trademarks of their respective owners Credits The TVPaint Developpement team Herv ADAM Eric MATECKI S bastien MIGLIO Nicolas RICHARD Patrice BERNASSOLA Michael SCHREINER Documentation Fabrice DEBARGE Credits for illustrations The first paper lesson 3 comes from Power Box Animator created by Benoit St Moulin Running Kid lesson 5 6 12 etc was created by Alain Charrier and animated by Raymond Gourrier the elephant lesson 11 was created and animated by ZigOtto The car lesson 11 was drawn by Nicolas Geley The butterfly lesson 14 and the beach with the young woman lesson 15 were create
34. 2 Lens Flares of the generic type 16 3 Streak type Lens Flares 16 6 Lens Flares of the Image type 16 7 The Render order for lens flares 16 7 The Lens Flare Obscuration layer 16 8 The Rendering gt Lighting effect 16 9 The Rendering gt Volumetric Light effect 16 11 The Rendering gt RotoTracking effect 16 13 The Rendering gt Healing Tracker effect 16 20 The Rendering gt Background Generator effect 16 23 The Rendering gt Plasma effect 16 24 The Rendering gt Perlin Noise effect 16 25 The Rendering gt Text effect 16 25 The Rendering gt Multiline Text effect 16 27 The Rendering gt Time Code generator effect 16 29 The Rendering gt Pattern Generator effect 16 30 Lesson 17 The Rendering gt Particles Generator effect Presentation and concept 17 2 Learn by example 17 2 The tabs of the Particles Generator effect 17 3 The World tab 17 4 The Emitters tab 17 7 The Emitters gt Particles tab 17 9 The Emitters gt Particles gt Current tab 17 12 The tab Emitters gt Particles gt Shape 17 15 The Emitters gt Current tab 17 17 Le on 18 The advanced functions of TVPaint Animation Pro Customized windows 18 2 Adding an action 18 3 The actions at your disposal 18 4 How to manage the created actions 18 4 How to manage the panels 18 5 How to use the plug ins The Color Factory plug in The Canon plug in The Direct Show plug in The Waveform plug in How to use the scripting language George
35. 5 The Rendering gt Text effect We saw in lesson 5 how to create a Text Brush using the Text tool from the tool panel The Rendering gt Text effect should not disorientate you The Text field is where you have to type the text The Font menu allows you to change the font You already know the various settings like Size Size X Spacing Italic Tracking and Angle However these values can be keyframed now which cannot be done with the simple Text Brush tool So you can make a text going bigger and bigger make it switch to italic or make the spacing change etc or all at the same time ML i d m w le Simple Ted Progress Promle P7 Bizo a0 e 4 Ee vacate fone d ool pb Spacing 0 ejda sole Potation a _ Rotator U Align Genter aj Let s take a look to the new settings You can make the text follow a path thanks to the Position settings with a stored path or graphically through the HUD The effects of the Rendering group 16 25 The Rendering gt Text effect The Angle setting permits to adjust the angle made by the text in relation to the horizontal line The Rotation setting can increase the Angle value with a multiple of 360 The Align menu allows you to change the position of the HUD text handle right left centered There are still 3 tabs left The Font tab manage the pixels of the text itself Bordar Eteach z Filing Goao ooo o o
36. Cabo J J ieibh l Alpina 255 Fa a umgogii E it ig 2 Amant T la i wlj E Pa EuR zj Hi a HUD Preview A Sete The borders tab manage the pixels of the borders of the text you can adjust de thickness of the border Font Gorder Shadow Enable Sine 5 i i aa 3 J i E moho digt Smiw Y o z s Hide HLL pM TREE Filing Golar The Shadow tab can create a shadow for the text the Angle and Distance settings give the position of the shadow Foni Border Stadow Enable angle M1500 i vite AS Rolan a ik i Distanca 20 ae Filing Hot ooo m a Color aaeain aipha iae Smosh 5 PARETI l smoomy S l d D F ul r Hia Huo Prewew App EX Stack In each tab blur settings can be adjusted and there are three filling types available fill with a picked color you will be able to change its opacity See the first example of this page fill with a color gradient you will be able to adjust its angle nt Border Shadow Rolistion AE Angle mi Rotator 0 a Smoot r n g e 4 Full Hide HUO Preire s App T Stage ooo q ec p fill with a texture you will have to define current image spare image brush paper etc 16 26 The effects of the Rendering group The Rendering gt Text effect ont Border Shadow lexture Faper o _ A Sem Pre Behavior Hold Firik
37. E Es a le mm fi i poe j F i 4 an j LB a A ia i a ad ols el a ai fl E ae ma j M F A 2 Here you will find a description of the various panels displayed on the screen The toolbar S Oo Sbrrr The first icons on this toolbar concern the traditional functions found in all standard software packages New start a new project Load load an existing project Save save a project Close close the current project The following icons are used to open or close various TVPaint Animation Pro panels display coordinates light table timeline etc Dy Si bel sal SR P Q ala ae button then slide the cursor as required The o To move the toolbar click and hold the left mouse 7 toolbar then appears in the form of a panel First approach of TVPaint Animation Pro 1 3 The various program panels Main panel This panel is used to draw segments ellipses rectangles curves Brush selection and cutting options are also available here This panel is used to select the color in which you wish to work Distinction is made between the A color always referred to as main color in the left rectangle and the B color in the right rectangle The toolbox contains a wide choice of buttons corresponding to traditional drawing tools airbrush brush pencil wet brush etc Various parameters may be s
38. Working with hand made drawings free TE i rea C F a Pa o Eri Cropping a project start Y d Lock Aspect Width db Height o Reset before cropping The Single tab opposite is used to print the current image You may adjust the size and position of your image on the future sheet of paper using the click and slide function as well as the Scale field The Center button places your drawing in the center of your future sheet of paper The Anim tab offers the possibility to print several images of your animation merged layers on the same sheet of paper In addition to the image size and position setting options you may Choose the number of columns for your images Display the position of each image on the timeline Choose every second third fourth etc image in the Steps field The two buttons in the bottom right hand corner of the panel are used to scroll through the various pages to be printed The Crop tool is used to define a rectangular area in the current stan x 160 project and to transform the content of this area including all layers into a new project This is very practical when cropping your animations due to badly defined edges see example opposite The variables Start X and Start Y are used to define the top left hand corner of the rectangular area whereas the next two variables adjust the Width and Height Lock aspect retains the current width hei
39. effect will make a panning of the image in order to bring the Origin point onto the Destination point which will stabilize the sequence Now let s take an example Let s take the background below the cameraman has shaked a little bit while shooting the sequence We can define one of the yellow points below as the Origin point and estimate that this it should be at the position of the Destination point at the extremity of the yellow arrow if the camera had not shaked As soon as these points are defined the Stabilization effect will do a panning that will bring the Origin point onto the Destination point The footage will not shake anymore aE eh Origin point Horizontal and Vertical camera movements Destination point 14 16 The effects of the Motion and Paint groups management of the paths The Motion gt Stabilization 1 point effect You can argue that each positions of the Origin and of the Destination points are different for each image which make the process tiresome That s why at this stage using a path for the Origin and or Destination points can speed up the process especially paths created with the Pixel Tracker As soon as the effect is applied and that the image is stabilized you could have to crop it to remove the white borders due to possible pannings You can also use the fill button to remove the borders by tiling the image The Motion gt Stabilization 2 points effect This effec
40. f8 f9 f11 f12 ctrl f1 ctrl f2 ctrl f3 ctrl f4 ctrl f5 ctrl f6 ctrl f7 ctrl f8 ctrl f9 ctrl f11 ctrl f12 shift f1 shift f2 shift f3 shift f4 shift f5 shift f6 shift f7 shift f8 shift f9 shift f11 shift f12 ctrl shift f1 ctrl shift f2 ctrl shift f3 ctrl shift f4 ctrl shift f5 ctrl shift f6 ctrl shift f7 ctrl shift f8 ctrl shift f9 ctrl shift f11 ctrl shift f12 space tab shift tab ctrl tab ctrl shift tab home shift home ctrl home ctrl shift home Drawing Mode 07 Light Drawing Mode 08 Colorize Zoom Show full page Interface Toggle windows display none none none Interface Close Window none none none none TVPaint Animation Iconify TVPaint Animation No Border none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none Tools Right Mouse Button Project Next Project Previous Zoom Next Zoom window Zoom Prev Zoom window Layer First Image none Layer First Layer none end ctrl end shift end ctrl shift end del shift del ctrl del ctrl shift del insert shift insert ctrl insert ctrl shift insert backspace shift backspace up shift up ctrl up ctrl shift up down shift down ctrl down ctrl shift down left shift left ctrl left ctrl shift left right shift right ctrl right ctrl shift right page up shift page up ctrl page up ctr
41. of this button is the one of the tool grabbed and it provides fast access to the previously grabbed tool Note that the option to grab the current tool is also accessible by simply pressing the button of the Tool Bin panel which is present by default Grab the current tool with colors has the same effect as the previous operation except that the tool is saved with the A and B colors defined at the moment of grabbing This option is also accessible via the m button of the Tool Bin panel Add Action or series of actions Add new line of icons to be filled Add vertical and or horizontal separators between your icons click with the right button on the latter to remove them 18 2 The advanced functions of TV Paint Animation Pro Customized windows Adding an action Adding an action is done using the panel at the bottom left of this page Using the first two text fields you may define a name and in line help comment for your future customized function The buttons and menus List Tool and A color allow you to choose the icon corresponding to the action you will create goear i i jate janzi km Opposite you find the list of icons supplied with TVPaint Animation Pro To create a new icon you simply have to create a brush with its image and select the Tool button The numbered lines are the actions to be carried out one after the other when you click on the icon corresponding to your functio
42. the resizing of your original project to a new size The Correct aspect ratio button forces the program to respect the original image aspect ratio this avoids the creation of disproportionate images ae ie eee a The Stretch to new frame rate button when checked increases or decreases the number of images so that your new project has the same duration as the original project lf for example your original project displayed 24 images second and your frame rate is set to 12 images second your project will last twice as long the number of images is by default retained If the button Stretch to new frame rate is checked some images will be deleted so that the original project and modified project have the same duration In the opposite case original project with 12 images second modified to a project with 24 images second the modified project will be shorter than the original project If the button Stretch to new frame rate is checked intermediate images will be added to the modified project to make it coincide with the duration of the original project Handling TVPaint projects 5 5 Modify a project The two aforementioned examples are similar to the layer s contract and stretch section discussed in lesson 4 The Time interpolation button also refers to this function as it imposes layer stretching or contracting with interpolation when the button Stretch to new frame rate is checked
43. x lt 8 X lt MyNumberOfLayers 5 The operator is an comparison operator between two variables usually used during conditionnal tests For example if a 5 The comparison operator is not appropriated if want to know if two variables are equal For this you need to use the instruction cmp as shown in the clock grg script above if cmp command Circle 0 The Param and Parse instructions the launching modes 18 18 The advanced functions of TV Paint Animation Pro How to use the George scripting language The instruction Parse allows to split up a character string into smaller character strings Rainbow red orange yellow green blue indigo violet Parse Rainbow colori color2 color3 tv_warn color1 displays red tv_warn color2 displays orange tv_warn color3 displays yellow green blue indigo violet Usually each George Script begins with the Param instruction It allows to choose which action will have to be done by the user in order to start the script excecution drawing a circle a segment a rectangle The script line Param None allows the George Script to be executed without waiting for an user action The two script lines Param Single Parse result command x y button allows to execute a George Script aft
44. you can define a centered lighting thanks to the Center option or a directionnal lighting Direction option whose angle will have to be adjusted The Distortion gt Displacement Mapping Effect Adit EX piiri Ain i The Displacement Mapping effect works the same way fozi y as the Distortion gt Bump effect the panel and settings source por are the same ry Anim n Honnali eT Regarding the Displacement Mapping the pixels from Past Be amor bald List the current image which correspond to the pixels from ga mm zi the source image will be replaced by different pixels o appwin Center i from the current image Lirirsir i x alr a qilt Tiitii i me T dgib That means the software makes a translation of the iepr 1 dt P i smi 3 4 igi 4 4 current image pixels along a direction or a center only a ride OT 3 in the opaque areas of the Source image Heyer P meaw gt lt e e oe erder Current image Source image TVPaint logo The more luminous the Source image is the more important the displacement of the pixels in the current image is The darker the Source image is the less visible the Displacement Mapping is Source image paper 13 10 The effects of the Distortion group The Distortion gt Wrapping Grid effect The Distortion gt Wrapping Grid effect oF 4 Wrapping Grid Progress Profle oe Criei V rit Grid Height 4 T
45. 10 f rer Se Pa Utah Lien ad eee ery PE ey Time Line xSheet Projects H A Maw Menpe Auti Fil ms La r l j 7 j Chuds T a ae ee ae m cio 4 r D b House fats le Y Sun 3 i ran y E Fa a brace lall 10 E E Ran Golesi val ime air l P NoSund Mune Frame E i fi Temporal management of layers 4 9 Animation layers Flip the images of an Animation layer Some options may speed up your work considerably The option named in the title of this paragraph is used to flip the images of a layer in time It is only available in the layer menu after having selected the images to be flipped in an animation layer of your choice This is what happens to our cloud layer the last image is now first the last but one is second and soon The cloud now moves from right to left Move the layers in the timeline As with the image layers in lesson 3 it is possible to move the animation layers in space For example you may move the cloud behind the house or the sun in front of the cloud in case of a very high cloud obviously etc But this is not all image layers and animation layers may also be moved in time Increase the image layers to 20 frames and the following timeline will appear Giojp ome fa oon Tye Gio P se la sos f F lets Hene flare De Ji E d Now click on any ima
46. 18 The advanced functions of TVPaint Animation Pro In this lesson you will learn to e Create customised windows e Use the plug ins at your disposal e Use the macro scripting language George Customized windows Customized windows It is possible to create your own customized panels and icons in TVPaint Animation Pro to adapt the interface to your needs To access the customized windows of TVPaint Animation Pro click on the button encircled in the Tool bar below Perils a et Os se EDR Oil broish t Peinture A Uhila DA maa Mixer Anisha t b langeirs AALA AA Misc Divers The customized windows are similar to those shown opposite numerous icons are represented and each of them has a specific function By default when you create a new customized window the latter is empty but we will explain how to fill it later on A newly created panel is as shown in the image opposite and will be referred to as Tool Bar by default Grab Current tool Grab Current tool with colors A RMB click in an empty area of a customized window will open Add Action the menu shown opposite Add Mew Line Add vertical Separator Add Horizontal Separator The following options are available Grab Current tool allows you to save your current tool with all its settings and connections airbrush penbrush custombrush etc This action creates a button in the current panel The icon
47. 180 axis The general aspect will be less monotonous og each gradation represents 90 The minimal and maximal angular values on the vertical axis of te profile curve are the same as the one you have chosen Fans in the tool panel of the current custom brush For one fy you select an angle of 50 the gradations will then be Randoen e Size and Random We will now continue to work on the same example p i The purpose is now to make all the flags have a different size Of course we can connect the Size parameter of the brush to Random Pe a m e r enn E P Nevertheless a problem persist we can have too small flags To remedy this we only have to select a minimal size for our animbrush in the profile connection window Opposite and below some randomly selected values between 75 and 100 of the original size will be used Random Beat Meee Pre ee PP ee Other TVPaint Animation Pro drawing tools 7 17 To perfectly master the drawing tools Use of the brush as a drawing tool The use of predefined brushes and the connection parameters described above may produce spectacular results Tree leaves Luma stamp mode with green A color and black B color and a randomly selected brush angle We used the same brush with the same mode but with red colors to draw the blood below Clouds Alpha stamp mode with blue A color Angle randomly selected and Opacity of the animated brush connected to t
48. Aloha component TVPaint Animation Pro enables the independent modification of each of the components described above for all pixels on the screen Click on the icon shown opposite in the Tool bar to modify only the red component of the pixels The blue and green pixels are not affected by your work The yellow and purple pixels which are partly composed of red are partially affected This is what we refer to as Enabling the Red channel of the image You may proceed in the same way to enable the Green and Blue channels The left icon is the toggle to enable the Alpha channel When it is enabled all pixels are locked in their current opacity while the other channels can still be changed for these pixels this makes it an ideal tool for recoloring the lines of a drawing The effects in the Cofor menu Let s take a look at the image opposite the various colors were spread and mixed on a wooden palette aa neers ee 4 ie All colors of the chromatic circle are present on this palette red orange yellow green blue purple E s A E i This image will allow us to study all the color modifications available in TVPaint Animation Pro E w Ai i TE To do this load the project palette The Color gt Black amp White converter effect The Black amp White Converter effect has three parameters that may be locked using an animation key By default it transforms the images by deleting the color
49. EEN a 4 i p 7 Bm o erence cd a ee SS ee eS a SS tees eee A i ii if 2i Fi 9 4 Working with the FX stack The effect stack or FX stack You obtain the following image You have certainly understood that this effect creates a fade between the image of the current layer and the image on the lower layers Indeed but this effect is applied to the current image the first and not to all the images of the layer so let s remedy this Click on Undo to find the layer named house intact Now select all the images of the layer and apply the FX stack The effect now applies to the entire layer This is not yet perfect the fade effect is locked at 50 of its progress for all images of the layer it does not evolve in time ima Lew Wheel Pree H I Ma i ii Bena An TeS lss laladan Lai AARAARARARAARDANAARAAAN ajs TEE OAE hci etree LAIN PAATENEN FT a ee A Cuim E Em SSS SSS Sa Se a a eN Marj To obtain a true fade effect on the screen one has to apply the FX stack with a position value 0 for the first image 1 for the second 2 for the third and so on all the way to the last image assuming that our animated footage has a total length of 100 images If not complicated adjustment calculations must be made At first sight this seems like a long and complicated process Fortunately TVPaint Animation Pro offers tools wh
50. Generator effect 17 9 The tabs of the Particles Generator effect Aala Fx ah ee Particles Generator Progress Profile World Emiters T Emiifiers F ni Ciraction _ Ftvlulion 0 Curen Particles T Parlickes Paiided Single Link lo Ernitler os ar Kurnbuer W Sips 4 Lie wz rudl v Hide KUD Preview aly FX Stack All particles appear move along the screen and then disappear again The time the particles move is referred to as the Life span of the particles The Life parameter is used to adjust the particle life span in seconds itis short for fireworks party gt magic candle it may also be long nature gt fog The Number parameter contains the number of particles emitted per second if required this parameter may be very high pre defined example sci fi gt galaxywarp or reduced pre defined example object gt dice A decimal number enables emission of a very small number of particles For example a setting of 0 3 generates a particle every 3 seconds a setting of 0 01 generates a particle every 100 seconds When the Single box is checked and one particle has been emitted no other particle will be emitted before the last particle has reached the end of its life whether it is still on the screen or not The pre defined example object gt golf shot is ideal for testing this option Let s assume that the Life span of our golf ball particle corresponds to the tim
51. R G B values of the A color pixels The Screen mode inverses the values previously used Here again the A color is purple R 128 G 0 B 128 Other TVPaint Animation Pro drawing tools 1 5 The others drawing modes The Healing drawing mode The Healing drawing mode is an image editing tool It will certainly interest some users who want to improve their photography works like an enhanced pantograph it allows to reproduce the texture and the global illumination of a reference area and preserve the color data Circle Center Spline 3 Pointe x T The reference area can be set in the shape setting panel we already talked about it in the lesson 2 It is accessible in the Windows main menu or with a right click on one of the seven drawing shapes dot freehand line spline rectangle ellipse and floodfill Currer v Healing Set x ian Yf s2i_ sd In the examples below two wounds of a photographied hand have been corrected by using the Healing mode with the airbrush tool The pantograph mode on the right doesn t give good results with similar settings Opposite the source picture and two fingers that will be retouched 7 6 Other TVPaint Animation Pro drawing tools The others drawing modes i Source picture with Corrected picture Corrected picture the reference area red cross with the Healing mode with the Pan
52. Ray Court 16 Our reference image The HUD of the effect 12 4 The effects of the Stylize group The Stylize gt Toon Shading effect The Intensity option is used to vary the power of the shadow in time The Profile option is used to vary the nature of the shadow Profile E Frofile Profile AA The Size in pixels sets the range of the shadow The Angle parameter is used to choose the direction of you lighting shadow When using animation keys the Rotation parameter reflects the number of complete rotations to be carried out before arriving at the chosen angle The Spread parameter in degrees defines the angle over which the shadow will be spread see next page The effects of the Stylize group 12 5 The Stylize gt Toon Shading effect The Ray Count parameter refines the result when applying the effect The higher this value the higher the quality of your image the lower the value the more noise your shadow will contain The Border box if checked is used to create a shadow from the borders of your project see below Original image Border option not enabled Border option enabled Once you know how to use the Toon shading effect it is possible to create all kinds of shadows for your characters 12 6 The effects of the Stylize group The Stylize gt Erode effect The Stylize gt Erode effect This effect enables eroding the contours of an
53. TVPaint Animation Pro When creating a project it is therefore necessary to indicate which of the two fields will be displayed first using the Fields popup menu The option None in this menu is used to create a project without using fields First approach of TVPaint Animation Pro 1 17 Lesson 2 Drawing basics In this lesson you will Learn how to handle the various tools airbrush penbrush wetbrush pencil mechanical pencil Discover the various facets of the color picker Draw simple geometric forms and floodfill surfaces Study the notions of opacity and transparence of a pixel Study the notions of colored background and layers Use the different drawing modes Drawing basics It is very easy to draw using TVPaint Animation Pro In this second lesson we will draw a small house very simple using TVPaint Animation Pro s tools In this way we can study the basics which will allow you to express your artistic talents Even if it is possible to draw with a trackball or mouse it is strongly recommended to use a graphic tables equipped with a stylus This tool requires getting used to for beginners but it is much more natural to use for drawing Your first drawing The first geometric form draw a rectangle Once the program is started proceed as follows open a project in PAL square format FaF a Click on the Penbrush icon on the Tools panel as soon as the tool is Fi tai selected the icon
54. The TVPaint logo begin to get blurred gt And here is the final result TVPaint TVPaint Before applying the effect After applying the effect 2 example What happens with a bigger matrix Let s take a look at the matrix opposite each coefficient is equal to 3 except the central coefficient which is equal to 1 All the other coefficients are equal to zero and not visible here Using this 5x5 matrix 5 rows 5 columns will make each pixel modify itself according to its neighboring pixels We use here a larger radius than in the 3x3 matrix of the first example In this case the principle is the same as the one enunciated above but more pixels are taken into account to calculate the average It gives a larger blur than the one obtained with the 3x3 matrix see next page The effects of the Stylize group 12 17 The Stylize gt Convolve Effect Below two zooms on the T letter of the TVPaint logo gt Before applying the effect After applying the effect TVPaint After applying the effect Before applying the effect After applying the effect TVPaint Before applying the effect It is easy to understand that the bigger your matrix will be the more coeficients equal to 3 in our example the more pixels will be used to calculate the resulting colors the larger will b
55. The option Reset deletes all the keys of your effect The Path recorder Path recording may also be carried out in any other effect to create a path The option Path Recorder in the Too s menu relative to the position parameter s of your effect will help you to do this The steps described above for the AutoPaint effect are still applicable in this case Path Recorder linear x w 320 aw JP Record a path Tools yv i240 Preserve timing w Position Copy from Stack List Using the standard Path Recorder allows you to generate a large number of keys containing position parameters however contrary to the AutoPaint effect it does not allow to restore pressure azimuth and altitude 14 4 The effects of the Motion and Paint groups management of the paths The Path manager The Path manager The Path Manager mentioned above has four tabs The Manage tab allows you to choose a path amongst those already saved in the Bin and then to rename copy delete or even invert it the path will in this case be taken in the reverse Patt direction when used Rename Cupy ier Delle When you use an effect of the Paint or Motion group the _Cunstant Speed Constant Speed option move the keys of the path to keep the same speed along your path for your strokes or animations Average Smooth Size F po Mult te mer This is notably useful when you work with the Motion gt Keyframer or Moti
56. The third section is used to Magnetize the various windows of your interface This renders management of their movement more practical You may also choose to display the program without tool or title bars for windows users which increases the project working zone The fourth section is used to select which type of file requester is to be used Below you will find examples of TVPaint Animation Pro specific as well as standard Windows and Mac OS X file requesters tel Te Se ee ee ee Barama E Burami Ter hiara e erie ao N rea Panna de omiaan AL Ponte on trae I Cy Beem tts st aes cheery LL Gmi te Ls cone CH Ema Darla Leri TAT E Eh Cruma COE i _ Macintosh HD Nom Date de modification LA Applications 20 mars 2006 14 24 Dossier Biblioth que 15 mars 2006 09 03 Dossier Type ite 0 a eens cet Macintosh HD __ Wacom amp Developer 6 f vrier 2006 11 48 Dossier laj a k Guides de l utilisateur et informations 6 f vrier 2006 18 40 4 Ko Alias fma Syst me 4 janvier 2006 16 11 Dossier GB Bureau i Utilisateurs 6 f vrier 2006 18 40 Dossier q ematecki A Applications f R Documents Ta Musique fan Images f The TVPaint Animation Pro file requester is common to many software packages developed by TVPaint D veloppement and is present in your
57. Tornado effect gt gt The Angle parameter allows you to define the power of the applied distortion gt gt When using animation keys the Rotation parameter reflects the number of complete rotations to be carried out before arriving at the chosen angle The Distortion gt Bump effect Furl Fix ptis Rir w et YF Bump ki Progemus Profiles an source Display Pre Behavior Haold First Anim Marrneal Post Baham r Hold Last iset T Flip None FT ADIN Cener x e Linc x aian iF Cena r Toot yah Swnt 2 d Tag P q agt 4 igh Ei Full Hidak Preview Current image The Bump effect allows the creation of a relief which will be provided by a source image over the current layer The more luminous the source image is the more important the relief of the pixels in the current image is The darker the source image is the less visible the relief is On the right below the source image and the current image are the same It gives a feeling of relief on the whole screen Source image TVPaint logo Source image paper The effects of the Distortion group 13 9 The Distortion gt Bump effect You can adjust the depth of the relief and soften the borders using the numeric fields Depth and Smooth A relief requires a lighting to be visible thanks to the Apply with menu
58. X and Panning Y variables are used to translate the image on the screen The Center button is used to re center it The Scale variable is used to modify the size of the image increase or decrease The Angle variable is used to rotate the image The Reset button resets the settings The Preview box enables interactive viewing of the previous parameters on the screen Once satisfied with the settings the Apply button is pressed to finish the operation i 4 y i d es i Pa Original image The Transform tool in Shift mode The Transform tool in Fill mode Other TVPaint Animation Pro drawing tools 7 25 The transformation tools You may also work directly on the screen using the mouse left click and slide to modify panning right click and slide to modify size Panning tool applied to image and selection Ve To shift all images of a layer first select them all Use the keyboard shortcut S Ctrl S or the contextual menu in the timeline The Wrap tool on the main panel As the name implies this tool is used to put the image or current selection onee i Apply to image 7 into perspective Applyto Selection modification of the four corner coordinates of the image is sufficient to vi ooo Obtain a convincing effect id You may or may not fill the screen with the current image see examples xa pa a vz 0 00 e below x3 54000 Here again the same system as above is
59. a column below it Each plane has a check box which allows you to choose whether or not this plane should be used in your animation The planes order is inverted compared to the order in which you opened your projects the last project opened is the first plane the first project opened will be the last plane You will have noticed that each plane has a Z axis position value With the default settings each plane is given a Z value which is a multiple of 100 O for the first plane 100 for the second 200 for the third etc Therefore all you have to do is define the Z values for each plane as you require and then validate your choice All your planes will then be incorporated into the effect with the Z values defined above and all that remains is for you to animate them Create planes from the layers of your current project Assuming the project MPC tvp supplied on the CD is open check the layers from current project box and then validate your choice The Wizard will then take each of the layers of the current project and incorporate them in each layer as a plane The planes staging window corresponding to stage 2 appears and displays each layer with the associated Z value Saloetwhich layers to stage Adjwet color puding Adusi 2deoth mubiplan camera lo ae B character Z 4 e E trees 1 Eju 4 v I troes 2 z 300 Ml forest Ziso a vo mountain Z 500 ala e BR stars zl 500 v Bl sy z700 4 OK a
60. account the opacity of the pixels in the same way as the Alpha option We generally obtain a Lens Flare effect when the lens of your camera is pointed towards a very small and very bright light source 16 8 The effects of the Rendering group The Rendering gt Lighting effect The Rendering gt Lighting effect r Lightirg Progress Prota T Lights 6 xan ef vafin an xali aw Tois Y afin jo amda 100 ah Padius IE aie lt mii e soa intensay ioe a d ocd Ambient Dell sane ce himii Rename rmni T Lighe Hiara F Duplicate Spot Prevfiie saia R A Ambient 2 tee Hida HUDD Prev umni 3 gt FA Stack Spot 4 This effect is used to light up the image or sequence of your choice as if using an exterior light source light projector By default nothing is present in the list The Lights menu may be used to create one or several lighting effects among the following categories Spot Omni and Ambient As soon as a lighting effect is created you may duplicate delete or rename it The Lights menu displays the name of the light whose parameters are shown in the stack If you work with several lights you may go from one to the other by selecting their names in the Lights menu Here an overview of the different lighting types Ambient lighting lights up the scene globally in the color of your choice Value
61. and remains at the value you have chosen The Variation represented by the V button is used to render the parameter with which it is associated more or less random RMB click on the V icon to enter a numeric value in this field For example if the particles Size parameter is set at 50 a Variation with a value of 25 means that each particle emitted will have a random size ranging from 25 to 75 In the example given above misc gt plumefury the variation function was used to attribute the particle Size Spin and Life random values Combined with the Motion randomness parameter and correctly used the Variation function provides excellent results It is almost impossible to tell that a computer was used to create this effect 17 14 The Rendering gt Particles Generator effect The tabs of the Particles Generator effect The tab Emitters gt Particles gt Shape This tab is used to define the type of particles to be used Client Shape git TR 3 Source Default Cure Piarts las TEE Peien Paii wid clk Handle Center Y Bange ee Link in Emir ma t S f f Pumba W Er i p 4H ok Liia rim leit Penta D jib Halasi ERE nave Ant Aliasing ee yee J E Heee Cott Animation Particle Age F hance Gan ai Blend Color Coor Y Color Source Kone ainiin Parii Mag bona Calas j Quick Preview m F Oper Goce Aom i 4 Ea a a
62. and the keys of your choice Linear Spline or Smooth For example in the trajectory below the logo follows a spline on the screen while zooming lightly towards the foreground Now we will make it a bit more complicated It is possible to leave a trail behind our logo a trail that depends on its speed and trajectory Go to the Render tab the Blur step value defines the number of logos which will make up the trail The Blur Size is used to set the parameters of the trail length see opposite 14 10 The effects of the Motion and Paint groups management of the paths The Motion gt Keyframer effect Note that a low value generates a slight blur in the movement direction which is ideal for creating blurs generated by fast object movement A zero value will eliminate the trail In this second example we will pivot our TVPaint logo using the pitch heading and bank parameters full al pida FHA j p rii Apa PU Reset the values of the Keyframer effect to zero select the TVPaint logo as source again and modify the Bank angle using the slider The logo then turns along the blue axis represented on the diagram see below Reset the values of the Keyframer effect to zero and proceed in the same way with the Pitch parameter The logo now turns along the green axis represented in the diagram L With the Heading parameter the logo turns along the red axis r
63. are not necessarily all visible at first use Below you will find a summary before starting a detailed description Particles Generator The names in the lower levels are sub tabs World Emitters For example the particles tab has two sub tabs JS Current and Shape Curent Particles Current Shape _ oe The Rendering gt Particles Generator effect 17 3 The tabs of the Particles Generator effect The World tab The World tab is used to manage the parameters of the world in which our particles will move see below Options ir Paniclons Geanormor Progress Profile Hounding tox peed 123456 1 Graty 4 64 ajda Wind Didean ee Angle 0 Rotation o i Wind Strength 0 T m Sai r Alpha Comision goure EMSA Anim Normal Pii Behri Hold Lal Ofsel fo Cs as Flip Mone st nie WuikkPrevigw Full x Hide HUD Proviuny v Apply FX Slack Two preview options are offered in the World tab the Bounding box check box and the Quick preview button a The Bounding box check box is used to display a colored rectangle around the 4 Ti particles present in the current project sy window when the preview button of the FX Gl stack is enabled 5 A NAY The particles going out of the project which are susceptible to come back under the influence of certain factors wind gravity etc are also framed 4 Although this
64. as reference for the following toonshading effect in your FX stack fH amp Naw wO Teonshading 7 Auto Fe 7 ul E aa J colors J E E 100 1 33399 F Buckpiuund a alm ms 1 Mo Sound Color BE Frame wl O uk FIE effect E r 223 _ SS ae ll E In this example it is also possible to replace the effect Stylise gt ToonShading by the effect Stylize gt Drop Shadow the Shadow Only option is also present in this In that case you will obtain a classical shadow Of course the character layers co ors and Running Kid will stay unchanged 12 14 The effects of the Stylize group The Colors gt Image Source effect Here is the 3D view of the layers you can obtain after using the effects Colors gt Image source Stylise gt Drop Shadow and Stylise gt Toonshading Toonshading Layer Borders Layer Colors Layer Drop Shadow Layer Backgroung Layer The resulting image The effects of the Stylize group 12 15 The Stylize gt Convolve Effect The Stylize gt Convolve Effect The effect Stylise gt Convolve allows to modiffy the pixels of an image or an animated sequence by using a matrix here above on the right For the neophyte a matrix is an ordered set of numbers listed in a rectangular form For the mathematicians it is a powerful and convenient calculation tool used in alge
65. ay ig Mei A Ae Oa Me n gs Mog Rar SO bi Rang Ri Bg ad be i le N a bm 9 bist A IAEE AEII EAH AEL 4 ma Sy ty Oe 5 Ehhh k Fs a EET aa Ty kt The Halftone effect reproduces the aspect of a grid on the current image and gives the current image the appearance of an artist s canvas You may set the parameters for the horizontal and vertical cells H cells and V cells Direction Opacity of the grid as well as their type Line Dot Cross Checks Blocks etc There are also several application modes Color on black Color on white Saturation etc Finally you may use the Jitter parameters which will slightly modify the shape of the grid The Stylize gt Lumix effect This effect exchanges the luminosity values of the pixels in an image or source video footage with those of another image or footage which gives the impression of seeing an image through the contours of another image see below ponpes e EE lis i r atil amp a 4 p aol ba ai Fa i Th We d Bi PES Lil a The effects of the Stylize group 12 11 The Stylize gt Lumix effect The Source Image notion A source image or footage is used in the Rendering box of the Lumix effect and some other effects in particular the Motion gt Keyframer effect which will be studied later Let s discuss this further TVPaint Animation Pro offers some effects which require the use of an image or footage other than the cur
66. be discouraging having to use the sliders continually to only view a section of the timeline Fortunately it is possible to modify the timeline scale cc cc S S0 pe _ e Click and hold the Z button of the timeline to modify its display stretch or increase the icons from the current image depending on the left or right movement of the mouse or trackball The Auto Fit popup menu may be used to adjust the size of the icons in the timeline in order to view the entire project current layer current image current selection or keys Start frame negative images If you take a closer look at the timeline you will see that our project starts at image 1 or the time ok Cancel 0 hour O minute 0 second 1 trame in Time Code mode It is possible to modify the start values for our project using the Start image option in the Project menu enter the value required in the corresponding numeric field Temporal management of layers 4 11 More details x4 You will note that it is possible to place your layers before image 0 in the timeline AYA using the Shift key while dragging the layer to the left You will therefore obtain negative images in the timeline or time values close to 23 hours 59 minutes 59 seconds Using the Bookmarks ime Line eSheet Peajects H 8 Now 7 Moge i AMOFI Z j1 a i TET Wadd Fi eal 100 r m m imasi mi m imas m m Bo Ne
67. because they produce both circles However this effect produces multicolored waves and can be adjusted with several parameters The Linear 1 Linear 2 or the Smooth option in the Generator menu in the settings panel modifies the profile of the generated wave s shape look at the examples below It is possible to work with one two three or four circles see below F mz EN IS Z AA N f You can choose the way these waves will mix together Below you can find the modes N m a gt shy a G2 NY YA SSE 3 Minimum Average Difference Distanc Finally some settings related to color channels are also available Global phase Red phase Green phase Blue phase and Alpha phase 16 24 The effects of the Rendering group The Rendering gt Plasma effect rD WOO EACEA COAN A ON The Rendering gt Perlin Noise effect RRSSAA This effect generates shapes thanks to mathematical functions and is sometimes used to imitates water waves and other water effects You can adjust Width and Height of the generated shapes mix these shapes to the current image thanks to the Colorize Tint Multiply modes use a picked color a gradient or the color from the current image change the complexity of the shapes thanks to the Octave setting Invert the effect colors or change its Opacity Octave 1 Octave 2 Octave
68. been applied The effects of the Color and Keying groups 11 7 The effects in the Color menu Let s take the curves below as examples Logrtineceg fy P Lier nee iy y Laminne _f We have just studied the luminosity curve in detail Now it s up to you to work with the other curves and use them to the advantage of your projects In this example the luminosity of every pixel is divided by two after application of the effect for example a luminosity value of 50 changes to 25 after application of the effect In this example the luminosity of every pixel remains unchanged In this last example any pixel with a luminosity value between approximately 64 and 192 will turn black the others remain unchanged The Color gt Histogram effect We have just seen that it is possible to work on pixels using curves TVPaint Animation Pro also offers the possibility to work on the colors on a more statistic level thanks to the Histogram effect The first function of the histogram is to provide information about the distribution of colors on the screen Let s take for example the images below and select the Master tab in the first row of tabs and Luminosity in the second We will obtain the following graphs a aca i m Ta The Log box enables use of a logarithmic scale instead of a proportional scale For the moment pay attention that this box is not checked The more dark pixels the ima
69. create a path which follows the engine s chimney Therefore when the train moves an emitter following this path will always be at chimney level In the images below the smoke particles are linked with the emitter which is the engine s chimney set at 100 The movement of the smoke is not natural 2 4 example the beacons below as they are particles are necessarily linked to their emitter the roof of the police car They move at the same time as the car when it is driving The Link to emitter is therefore 100 The Rendering gt Particles Generator effect 17 11 The tabs of the Particles Generator effect The Emitters gt Particles gt Current tab This tab is used to manage the properties of the particles themselves Ad FX Dphorr n F ew Parties Caner r Gin Progress Protea World Emitare Ermhers Pinint ti ee em ae be Siren Parties iai Pamcies Pacai Sarge Link bo Enter 0 m i m camur Shape Sic i Wetoesty VW TE weight a fan Pouce wi 100 Fhinan gyd I0 Opacity M Wis a Mefon Randomness VR la Spin AP fio Adgn SS Full Hide HUD Preview Anih H Shack Currant Shape Size Vi di Velocity A t100 d Weight Vi dh Bounce wW i100 dk Frito a fc dk Opacity Aloo Motion Randomness NIF io ib Spin IPF for 4 Align a
70. create animated graphics Working with instances new Now we can break move and resize again the existing instances in order to draw the second series of inbetweens Below you will find the begining of the resulting timeline number of cells of your instances and then improve the whole timing of the s At any moment of this process you can by only few mouse clicks change the F animation Continue the process by breaking again the existing instances and by adding inbetweens Stop it once you are satisfied with your animation F 1 To finish here is a quick overview of the steps which were needed to create the animation from the first to the second key image AO The blue below shows where the last instance was broken ie splitted into two instances a 2 Here are the two key images at the E B 1 extremities of the animation I created in the middle J 5 1h z ees ert fh of the layer Two new instances are created for the inbetweens The instances are moved and resized Two last instances are created for the last inbetweens The steps to create animated graphics 6 13 Working with instances new How to change the colors of a rough You can use the option opposite of the tool bar in order to draw only on the Opaque or semi transparent pixels of the screen oC S7 Wi ee ii L Lor p ian g g Y F gt d
71. current layer will be modified according to your settings if required use the Undo option to undo the modification Don t forget that all images of the layer must be selected if required Working in real time Almost all software packages on the market impose a preparation stage and then an effect calculation stage Viewing the final result on the screen is only possible after completing these two stages In the best case you have a window for a low res preview of your effect at your disposal TVPaint Animation Pro does not adhere to this model and employs a much more interactive method You have the possibility to view the results of these effects in real time Once the Preview box is checked it is possible to play your complete animation using the Play button on the control panel It will then be shown with all the modifications you have chosen in your stack In other words any modification of the parameters within the effect stack is immediately visible on the screen in full size and full resolution whether your project is a simple image or an animation Sliding along the timeline using the keys lt and also allows you to view progress frame by frame Working with the FX stack 9 3 The effect stack or FX stack The various viewing modes je For the moment we will stay with our Mosaic effect Split Preview Lett Split Preview Right There are several types of viewing they are available in the Split Preview
72. depends on the tool chosen penbrush airbrush pencil etc see above o The form of the circles rectangles splines obtained using the procedure f circles segments B zier splines applied using different tools cea The Add to bin option allows to keep in memory the current spline It is often very usefull especially if you need to re use it later Once the Add to Bin option Clase Spline is selected the software asks you to name your spline Re using a stored Spline can be done by choosing its name in the menu ae You can also delete a stored spline thanks to the Delete menu Apply Spline Ain ii Mir a Your splines will be kept in the bin after restarting the software only if you saved the current configuration sil oa Please remember that if you delete or reset the configuration all your My third Spline Splines will be lost 2 12 Drawing basics Further details Adjust the Shape settings DGirl Carnier T The panel shown opposite is accessible in the Windows main menu or Tae with a right click on one of the seven drawing tool Panto Sot dot freehand segment spline rectangle ellipse and floodill In the first popup menu you can define two methods of drawing circles You may choose to o draw your circles fixing a centre and then a radius o draw your circles defining three points on the screen geometrically there is only one circle passing through three non al
73. effect consequently follows a path as time progresses In our example the path is visible via the HUD and looks a bit like a red V Linear x It is possible to choose an interpolation mode between the key Tools v 240 f points which define your paths You may choose to connect the points in a linear spline or smooth manner using the first menu of the effect the Too s menu will be studied later in lesson 14 Lente Working with the FX stack 9 9 The path Linear Spline Smooth A og When using Spline it is possible to use handles The Ctrl key mouse click on a handle are used to move only this handle Moving from key to key It is not always easy to place yourself on a key within the timeline especially when the project contains many images The triangle buttons in the effect stack or in the current project window see opposite are used to move rapidly from one key to another without having to use the lt and keys or the mouse If they are in black they indicates that there is an animation on the left or the right of the current position Otherwise there is no more animation key The contextual menu for the keys A right click in the timeline on a keyline see opposite calls up a Create Key textual Pelele Key contextual menu You may Select All create or delete keys which requires confirmation Cut Key select one or all
74. even be faded In case of circles and rectangles you can adjust the position of the center of the shape The linear and tools menu will be explained in the lesson introducing the Motion group effects vV vV vV vV sake D A The Transition gt Fade effect The Fade transition is the most common transition ever used and does not need any other settings than Position It was also introduced in lesson 9 E 0 8 The effects of the Blur and Transition groups The Transition group effects The Transition gt Slide effect The Slide transition moves your video in a predefined direction you have to select You just have to select the direction in the Direction menu The Transition gt Rotary effect This transition clears the image following the movement of a clock s hands The checkbox allows you to select the direction of movement and the menu is used to select the center on which the effect will be applied The Transition gt Page Turn effect This transiton effect acts as if a paper sheet was removed from the screen You can choose to turn the page from the window border you want thanks to the Direction menu There are three modes image color and gradient as shown below NEN Increasing the transition possibilities by using the FX stack You can easily create new transitions possibilities by using multiple effects in a same FX stack For example using the Classic Transiti
75. example and will deliver results considerably different to those expected in particular if you work with a platform of the TabletPC type or in double screen configuration We therefore recommend you check the compatibility of your hardware to benefit fully from this function The Display tab General Affichage Interface Wemoire amp Cache Brosses Cacher l aper u des brosses JK Annuler The Display tab concerns brush display the latter will be discussed in detail in lesson 4 The Hide brush button is used to mask the brushes when they are used as drawing tools Only the mouse cursor remains visible on the screen and a frame indicates the exact location of the brush This option is sometimes practical when working on a computer with limited resources the use and display of large brushes may slow the computer down First approach of TVPaint Animation Pro 1 13 The Preferences panel The Interface tab General Display Irv terface Weron Cache Color Desktop Background Default Y Color scheme a Highlight Border Mirror Apply Reset Cursor Crass Over projects Windows Ea Magnet onl Mo border File requester TYPaint Animation Pro on Never confirm Project window Always behind Panel OK The first section of this tab may be used to modify the program interface colors The default colors used in TVPaint Animation Pro are light gray in order not to interfere with the colors used
76. executed several times For instance a script which tests the pixel s colors several time and acts differently depending on the obtained results Reccopying the same lines several time in a George Script can quickly become fastidious It doesn t make the things easier when you need to check or modify your script That s the reason why writing procedures and functions is very convenient A function is a set of instructions and commands which allows to execute a precise task inside a George Script The functions are independent from the the remainder of the George Script and are located at the end of the script The part of a George Script which distincts itself from the function s will be called main part of the script All the functions are available at any moment in order to be used by the Main part of the script A function can receive parameters and always returns a result A procedure is a function which does not return results Here is an exemple of a script using a function Of course using functions is really usefull when you have to create bigger and more sophisticated scripts Param Single Parse result command abscissa ordinate button tv_warn TestBlackColor abscissa ordinate Main part of the script A Function V Function TestBlackColor x y Local rg b alpha sum tv_getpixel x y Parse result r g b alpha If alpha lt gt 0 sum rt g b If sum 0 Return the pixel s color is black Else Retur
77. f the white rectangle to the left You have already seen the Color mode keyboard shortcut F2 as you have been using it since the beginning of this lesson When you use the Color mode your line and color are applied over the already existing image Wetbrush in Color mode When you select the Behind mode keyboard shortcut F3 TVPaint Animation Pro will take into account the already existing pixels from the line as well as their level of opacity When the option is chosen the color is only applied to the transparent surfaces of the image The color is therefore not applied over the house or over the sun but is partially visible through the latter Floodfill in the entire image in blue using this mode Wetbrush in Behind mode Mechanical pencil and Pencil tools A few words about the Mechanical pencil and Pencil tools to finish off our drawing select the Pencil tool in color mode and one or several shades of green They are used to add grass at the foot of the house For more precise drawing e g a signature the Mechanical pencil tool is the most suitable The drawing above will serve as a basis to study the other drawing modes Drawing basics 2 7 The drawing modes The Erase drawing mode The task of the Erase mode keyboard shortcut F4 as the name implies is to erase the pixels of the current layer by making them transparent Thanks to this mode it is possible
78. first ensure your peripheral device is correctly installed Then you must right click on the V button located on the bottom right hand side of your project window This action opens the Video grabber window Video Input Video Output In the Video Intput tab Device VOM od The first Device menu allows you to select the type of Input peripheral device you intend using to grab the video footage Format Mone ha settings The nput menu displays a list of the peripheral devices available and allows you to select the device to be used The Format menu allows you to select the resolution with which your peripheral device will grab the footage which in turn depends on the capabilities of your equipment The Settings button allows you to automatically open the options panel of your equipment and define in most cases certain parameters such as luminosity frame rate contrast etc If your device is correctly connected to your computer opening this window will show what is presently seen by Mi hli the device in the preview window If you wish to view this T Pee z video in the project window left click on the same V button ou used to open the Video grabber panel enhi e P SADDA Field As IS Grab Input The value of the Mix parameter defines the video footage opacity percentage This will allow you to continue viewing your project whatever happens Finally the Apply in menu allows you to define whether
79. floor level These balls will slow down and stop due to the friction of the floor If the same balls are thrown on a lawn they will be stopped even faster 17 12 The Rendering gt Particles Generator effect The tabs of the Particles Generator effect The pre defined example objects gt dice also provides an interesting case by increasing the Friction parameter to 180 and due to the fact that the particles grow smaller in size during their life span one gets the impression that the dice roll on a surface and after a certain limit fall into a void The Opacity parameter is used to set particle transparency This is very useful for example when you are animating soap bubbles these wouldn t be perfectly Opaque The Motion Randomness parameter controls the movement of imperfect particles and accentuates the realistic aspect of the particle jet It is used for example to create an uneven fog movement of bubbles in the air smoke etc This parameter is used to avoid having to create too many animation keys which would be required to render a trajectory uneven This parameter comes into its own with the Variation parameter described hereafter The pre defined example party gt popcorn uses this method The Spin parameter controls particle movement around its local axis the latter is defined in the Handle popup menu of the Shape tab which will be discussed below Its use may provide various results As requir
80. frontier that the B spline define An opacity gradient will follow the B spline see below This is very convenient to cut a picture more softly as the tail of the squirrel below The positive values create an opacity gradient outside the B spline and the negatives values create opacity gradients inside the B spline Edge parameter equal to 0 Edge parameter negative Edge parameter positive On the opposite screenshot the edge parameters was used to cut out the tail of the squirrel va Once the edge parameter is changed the HUD ve shows a blue spline The opacity gradient is located between the yellow and the blue spline and follow the shape of those two splines A The sixth icon allows you to adjust the sharpness of each point the numeric field and the associated mini slider can replace the interactive HUD Modify the sharpness is like changing the distance between the spline and the selected control point A value of 100 for the sharpness parameter will turn the spline into a pointed one The B spline will follow the angle given by the vertex see below This allows you to a place curvature of the B spline Cuye ju 7 shap o di of The effects of the Rendering group 16 17 The Rendering gt RotoTracking effect On the left picture the sharpness parameter of the right top point of the spline is set to 0 On the right picture the sharpness parameter of the right top point of
81. go back as many times i E Lu iH as you want using the Undo option keyboard shortcut U on the main DO DO panel Note that the Redo option keyboard shortcut Shift U has the Parm opposite effect Notion of layers and colored background PEFFE Wari Parc x Z river Let s add a sun eisi AAO 4 ANS Change the tool by selecting the FreeHandDot icon Color _ in the main panel and then the Airbrush tool set LISS A TR Tan the size to 125 pixels radius and the power to EERE 100 Ba ow S Siw 7 Pow P 100 ENGE ee dele fogiey ete S EEE Fa Using the method described above recover the yellow color in the Mixer tab of the color picker then click on the white part of the image to draw your sun You will obtain the result shown opposite At this point it seems at first sight that the image is mainly composed of white in fact that is not the case If the layer window is not visible on the screen click on the Timeline icon on the toolbar to make it appear keyboard shortcut 0 on the numeric pad Now change the Color option bottom left of the timeline into None F No Sound then into Check and note the changes taking place in the current Color QFrame project window Vez Vie VEZ 3 e pm Eo x background Color background None background Check Everything happens as if our house and sun were drawn on a glass plate the latter rest
82. group 16 3 The Rendering gt Lens Flare effect Modify the profile of your artifact using the profile curve This effect is constructed in the same way as we have already seen in lesson 2 Correctly setting the profile parameters is essential if exceptional results are to be obtained see examples below g Q LO z i F Fi Y Blade Mode User Defined r Peti Blade Count 5 Form Factor 0 8 lt a Angle T Rotation m Rotation gt Bimi ode Cimi Pun heza HLD bree ee _ Appa E iii The Blade mode indicated above enables adjustment of all Lens Flares of the generic type according to the diaphragm blades of your virtual camera See diagrams on page 2 of this lesson It is very important to set its parameters correctly if realistic results are to be obtained You may choose a Blade mode of the Circle type images above or a user defined Blade mode see next page 16 4 The effects of the Rendering group The Rendering gt Lens Flare effect You may choose the Blade count for your virtual camera lens see examples below based on the various profiles described above From left to right The lens diaphragm of your camera is circular with three blades five blades and seven blades You may modify the Form factor With a factor of 0 the points are linked to form a circle With a factor of 1 the points are linked by straight segments With a
83. gt Waves studied in lesson 13 Below we imitated two water waves as if two rocks were thrown into water We have afterwards to manage the transition between the Sunset and the Clouds animation layers Below the Transition gt Classic effect with the circle option has been used Here is the timeline and the a l s Itis possible to modify the timeline scale thanks to the Z button of the timeline see Se lesson 4 s You can also use bookmarks to navigate easily through the timeline see lesson 4 Let s now add a raimbow in the cloudy sky To do so Create a new layer the clouds animation layer will remain intact Draw a rectangle filled with the spectrum gradient as shown opposite Working with the FX stack 9 19 Introduction to the video effects After this you have to use a multiple FX stack with these effects in order from the first to the last Colors gt Color Adjust the red area should be on the outside of the arc and the violet area on the inside Blur gt Radial Blur this effect will allow you to create the arc itself The center of the radial blur must be located far Be Cian from the colored rectangle out of the viewable area to be we Radial Riu Progress Protie fo H exact r Linea os E E Cunat ae YAR Blur gt Gaussian Blur will merge the colors a little ira Transition gt Fade will make the rainb
84. image or video footage This may create an interesting effect for the appearance or disappearance of images as well as for the attenuation of contours see below There are two parameters that may be adjusted using keys Width and Height TVPaint TVPaint 1VPami Vee r The Stylize gt Add Border effect This effect is in a way the opposite of the Erode effect It enables creation of a border of the thickness of your choice around an image As TVPaint Animation Pro works with sub pixel precision it is possible to increment this thickness in steps of 0 5 pixel using the associated mini slider It is also possible to choose the color of the border TVPaint TVPaint TVPaint Here again the option Border only will be studied later in the chapter called the Ay Color gt Image Source effect The Stylize gt Bloom effect This effect produces a light blurred aura on the current image und may give an unreal aspect to an animated footage Contrary to the Glow effect this bloom is applied to the opaque areas of the image The effects of the Stylize group 12 7 The Stylize gt Bloom effect The parameters Width and Height are the same as those for the Glow effect If you wish you may apply the bloom effect to the channel of your choice Red Green or Blue and control Blur Saturation and Luminosity of this aura The Stylize gt Blender effect lu d Ti i This effect blends the original image
85. in a certain way and then transforms it into a large puzzle the pieces of which have distorted contours The adjustable parameter enables random modification of the result The Stylize gt Mosaic effect This effect was already studied in lesson 9 It enlarges the pixels on the screen to the Width and Height of your choice The Stylize gt Posterize effect This effect is used to reduce the number of colors on the screen and simplifies the original image or video footage The Number of colors parameter may be set using the mini slider and locked with a key This Number of colors parameter does not represent the exact number of colors on the screen but the number of colors blended to obtain the effect required 12 8 The effects of the Stylize group The Stylize gt Noise effect The Stylize gt Noise effect Hs This effect moves the pixels of the original image at a distance corresponding to your parameter setting You may also choose the percentage of pixels of the original image to be moved Well applied this effect gives the impression that one sees the image or video footage through frosted glass Have you ever looked at a comic or cartoon strip through a magnifying glass The color areas are made up of superposed round points of different sizes and colors The Print effect reproduces exactly this aspect You may choose to work in Color in Black amp White or work only on the non opaque ar
86. interesting But we will quickly remedy this situation Calibrate the options relative to the audio track Now that the project is loaded in TVPaint Animation Pro let s import the audio track called voice mp3 Once your audio track is loaded Begin by setting the offset parameter with accuracy Lock your audio track in order to prevent unwanted changes Select movement or always as parameter for the audio jog with a duration of 2 or 3 seconds see first chapter for more details sound that you will hear after each movement throughout the timeline This option is functional only if the jog audio parameter is not in none mode O The option called Enter audio scrub duration allows to specify the duration of the a h At this state of the process your movements throughout the timeline should be followed by one or several sounds ino MGheet Projects New oo Merge Autofit A 1 bounis fall ma face hair Yal 100 z P haircolor Y a 100 P Poows fall 10 v e i alos u pocie mall 100 I __ Pricing fal 100 e e pocoo v a 100 E m li gt b itg pouty val ma al ios la a a El a a a a B a a Voi color ml aow i ji m rr Tike bl la ii atl en ah Bhp dt 9 Bs RE Color w Frame i r Baad Positioning syllables and phonemes It is now advised to display the
87. is empty 15 6 The Rendering gt Multi plane Camera Effect The Planes tab Mew Plane Rename Duplicate Delete vir Mut Plina Canora Progress Profle Open Stage Wead Flane 1 Miaka lS m Plane 2 Plane 3 Top Hide HUD Preview Plane 4 Apm CC Gtmck Plane 4 The Planes popup menu is used to create rename duplicate or delete planes The header of this menu contains the name of the plane for which the options are displayed in the panel Create an animation with the multiplane camera effect part 1 Begin by loading the project MPC tvp Go to the multi plane camera layer Open the FX stack and delete its content Select the Multi plane camera effect in the Add FX menu In the View tab Set the camera position parameter to X 0 Y 0 Z 1000 and leave the angle at 0 Select a field of view of 30 a Depth of Field effect O and focusing distance 1000 In the Planes tab Create a new plane and name it character A panel similar to that indicated below will appear Aiid Fx j Copticrrisi zl Air ad Mult Plan Camera i Profiles m pen Stage Wizard AER Planos Plime Plain Source Layercharatien Pre Ghar sige Hold fi Fi rst bal Prip At this point you must Choose a Source image to create the plane As was the case for the Keyframer effect the source may be of various types
88. layer face color e ee The XSheet Layers and Panel 8 15 The steps to create a lip sync Create some XSheet layers Now let s create some XSheet layers For each sound of the audio track the jaw and the face skin should move accordingly as our character is talking see below iya iya The movement of the r 7 Yi character s jaw gt gt ips fpa The movement of the If face s skin Two synchronised XSheet layers will be needed here to do the job Only their default source column will be different fcolor and jaw Each sound of the audio track can be broken down into separated sequences fpa Yi opposite the O sound fpa Yi Here the A sound fpa f The sound i Yi The E sound Each time that the O A I or E sound will be encountered on the timeline you will then have to reproduce the correponding configuration A XSheet layer derivated from the two last described XSheet layers will be used here However it will not have a default source because it will use the four source columns mouth1 mouth2 mouth3 mouth4 Finally you will have to make the character blink periodically in another XSheet Layer Lars
89. layers In lesson 3 we handled the layers using the timeline However the notion of time did not come up at all This lesson deals with the notion of time In this lesson you will e Study the concept of the animation layer e Work with brushes and animated brushes e Handle the commands for project viewing Animation layers Animation layers Start by reproducing the image of lesson 2 in a project with square pixels Aspect Ratio equal to 1 not using fields see lesson 1 for an explanation concerning fields and ratio The Image below has been drawn thanks to the Oilbrush tool Don t forget to place the house sun sky and grass on four different layers You should have the following timeline on your screen ep il gt No Sound Check w Frame J tj ole Creation and concept of an Animation Layer Everybody knows how a film is projected in a movie theater a film roll is placed in front of a powerful projector enabling display of the pictures on a screen located a few metres away The images are projected at such speed that they give the illusion of nope Le movement to the spectator aign Fight etc TVPaint Animation Pro works with the same principle it is possible to create Dimi ie brg Delete mage your own virtual film rolls and project them onto your television screen In TVPaint Animation Pro we refer to this roll as Animation Layers As we will see
90. layers as the number of selected images Sh F The first button is used to split the current layer into 2 separate layers after the current image Working similarly to the previous button if you select a sequence the Split action will create 3 layers one with the images before the selection one with the selection and a last one with the images after the selection The second button as you may have already guessed is used to join 2 layers to form a single layer Ensure you select the layers to be joined correctly m a po am These two buttons both open the same window in which you will be asked to enter a number of empty images to be inserted The first button will increase the size of each instance of the current layer by adding exposure cells The second button will insert empty instances between each instance of the layer The number of images or cells inserted depends on the number you enter in this window The Project section merr BS These buttons are used to move the current layer up or down a notch in the layers window torr ALL xl The first button simply deletes the current layer whereas the second automatically selects all frames in the current layer These shortcuts are used to justify all layers selected either right or left ies The first button is used to link the previously selected layers The second button is useful when you wish to split your current project into 2 distinct projects after th
91. must then turn black Enable the mask gt Invert the mask gt oa The S button on the timeline enables disabling of all masks or inverting of lt all masks according to your choice in the menu B Itis possible to work with several masks divided into different layers in this case the masks are added up When a pixel is partially opaque it may only be partially modified when using a mask For example a pixel with 80 opacity can only be painted with maximum 80 opacity when the mask mode is used if the mask is inverted it may only be painted with maximum 20 opacity Finally you should understand that when pressing the Erase button while using a mask only the part of the drawing corresponding to the mask will be erased Layers spatial management 3 15 Further details Displaying masks and papers It is possible to display masks and papers on the screen to give a better idea of the project areas on which you are currently working To do this just use the popup menu Display in the current project window see below Show Grig Show Guides Show Stencil Show Paper v Show Selection Show Safe Area ond Display J J iy Show Animator Field I u ee Opacity mapping File nat fina te aenal jy Copri Swap T pamm Spline 7 ee aj xu a RSS eH a umj a sx eer 10 000 Show Animator Disk This window is accessible with a right click on t
92. on the double arrow accelerate movement pO When sliding the mouse on a mini slider press and hold the right button to 7 Alphanumeric fields taida ii iol Each time you rename a layer project effect or other element you will be asked to enter a text in this type of window Click on OK to confirm the name change or click on Cancel OK Cancel The standard keyboard shortcuts Ctrl X cut Ctrl C copy Ctrl V paste Ctri A select all Ctrl Z cancel are valid in all alphanumeric fields note that these shortcuts are valid for PC and on Mac computers the user presses the Apple key instead of Ctrl When required they are accessible with a right click on the concerned field 1 6 First approach of TVPaint Animation Pro Some useful tips Progress bar Sometimes application of an effect with Copy an Animbrush TVPaint Animation Pro requires a certain amount of ka Hise sales processing time If your computer is carrying out such an operation the progress bar appears to inform you of the progress of this operation If required the Esc key on Windows 6 on Mac OS X or Stop button may be used to stop the operation in progress Working with projects TVPaint Animation Pro works with Projects which contain the artist s creations The notion of project is vast and further details will be provided during the firsts lessons Create a new project The first thing to do
93. on the dedicated button in the window which first appears when the program is started see below To duplicate an existing configuration click on the Copy button in the same window A text window will appear You may enter the name of the duplicated configuration in the text field and then validate it by clicking ok When a configuration is deleted all effects brushes palettes shortcuts used previously will be lost Of course if you saved them in advance you can reload and re use them 1 By default the configurations are located in the folder C Documents and Settings your_name Application Data TVpaint Animation for Windows users Home Directory Library tvpaint animation pro default for Mac OS X users The from file popup menu allows you to start the software by loading one of the ten previously used project First approach of TVPaint Animation Pro 1 11 The Preferences panel The Preferences panel The Preferences panel is accessible via the Edit main menu This function is used to set various user options which enable re organisation of the interface It comprises four tabs General Display Interface Memory amp Cache The General tab General Affichage Interface M moire amp Cache Langue French Clavier Configurer Dossier Temp Choisir Ea O OE Tablette Am lioration de la pr cision OK Annuler The General tab indicated above comprises four sect
94. only difference being that the close trees plane will have a Z value greater than 0 es If necessary the FX stack corresponding to the parameters we wish to obtain is x attached to the MPC tvp project You must therefore close it and load it again in order to go to the next stage quicker The Rendering gt Multi plane Camera Effect 15 9 Creating movement move the camera Creating movement move the camera Now everything is ready to move the camera and obtain the desired result To do this Return to the View tab Go to the first frame of the multiplane camera layer in the timeline Create an animation key for the Camera value with X 700 Go to the last frame of the multi plane camera layer in the timeline Create an animation key for the Camera value with X 700 Use the Play button in your project window to view the result That s it Do not confuse camera movement and possible changes in the position of your planes The use of animation keys with plane position parameters is only useful if the latter effectively move if the camera is fixed mountain forest and trees are fixed In such a case this method would be justified if we had created an additional plane to illustrate movement of the moon in the sky if the camera is fixed the moon still makes an arc across the starry sky Create and manage focusing blurs Pars octo oo i Lici Top cE R L m Z Duri
95. op popup menu at the bottom left of the FX stack window see Split Preview Bottom opposite No Preview You may view the effect on the entire image its left half its right half the top or bottom you may even modify the viewing area to your convenience by sliding the border line on the screen to do this left click on the line and slide it Here again the Play _ _ button is pressed to preview your effect in real time but only on a given region of the screen Some operations If you have applied the Stylize gt Mosaic effect click Undo to cancel the effect and return to the unmodified animation Go into the Options popup menu of the FX stack and choose Delete all Your stack is empty again Select the Colors gt Fade effect from the available menu Add a second layer behind the current layer and name it Flowers Import the project Flowers merge it and spread it over 30 images Copy all the images of the layer obtained into the layer named Flowers in your project Finally go to the first image on the timeline on the layer named house see timeline below Modify the value of the position parameter to 50 then apply the FX Stack The Flowers Project ee Merge siete ep O OO rh TF HA a Ir il wee ee ee me ee ee eee ee ee FeFerere eeed perd eeeee perepere her rererere rererere ered 11 a a ji EEECETEE CEECEE EEEE OTEC OEEC CETE
96. option is only working with the XSheet tab and does not interact with the timeline or the project display x a3 GTa This button allows to add a source into the XSheet tab spr This button allows to delete a source from the XSheet tab This button allows to add one tween to each selected frames man CL This button allows to delete one tween from each selected frames C l Cio This button allows to add multiple tweens to each selected frames A popup panel will appear to set the number of tweens to add This button allows to delete multiple tweens from each selected frame A popup panel will appear to set the number of tweens to delete monna ma I CO CII This button allows to invert the order of the selected frames COI COI This button allows to copy the selected images cells It can be either source images or images cells from a XSheet layer Ee Ee This button allows to cut the selected images cells from a XSheet layer This button allows to shuffle the selected images of a XSheet layer Oa j C This button allows to paste the cut or copied images cells from a XSheet layer into existing images cells This action delete the selected images and insert the new ones LE The XSheet Layers and Panel 8 11 The XSheet Layers and XSheet Panel x z You can also use gee the LMB and drag to move cut and paste a selected range of frame Ctrl LMB to mo
97. or vertical axis before application options Flip X and Flip Y PF p y TLLA original paper symmetry along vertical axis Create and manage your own papers Right click on one of the papers in the papers windows to either choose the latter or delete it Right click on the part of the window that does not contain any papers aave Wyoaea Batea Yisod Hana ined Eat to create a new paper from the current image Note that your choices are only saved after closing the program if you have saved your configuration previously Layers spatial management 3 13 Further details The Papers and the Oilbrush tool reer LAMA z Erasa Options Bin 4 As indicated above the Oilbrush drawing tool also interacts with the various types of papers available see opposite Oren Mediu Size F300 Power ison a Opacty 100 e Light inners a Aspect iora w Angie ho ie stp 12stc e Oring w Rm But the Oilbrush tool also offers many other functions Various light parameters possible It offers a Light parameter which gives volume to the paint see opposite By default the oil paint is not deposited on top of the oil paint already on the layer it melts into it However if you click on the Drying option the former will be the case without Drying with Drying Note that there a
98. particular avoiding untimely movement The locked points may be subject to animation keys and intermediate points in time may be created from the locked points The Angle option is used to point the emitter in the direction of your choice It is also possible to turn your emitter using the animation key system The Rotation parameter is used to manage rotations of more than 360 Some settings not shown above are specific to the emitter you choose to work with Depending on the emitter chosen these are length of the line length and width of the rectangle size of the two ellipse axes You will note that once the emitter is created two tabs appear the Current tab and the Particles tab Curent Purliches T Fatliciet Nong o l The Emitters gt Particles tab The Emitters gt Particles tab is used to manage the particles projected by the emitter The Particles popup menu enables creation of one or several sets of particles Several types of particles may be emitted see the pre defined examples sci fi gt galaxywarp party gt magic candle or pyrotechnic gt explosion b to convince yourself You may also duplicate rename or delete a set of particles via this same menu The name of the set of particles you are working with appears in the header of the popup menu As soon as a set of particles is created new parameters for setting the particles appear see next page The Rendering gt Particles
99. program regardless of your specific operating system It is the only one capable of displaying previews for files with extensions TVP MIR AUR DIP The Never confirm button when ticked cancels the confirmation request which normally appears when a file is deleted or rewritten The last section contains a tick box used to place the current project windows behind the other interface panels First approach of TVPaint Animation Pro 1 15 The Preferences panel The Memory amp Cache tab G n ral Affichage Interface M moire amp Cache M moire physique 5171Mo Unido a Taille de Undo Cache Automatique Manuel a Taille du cache OK Annuler This tab first displays the physical memory available on your computer Just below this field you will find a numeric field and mini slider next to it This field is used to attribute the amount of memory you require for the Undo option which allows you to return to and undo the previous steps when drawing on the screen The higher this value the further back you may go However this default value is largely sufficient TVPaint Animation Pro uses the physical memory of your computer and one or several temporary files as discussed in the General tab You may want to allow TVPaint Animation Pro to manage this function automatically or impose a maximum cache size to be used this may be useful if you are working simultaneously with several programs d
100. rear end of the arrow represents the Source point of the grid and the arrow tip corresponds to the Destination point x zur ir P oe i ell il ep eee ka I E ppr rie ms ee Phen aT E i Distortion Source gt destination Distortion Destination gt Source 13 14 The effects of the Distortion group The Distortion gt Wrapping Grid effect Distortion of the current image in time We just saw how to distort an image in space using the source and destination grids To distort the current image in time as was done for the skull tvp project you must Duplicate the latter along the entire layer Unactivate the previsualisation of the effect use the menu at the bottom left of the FX Stack Set the display option on Source Pay attention to place intersections of the Source Grid at all strategic points on the image eyes teeth etc and ensure the grid covers the lines of your drawing Copy the Source Grid to the Destination Grid Reactivate the previsualisation of the effect Set the display option on Destination Make the Destination Grid slightly different from the Source Grid for at least the first and last frames of the animation layer and then create the corresponding keys The result is a distortion and consequently a movement which takes place over a period of time exist You should try them out and share your impressions in the on line forum AN The m
101. script MyScriptPathAndName grg cmd MyGeorgeCommand 18 24 The advanced functions of TV Paint Animation Pro Appendix The video cards compatible with TVPaint Animation Pro The digital camera working with the Canon Plug in The George commands and instructions The export file formats The available keyboard shorcuts The initialization file The technical support and Resources The video cards compatible with TVPaint Animation Pro The video cards compatible with TVPaint Animation Pro For both video input and or output some video cards are compatible with TVPaint Animation Pro Here is the complete list with all the features detailled only for PC at this time Video Output Video Input o Possibilityto Nees a Tne current Possibility Hardware Native file view your work Eneere P to display Model formal on TVPaint preview window with Image E Animation Pro saor bang apaci grevo video in the andie des available on values can option re ParcWwate the video be keyed over see hardware a live video Leitch VelocityQ dps V Vy X X X oE Should be added in the next updates of TVPaint Animation P Velocity HD ould be added in the next updates o aint Animation Pro DPS am X XvVXxXXX PVR Hollywood Matrox DigiSuite x X DigiSuite LE ai J J DigiSuite DTV Newtek VTNT VT 2 rtv V V V Vy VT 3 DV compatible rtv y x of of with OHCI 1394 WDM werca
102. see lesson 4 if necessary it s possible to delete them To do so just select the delete option in the contextual menu of the layer or the appropriated button in the animator panel see below inseri riage Duplicate Images Deleting the exposure cells of an instance will make all the images of the layer move to the left The head of your instance stay the same Deleting the head cell of the first instance of the current layer will make the images of the layer move to the left and will also delete the content of the instance Deleting the head cell of an instance in the middle of the layer will make its exposure cells be linked to the previous instance Split a layer It is possible to subdivide an image or animation layer into two separated layers To split a layer in two parts you first need to go on to the image in front of the point at which you wish to place the split Then select Split layer in the layer s contextual menu to obtain the result shown below For an image layer The steps to create animated graphics 6 15 Working with instances new Merging layers We already saw in lesson 3 how to merge the image layers It is not really different if you decide to merge animation layers with instances You can use the merge menu of the timeline or drag n drop a layer on another layer TVPaint Animation Pro will always try to create instances in the m
103. the Distortion group The Distortion gt Kaleidoscope effect The Source coordinates define the position on the screen of a point at which the symmetry axes cross each other see the various examples hereafter The value of the second angular parameter is used to vary the global angle of the image obtained The Destination coordinates define the position on the screen of an image centre obtained after application of the effect see the various examples hereafter The effects of the Distortion group 13 5 The Distortion gt Kaleidoscope effect When the Fill option is disabled the kaleidoscope effect is calculated according to the current image When it is enabled the calculation is also carried out on all reproductions of the current image Below the area inside the white rectangle represents the current project window All areas inside and outside the white rectangle represent the space used to calculate the effect In the 1 case the option is disabled the effect is calculated from the current image In the 2 case the option is enabled the effect is calculated from the current image and its reproductions In both cases the original project is represented with the result after the effect is calculated and the other showing the result obtained when the destination parameter is set to another point 13 6 The effects of the Distortion group The Distortion gt Perspective 4 points effect T
104. the color picker is not selected i e on each tab of the color picker except Sliders a line referred to as Status bar is visible This line is used to display the values in the RGB system of the A color click on this bar to make the color appear in the HSL or hexadecimal systems The drawing modes L 2a 2 2 There are several drawing modes in TVPaint Animation Pro mer er mt Color Behind Erase Panto Light Shade Tint Colorize Smooth Grain AAA ox iiei Aea We will look at each of them in turn plions Bi afir peii Eras Panto They are available in the popup menu located under the icons of the gt wae Tool panel left click to access it ie Light Me Sajad If required you may assign keyboard shortcuts of your choice to the Power P sala various modes proposed see lesson 1 Opacity smooth Aspect C Moise Angle bara ap Sten Emboss Drying Solarize Some modes may not be used with all tools Grdignl Saturate Unsaurale Aia Sup Miitti Benen Healing 2 6 Drawing basics The drawing modes The Color and Behind drawing modes 22222 IN We will now draw a blue sky To do this Select the Freehand line icon in the main panel Select the wetbrush tool size 100 pixels power 100 opacity 100 ra uc Atona oo Powor che opsir 100 gc The red 1 4 indicates that the tool is four times larger than the one visible in
105. the process you can stop here or continue to have a better result We have turned here the lines into orange by using the orange flask icon It is still possible to add some lines or to clean the image with the erasers 6 6 The steps to create animated graphics Working directly with TVPaint Animation Pro Now we can delete the orange and blue construction lines The image is not rough anymore if it is not the case you can return to the previous steps This method is not the only one that can be used with the Sketch panel you can gt use three colors in a different way or you can use only two colors Eas Some artists uses one color for the characters and another color for the background landscape It should be easy for you to adapt the Skech panel to your workflow The steps to create animated graphics 6 7 Managing the images of an animation layer Managing the images of an animation layer ar Regarding the images management it is now clearly advised to use the A new instance system see the next chapter of this lesson The instances features are available since version 8 1 5 of the software Insert duplicate or delete one or several images To duplicate or delete an image simply go to the image of your choice in the timeline KERARI G ae i Insert images H S Now More wiz 7
106. the selected images 6 4 The steps to create animated graphics Working directly with TVPaint Animation Pro Working directly with TVPaint Animation Pro The Sketch panel The Sketch panel comprises some useful preset tools which will allow you to create and clean sketchs as if you were drawing by hand The Sketch panel tools are designed for users who work with both computer and graphic tablet and who want to keep their old drawing tools pencil eraser Here is a detailled description of the panel The pencil icons allow to draw sketchs as if you had real pencils Three colors are available black orange and blue The blue and orange pencils draw with Behind mode though the black pencil draw in Co or mode The paintbrush icons allow to paint any pre existing line into the color You can turn any line blue orange or black The flask icons allow you to turn your image into blue orange or black The first serie of erasers allow to erase only the color that is displayed on the icon The cross icons delete the color s orange blue orange and blue black while leaving the other colors intact The eraser icons allow to erase a portion of the image The first eraser is small The second eraser is bigger and smoother Now let s study how to draw and clean a sketch step by step Firstly erase the content of the current project or open a new project window Use the blue and the orange p
107. to correct possible faults in a drawing Opposite the Erase mode is used on a check background Airbrush in Erase mode background check The Shade and Light drawing modes As their names speak for themselves these drawing modes require almost no additional explanation They are used to brighten or darken the opaque areas of the image where you draw your line Just note that the higher the Power and Opacity of the drawing tool the more the drawing carried out in these modes will approach opaque white or opaque black In this example we used the Airbrush tool with a power of 100 and an opacity of 17 confuse the Erase mode with these two modes the modes Shade and Light modify the color of the pixels whereas the Erase mode modifies their opacity A If the chosen background is white or black do not Airbrush in Shade mode v The other drawing modes will be studied in lesson 7 2 8 Drawing basics Further details Further details A Color and B Color A very good tip It is possible to invert the two colors A and B of the color picker using Picton bel a alanis ax Slider Picker Miter Ein C the keyboard shortcut N or the button on the main panel Rotation of the workspace One of the most useful tools for any artist is the tool that allows rotation of the work top as one would turn a piece of paper while drawing There are several ways to turn your wor
108. to create a lip sync In this section we will learn how to synchronize the facial movements of a character especially his mouth with a preloaded audio track The main idea is of course to give the impression that the words come from our animated character and not from a recording that has been added over an animated sequence The files used in this chapter The project Lipsync tvp and the audio track voice mp3 will be taken as a basis to study the lipsync steps You can find them on the software CD rom Those who downloaded the evaluation version of TVPaint Animation Pro can find those files in the content sharing section of our online forum http www tvpaint com forum Here is the timeline of the project Lipsync tvp ny pl Layer eyes Layer pupils Layer brows Layer face hair Layer hair color Smmm S ESS TE THEI Layer mouth 2 me O ESEN Layer mouth 1 HEEE e m r D Layer face color Layer mouth 4 Layer mouth 3 The XSheet Layers and Panel 8 13 The steps to create a lip sync We have choosen the following colors to have a better readability through the timeline the layers relative to the mouth movements are in red the layers relative to the jaw and face are in blue the layers relative to the eyes movements are in purple If you play now this project the result will not be really
109. to the file selected in the requester window size frame rate aspect ratio etc These are followed by a text field which indicates the path and name of the file you have chosen The Browse button allows you in case of error to choose another file in the requester window The Preload button will be discussed in the Dependencies section of this lesson Your video file may be modified when imported to suit your needs project name width height frame rate aspect ratio field rotation may all be modified as we discovered in the previous section The Alpha popup menu however possesses specific options including Guess Premultiply No Premultiply Without alpha and Alpha only 5 6 Handling TVPaint projects Load an existing image or animation The option Guess will consider that the Alpha value is equal to the maximum RGBA values present in the sequence The option Premultiply refers to the method of calculating each pixel In this case each pixel is multiplied by its alpha value which results in the fact that these pixels are calculated quicker than with the No Premultiply option The option Without alpha will load your sequence without transparency if it had any beforehand Finally the option Alpha only will only load a mask of the sequence This mask will be extracted from the alpha layer of the sequence Further down three tabs allow you to choose the form to be given to your imported video the imported vi
110. tools and set the vector X and Y set values or click on the Set button and draw the vector on your project 2 choose a drawing tool like Airbrush and set drawing mode Panto in the popup menu under the drawing tools icons 3 on your project you have two cursors One simple for the source and an other with preview for Drawing basics 2 13 Further details the destination Pixels under the first one are moved under the second one with the settings of the current tools Setting the tools You have numerous variables at your disposal to set your drawing tools We will describe them in detail except for Drying and Gradient which are explained in lesson 3 LB 2 2 2 The variable Size defines the tool radius in pixels dk AN The variable Power defines the color quantity applied by the tool Options Bin The variable Opacity defines the global tool opacity 4 The opacity defines a maximum opacity threshold which the drawing tool 5 cannot exceed sie C3000 The variable Aspect enables flattening of the current tool pom es E The variable Angle authorises rotation around the tool Z axis Aspect C E 00s eg a The variable Step if enabled manages the waiting time between two step v iaso applications of the same tool ring l Gradini R Brel In the little window to the left it is possible to view the effect of the modification of A each of the first five variables o
111. trees and make them follow the paths of your choice as explained in the lesson 14 We used the butterfly animated brush supplied on the TVPaint Animation Pro CD Rom with the Motion gt Keyframer effect and a pre recorded path for each butterfly Of course our two butterflies can be added on a new layer it will allow you to keep the frees animated layer unchanged fee ee E a a a aoe oe ee oe he By using a new layer you will also be able to change the moment when the butterflies have to appear you only have to move the whole layer through the time axis of the timeline Mei Kee rarnar pais Progress Prote Permon Rondu Goure Custam arush Pre Danwaor Held Fired Amm Horma Poni Dahan Hold Last aet 0 a e Flip Homa oF fiend Golat op cir i00w J ool h Fmf Biur Gire 50 ah emg n E Bost Step 0 a a Ant Miaang A ti ZCamera i000 gol gt Less Hide LIC Preview a w 4 Motion Dour C O eme A pelo ne amela PL ange od e a e ee er 20000 et sue ain m el oe es mm il 2S ee eee the ess Se Eee ee ee a eeen ee zs zsa es s m z seess rres me 9 18 Working with the FX stack Introduction to the video effects We will now work on the Sunset animation layer It is possible to distort the pictures to stay close to the weather report thema This can be done by using the Rendered
112. used Preview then Apply v3 490 00 xafooo Use the Reset button to reset the settings ya 430 00 e Reset Proview p j Original image Wrap tool in Shift mode Wrap tool in Fill mode with selection 7 26 Other TVPaint Animation Pro drawing tools The transformation tools the horizon line You may move the two vanishing points ao The blue line that appears on the screen during setting is t as you wish to set the perspective Wrap tool applied to the image and the selection Other TVPaint Animation Pro drawing tools 1 27 Lesson 8 The XSheet panel and layers In this lesson you will e Adda sound track to your project e Learn to use the XSheet layers e Learn to use the Spreadsheet panel e Make a Lip Sync How to add an sound track to your project How to add an sound track to your project The audio options are available in the Project main menu or in the Sounds menu of the timeline encircled cursor W below on the right Time Lint KSheet Projects H S Now oF Moge rj Auto Fit ri 2 ea na EE naa irain if mO Running Kid ll oe H a Color Fame wo N 3 Sound a l Offset gt Note that the EI button in the current Lock S project window is used to play a sound Enter audio serib duration e Senin track when the project is viewed Ea Load Sour z Leathe Girma Here are the various functions proposed by TV
113. used to fill the screen with the current source In this Ws RO case animating the source will also animate all its copies RORA INS lt a DO The Opacity parameter is used to adjust logo transparency as time progresses The Z camera parameter represents the distance between the virtual camera and your image in pixels The smaller this distance the larger the opening angle of our virtual camera This enables you to use the wide angle effect well known in cameras by using the parameters for Pitch and or Bank 14 12 The effects of the Motion and Paint groups management of the paths The Motion gt Keyframer effect Nich aac sarge Sade View Trinh Above the pitch parameter was set to 45 for our merged image of the tree The image at the top was obtained with a Z Camera equal to 1000 the one below with a value of 210 i Wiin mmja a euez e 3 example azertyulop qsdfhjklm wxcvobn aqwxszedcvirtgb bgtnhy ju ki lolmp wxsexdrzqactt malskd fjghtyru eizoap wxcvhgfd uikjh tazer m l etr ozuy _ 345 wxsderrtdfxccvfgtyyughvbagjhiu kj nikopml 1246xfjf098765432 qhsjdkflgm yzueirtoyp kdoapentxidj elmpeyut ijnrdxcde jy pqmeugfg zpgvijry _ 578905 wseplk njuyrvbv sfdkjg sziaf 9874213 54987 Side View This third example will allow us to work with different sources Rendering tab in the Keyframer effec
114. want to create This command returns some information regarding your layer opacity number of pictures place of the timeline So you can reuse or modify them lt would be too long to enumerate here the arguments and the return values of each George command All those parameters are fully explained in the developper kit SDK of TVPaint Animation Pro The SDK is available on demand at the email address tvpaint tvpaint fr sharp and George commands for TVPaint Animation Pro which allways start with the tv _ prefix The commands act on the software itself and on your current display whereas George instructions are used to write the structure of the program conditionnals calculations loops A Make sure to differentiate George instructions which often start with a Since approximatively 10 years all the softwares using the TVPaint technology offers d a scripting language Here are some informations regarding the compatibility between those scripting language If you upgraded to TVPaint Animation Pro your old scripts should still work However some recent commands for instance TV_AddBookmarks are not available in older products using the TVPaint Technology Aura Mirage An example of program written in George The program on the next page comes from the file clock grg It allows to draw a clock displaying the current time on the project window We suggest you to create a b
115. when using this program is create a new project To do this you may Select the parameters of your new project as soon as the program is started when the start up screen appears Use the File main menu Use the keyboard shortcut Shift N Click on the first icon to the left on the toolbar ew Proje A panel then appears see opposite Template This panel is used to define Mone The name of your project Its Width and Height in pixels The Aspect ratio PALDI43 v The Frame Rate Images sec idth 4 The Fields display mode Height 576 gt Aspect Ratio la Frame Rate 4h Field WpperFirst Y Mew Project The Template concept will be discussed in lesson 5 Display Curent Custombrusn l YGA Setting each parameter to create an animation in the MTEC format of your choice may proove long and arduous PAL Therefore a popup menu has been added to the nit panel to allow you to set the various numeric fields Film according to the most commonly used formats PAL NTSC VGA DTV Film etc First approach of TVPaint Animation Pro 1 7 Working with projects TVPaint Animation Pro uses all standard formats even very high definition both for image width height ratios 4 3 and 16 9 as well as others Once all options have been selected click on New project A project window then appears on the screen see below It is in this window that you will work and view your creations i
116. window If for some reason you wish to move a window this is done by simply clicking on the title bar and then sliding it to the required location while keeping the mouse pressed Close minimize or maximize a window These three buttons on PC and on Mac EE are present on many of the panels and windows in the top right hand corner for PC and top left hand corner for Mac The buttons 4 close the window keyboard shortcut Shift W The buttons B place the current window in front of or behind other windows The buttons l amp are used to minimize the window Once minimized this icon changes to 5 and may be used to maximize the window again note that this icon does not change on Mac The size of some windows the timeline for example may be adjusted it is possible to adjust their size with precision by clicking on one of the edges Sliders and mini sliders o 100 0050 The element above on the left is referred to as a slider It is located horizontally under some windows in particular under the current project window or vertically next to these windows Click on the arrows with the left mouse button or slide the rectangle to view the content of the window with which the slider is associated either up and down or left and right As you have already guessed the element on the right is a mini slider which may be used to change the numeric value or percentage next to it with a left click and slide of the mouse
117. 0 4 Prove Protic ane 100 ih dee TU i Power 4 Power 100 ar e The Selection tab 7 i Optical Flow Progeas Profle w Optica Flow Progress Pane wr Frome Brt 100 it Fower 100 Clear Selection a Hean _ Full x HideHUD Preriewj Faai Hido HUD Prie s L Fi SE In this tab you can select the vectors of the field that you want to edit via the previously discussed tools By default all the vectors are selected The two buttons Select All and Clear Selection allows to reset the selections L A re oy a 427 Square Freehand or Circle selection The effects of the Distortion group 13 17 The Distortion gt Optical Flow effect unselected vectors When doing a selection if a vector is selected it appears z in yellow instead of blue if you want to select a vector RE K just select its source If a vector source is not selected its H U D color becomes lighter The tools available in the Edit menu will only apply on the selected vectors selected vectors The circle selection use the same parameters as the H U D brush the purple circle so you can select your vectors by drawing on the H U D It allows to have source points only selected in part and thus to have nice effects when editing the vectors Note that if you reset the size of the vector field all the settings that you have done vectors animation keys selections
118. 15 Emboss 180 Layer Split 252 Drawing Mode 16 Solarize 181 Layer Join Selected Layers 253 Drawing Mode 17 Saturate 182 Layer Link 254 Drawing Mode 18 UnSaturate 183 Layer Align Left 255 Drawing M ode 19 Add 184 Layer Align Right 256 Drawing Mode 20 Sub 185 Layer Slide 257 Drawing Mode 21 Multiply 186 Layer Slide To 258 Drawing Mode 22 Screen 187 Layer Goto Image 259 Tools Brush Air 188 Layer Expand Collapse 260 Tools Brush Pen 189 Layer Select Current Image 261 Tools Brush Oil Paint 190 Layer Select Current Layer 262 Tools Brush Water Color 191 FX Stack Apply 263 Tools Brush Propelling 192 FX Stack Reset All 264 Tools Brush Pencil 193 FX Stack Delete All 265 Tools Brush Warp 194 Zoom New Zoom window 266 Tools Brush Special 195 Zoom Toggle Aspect 267 Tools Brush Text 196 Zoom Toggle Video 268 Tools Brush CustomBrush 197 Zoom Center 269 Tools Brush Previous 198 Zoom In 270 Tools Brush Next 199 Zoom Out 271 Tools Brush Toggle Display 200 Zoom Fit 272 Brush Toggle CutBrush 201 Zoom Fit Project Panel 273 Brush Cut Rectangle 202 Zoom 100 274 Brush Cut Magic Wand A 8 Appendix The available keyboard shorcuts and commands 275 Brush Cut Poly 276 Brush Cut Freehand 277 Brush Double Size 278 Brush Halve Size 279 Brush Toggle Handle Corner 280 Brush Move Handle
119. 2 to 8 we have amongst other things studied the TVPaint Animation Pro drawing tools and discovered the timeline and its functions You are now able to produce frame by frame drawings TVPaint Animation Pro also offers you a wide range of effects This has been specially designed for working on animated footage View Windows Help oe v Multiple FX These effects or composition Single FX tools are available in the Effects main menu see opposite Center Blur Color Cubic Blur They are arranged according to esate Se ono ay E categories We will study them kevin Gaussian Blur n hledian Blur progressively in the subsequent Paint Radial Blur lessons Rendering Sty lize The effects categories comprise Blur to alter the existing pixels of the animation Colors to rework the colors of an animated footage Distortion to distort the images of a footage Keying to cut out a part of the current animation Motion to manage camera movement Paint to repeat a line on the screen Rendering to create lighting and particles effects Stylize to rework the pixels of an animated footage The effect stack or FX stack It is possible to set the parameters for your effects in a special window for example the power of a blur the luminosity of the animated footage the speed of a fade this is the FX stack You call up the FX stack by clicking on the FX icon in the tool
120. 255 The H S L O system generates the color of a pixel using four other components hue saturation luminosity opacity In this system the values of saturation and luminosity may vary between 0 and 255 the hue may have a value between 0 and 359 thus the previously used concepts of angle and color wheel Inversely any pixel on the screen may be broken down in each of the two coordinate systems Modifying the color of a pixel therefore means you modify the values of its components The Curves effect enables precise management of these modifications the Mode popup menu offers a choice between the two systems described above Let s go for example into the H S L O system and take a look at our image Next to the name of each component we find a miniature profile comparable to those we encountered when studying the drawing tools and acceleration of an effect Click on the luminosity miniature profile to call up the edit profile window The options proposed are traditional flip the curve along the X or Y axes use pre defined curves save the settings modify interpolation of the points Now we just have to study the meaning of the curve The horizontal axis represents all luminosity values that may be contained in a pixel on the screen values between 0 and 255 The vertical axis also known as LUT Look Up Table represents all luminosity values of the pixels once the Curve effect has
121. 6 Some remarks for using the Opacity function 3 18 Lesson 04 Temporal management of layers Animation layers 4 2 Creation and concept of an Animation layer 4 2 Add images 4 3 Movement and orientation within the timeline 4 3 Create a brush 4 4 The first animation 4 5 TVPaint Animation Pro and compositing 4 5 Play an animation 4 6 The Remote Control 4 7 Other movement methods 4 7 The Navigator 4 8 Transform an Image layer into an Animation layer 4 8 Select erase the contents of the images in an Animation layer 4 9 Flip the images of an Animation layer 4 10 Move the layers in the timeline 4 10 More details 4 11 Show hide the icons 4 11 Similarities with Image layers 4 11 The Auto Fit option in the timeline 4 11 Start frame negative images 4 11 Using the Bookmarks 4 12 The Preview settings 4 12 The CutBrush tool options 4 13 Edit brush options 4 14 Floodfill using a brush 4 16 The notion of Animated brushes 4 17 Lesson 05 Handling TVPaint projects Introduction 5 2 Save a project 5 2 Use the requester 5 2 Save a template 5 3 Load an existing project 5 4 Modify a project 5 4 Load an existing image or animation 5 6 Dependencies 5 8 Export files 5 9 The project panel 5 12 Video grabber 5 14 Lesson 06 The steps to creating an animated image Introduction 6 2 Working with hand made drawings 6 2 Scan and print your images 6 2 Cropping a project 6 3 Clean up the sequence 6 4 Flip a
122. 9 about the FX stack concept The parameters are the position of the center the power of the blur and the radius of the circle The Blur gt Radial Blur effect This blur is applied in a circular manner around a point the position of which you have chosen on the screen The second parameter to be set is the power of the blur The Blur gt Directional Blur effect This blur is applied only in the direction angle of your choice and the spread of your choice You may set the vector parameter directly on the screen 10 4 The effects of the Blur and Transition groups The Blur group effects The Blur gt Median Blur effect When using the Median Blur the color of the pixels obtained after application of the blur depends on the colors of the adjacent pixels in the initial image The Median Blur comprises all kinds of modes the effects of which you may admire below Median Blur in Smooth mode effect Median Blur in Light halo mode effect Median Blur in Dark halo mode effect The effects of the Blur and Transition group 10 5 The Blur group effects Median Blur in Light mark mode effect Median Blur in Dark mark mode effect Median Blur in Double edge mode effect 10 6 The effects of the Blur and Transition groups The Blur group effects Median Blur in Impressionist mode effect The Transition group effects All transition effects in TVPaint Animation Pro have a position para
123. Corner 281 Brush Outline 282 Brush Double Width 283 Brush Double Height 284 Brush Halve Height 285 Brush Halve Width 286 Brush Flip Horizontally 287 Brush Flip Vertically 288 Brush Rotate 90 289 Brush Rotate 90 290 Brush Rotate 291 Brush Resize 292 Brush Optimize 293 Brush Optimize Source 294 Brush Toggle Transparency 295 Brush Next Animbrush 296 Brush Previous Animbrush 297 Brush Toggle Stamp Brush 298 Shape Apply 299 Shape Freehand Dot 300 Shape Single Dot 301 Shape Freehand 302 Shape Freehand Fill 303 Shape Circle 304 Shape Circle Fill 305 Shape Line 306 Shape Poly Fill 307 Shape Flood Fill 308 Shape Spline 309 Shape Spline Fill 310 Shape Rectangle 311 Shape Rectangle Fill 312 Shape Select FreeHand 313 Shape Select Rectangle 314 Shape Select Ellipse 315 Shape Select MagicWand 316 Shape Select Spline 317 Shape Select Clear 318 Shape Select Invert 319 Shape Select Copy To CustomBrush 320 Shape Select Cut To CustomBrush 321 Shape Select Copy To New Layer 322 Shape Select Cut To New Layer 323 Shape Transform Pan 324 Shape Transform Position 325 Shape Transform Warp 326 Tools Pantograph Set 327 Tools Healing Set 328 Tools Crop 329 Tools Zoom 330 TVPaint Animation Copy Selection 331 TVPaint Animation Paste 332 TVPaint Animation Cu
124. Create an animation with the multiplane camera effect part 3 We just created our first plane named running kid We will now create a second plane deeper than the first To do this Create a new plane and name it forest Choose the forest layer of our project as source Our plane shows the forest located behind the running kid We must therefore give it a position value Z lt 0 as our running kid plane also has the position value Z 0 In this case we choose Z 1500 The 3D view is adapted immediately You will notice that the forest plane is green or any other color you may have chosen previously and character plane is orange You may now adjust the Pivot parameter X 0 Y 210 and the remaining position parameters X 0 Y 850 The plane must then be stuck to the ground All that is left is to choose the Size 300 The forest layer was created with the Panning tool in the main panel refer to lesson 7 for further details You may therefore duplicate it horizontally to avoid having to create too many planes To do this Use the Tile mode popup menu E l Erena F re a T N E i E J moe ae be yal ATAT BLES o e Ee jaa rt m au na E Without tile mode With horizontal tile mode Now that the second plane has been created all that remains to be done is create the remaining planes in the same way close trees distant trees mountain with the
125. E 7 i The layers mountain forest distant trees 1 distant trees 2 and character will be used to reproduce the desired animation The Rendering gt Multi plane Camera Effect 15 3 3D views 3D views This effect has an Open stage button which allows you to view the multiplane camera from various angles These 3D views will make adjustment of settings much easier The default settings are as follows A perspective view window bottom left A left side view window top left A front view window top right A top view window bottom right Perspectiva G Top rj Cle gibbe Obz The following buttons are available in each panel to simplify viewing The wa button allows you to zoom with a click and slide on the left mouse button shortcut alt right click move your mouse The 2 button is used for panning with a click and slide on the left mouse button shortcut alt left click move your mouse The nla button when selected ensures the zoom and panning options are only applied to the current view The R button is used to reset the view to its default values The c button displays the camera and the viewing angle The nl button displays the focusing plane In other words the plane on which the image is focused This plane is seen as a red dotted line in the left and top views The focusing plane is also visible in the perspective and front view
126. For instance load a project from your harddrive change the current colors add some layers to your project etc The TVPaint Animation Pro Plug in developpement As explained before George is not the only program that can send commands to TVPaint Anima tion Pro Any other program could theoretically do so Examples using an Excel script a C program or other languages are certainly conceivable Besides it is possible for experienced users or third party companies to create Plug ins that can be used with TVPaint Animation Pro Those Plug ins allows to add customized tools to the software like effects on pictures new drawing modes new tools or new functions The Plug in may be in the dll Dynamic Link Library file format which can be obtained thanks to a compiler dll files are not readable in a text editor unlike the classical George Scripts For more details about this subject please visit the TVPaint Developpement forum You can also ask us the development kit also called SDK at the email address tvpaint tvpaint fr This kit contains source codes for interface functions documentation and some detailled plug in examples Adding arguments You can add arguments to the execution of TVP Animation Pro These arguments are images just write the path and file name scripts syntax script PathAndFileName grg commandes george syntax cmd GeorgeCommand For example TVP Animation exe Mylmage
127. Grain effect The Stylize gt Bevel effect The Stylize gt Drop shadow effect The Stylize gt Toon Shading effect The Stylize gt Erode effect The Stylize gt Add Border effect The Stylize gt Bloom effect The Stylize gt Blender effect The Stylize gt Mosaic effect The Stylize gt Posterize effect 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 O O O O COAOANN NOOO VO CONDO WN N N _ x x a 12 12 13 15 16 18 19 CO COCO NNN POW WD DN DN The Stylize gt Noise effect 12 9 The Stylize gt Print effect 12 9 The Stylize gt Negative effect 12 10 The Stylize gt Solarize effect 12 10 The Stylize gt Color range effect 12 10 The Stylize gt HalfTone effect 12 11 The Stylize gt Lumix effect 12 11 Some remarks regarding the Source Image notion 12 12 The Colors gt Image Source effect 12 13 The Stylize gt Convolve effect 12 16 Lesson 13 The effects of the Distortion group The Distortion gt Flip effect 13 2 The Distortion gt Mirror effect 13 2 The Distortion gt Kaleidoscope effect 13 3 The Distortion gt Perspective 4 points effect 13 7 The Distortion gt Wave effect 13 8 The Distortion gt Tornado effect 13 8 The Distortion gt Bump effect 13 9 The Di
128. HH I SYSTEME 0 3 BHI CREATION D Ceocuments parigita BRICOLAGE JE H Lael Baur co g berbu CO fie fH _ Documents de Qentionnaire ha Weg forumen amp _tournir_avet_T Aia hp T Cearkepiltia mut de ngies i _palriin ten a planets hp _prahesicoic hep ey oe OF gatul i Above an example of a file requester with projects displayed in the form of thumbnails Save a Template Edit Froject Layer Im Mew Project f f bad A template is a blank project using a predefined resolution speed Close Project aspect ratio and number of layers and images It is possible to save a Template using the dedicated option indicated in the File main menu opposite the template will have to Save Project as Template be given a name Export Project to save Project pave Project as Handling TVPaint projects 5 3 Save a Template Template Mone r Untitled 0 2 Configuration default v New Copy Delete VGA VGA x Template Width T Mone From File Height 490 VGA VGA Untitled 01 Aspect Ratio 1 000 4h width 640 e AspectRatio 1 000 Flt Bes 30 000 4 Height as0 e Frame Rate 20 000 Field saindiessivesy Fiela Progressie v stani x New Project OK Cancel In this way you may select the template you just created when a new project is started when starting up or using the program You may also use one of the many predefined models Lo
129. Layer Clear All Stencil 227 Tools Brush Increase Size 156 Layer Invert All Stencil 228 Tools Brush Increase Size 2 157 Image Flip Horizontally 229 Tools Brush Decrease Size 158 Image Flip Vertically 230 Tools Brush Decrease Size 2 159 Image Flip Both Axis 231 Tools Brush Change size 160 Layer Time Zoom In 232 Tools Brush reset 161 Layer Time Zoom Out 233 Layer Clear 162 Layer Light Table Mode 234 Tools Mode Next 163 Layer Toggle Frames Time Code 235 Tools Mode Prev 164 Layer Toggle Background Mode 236 Tools Mode Default 165 Layer Background Mode None 237 Drawing Mode 01 Color 166 Layer Background Mode Color 238 Drawing Mode 02 Behind 167 Layer Background Mode Check 239 Drawing Mode 03 Erase 168 Preview Play 240 Drawing Mode 04 Panto 169 Preview Flip Book 241 Drawing Mode 05 Merge 170 Preview Flip Previous Frame 242 Drawing Mode 06 Shade 171 Layer Sound Load 243 Drawing Mode 07 Light 172 Layer Sound Delete 244 Drawing Mode 08 Colorize 173 Layer Fit To Project 245 Drawing Mode 09 Tint 174 Layer Fit To Selection 246 Drawing Mode 10 Grain 175 Layer Fit To Layer 247 Drawing Mode 11 Smooth 176 Layer Fit To Key 248 Drawing Mode 12 Noise 177 Layer Fit To Sound 249 Drawing Mode 13 Negative 178 Layer Fit To Frame 250 Drawing Mode 14 Sharp 179 Layer Reverse Selection 251 Drawing Mode
130. Log Before application of the FX stack Settings After application of the FX stack The section of the histogram between the abscissas 25 and 128 will be contracted to fit between the abscissas 0 and 51 The section of the histogram between 129 and 255 will be stretched to fit between abscissas 52 and 255 This means that the dark components of the pixels in the image will be reinforced and contracted whereas the light components of the pixels in the image will be redistributed spread and therefore reduced The tabs Red Green Blue and Alpha make the other graphs relative to the current image appear Each of them may be modified independently of the others The principle of contracting and stretching is the same regardless of how many sliders are used Only the number of contracted or stretched intervals changes The first row of tabs contains four tabs Master Shadows MidTones and HighLights Clicking the Shadows tab limits the impact of the slider modifications to the dark colors gradually Clicking the MidTones tab limits the impact of the modifications to the medium tones and will reduce them progressively and finally cancel them out for the dark and light colors Clicking the HighLights tab limits the effects of the histogram modifications to light tones the latter waning progressively then cancelling out for the medium and dark tones The Master tab affects all color ranges in the same way I The
131. Mllasing v enable the Erase mode in the option window named Filling shape which appears in place of the tool panel set the value in the Smooth numeric field to 20 pixels Draw a rectangle in the center of the image The effect of the prior manipulation is immediate the edges of the rectangle are less sharp To finish flip the two layers again after flip Our little man is now behind the brick wall We will add a tinted glass between the little man and the wall E o w character d G eej F Mo Sound Goor ow Wiene Jeo r als Start by creating a new layer name it glass and place it as shown in the Timeline above 3 6 Layers spatial management Layers and timeline Solo Select the color cyan for A color then a blue color for B color Smooth a _ Gpaciy enome In the Filling shape panel change the Erase mode for the Color mode lt a and tick the box Gradient eons PHN The gradient from A color to B color now becomes visible GapClozer 0 epad S Draw a Filled rectangle in the layer named glass paying attention that Rangel its dimensions correspond to the size of the hole in the brick wall auto Pick Color Gradient BOWE oO Brush Wrapping Width Gieten T Height bareteh Opacity Mapping The cursor shown opposite invites you to choose the Orientation and Extent of the gradient The gradient will be applied al
132. O or 1 A 12 Appendix The initialization file PC only Gauge Application de la Pile Fx en cours Oo S0 100 The line Gauge 0 suppress the progress bar during the rendering calculations The line Gauge 1 dislays the progress bar during the rendering calculations When you use the softawre some panels such as progress bar export panels etc use to popup at the center of the screen by default or at the center of your first screen if you have a dual screen configuration This option allows you to choose where you want them to appear For instance if you want those panels to appear at the bottom of your screen you can use those settings PopX 0 PopY 400 RegFileName Let s suppose that you have entered the line RegFileName Yes _ Each time you will have to select a file it will make the softtware to remember the path of the last saved file Let s suppose that you have entered the line RegqFileName No _ This time the software will not remember the path of the last saved file when using a requester DirectDraw is a DirectX library which allows to manage calculations and 2D graphics rendering It allows to use the hardware acceleration of the graphic cards in order to display datas in real time DdrawEmulationOnly On a few graphic cards all the DirectDraw functions are not supported In this case it is necessary to unactivate the use of DirectDraw by writing the line DdrawEmula
133. P Last_Config Homedir C Program Files T VPaint Developpement TVPaint Animation Pro Georgedir C Program Files TVPaint Developpement TVPaint Animation Pro George Temp D temp TVPAP locfile french tvpaint loc language french Itis possible to add comments after each line of this file You only need to add the lt caracter before writing it For instance Eas language english we will use the english language Here are the options that you can add and or modify in this file HomeDir This option indicates the directory containing the executable file of the software C Program Files TVPaint Developpement TVPaint Animation Pro in Microsoft Windows operating system GeorgeDir This option indicates the directory containing the George Script by default C Program Files TVPaint Developpement TVPaint Animation Pro George in Microsoft Windows operating system This option indicates the directory containing the temporary files of TVPaint Animation Pro Although you have chosen this directory during the install process of the software you can change it here or you can use the Prerences Panel in the Edit main menu Last Config This option allows to know the last configuration file that you have used with TVPaint Animation Pro Nosubtablet This option allows to fix calibration problems that are sometimes encountered with old models of graphic tablet it awaits the value
134. Paint Animation Pro Load a sound track to be included in your project On the left of the timeline the name of the loaded sound file will appear and another triangle V will allow you to change the size of the track display nedrcen EEDA Delete a sound track from your current project It is possible to move the audio track along the timeline with a click and slide on the former This function allows you to adjust synchronization of your animation and sound track The Offset option enables synchronization using a numeric value The Lock option prevents all movement of your sound track with a click and slide Once you have completed your settings this option will allow you to avoid any risk of handling mistakes If the jog audio is in None position no sounds will be emitted when you move along the timeline If the jog audio is in Scrub position the sounds will only be emitted if your movements along the timeline is carried out with a mouse or stylus If the jog audio is in Always position the sounds will always be emitted when you move along the timeline regardless of whether you use the mouse stylus or keyboard arrow keys If a sound is emitted each time you change the current image in the timeline the option Enter the scrub audio duration allows you to define the duration of this sound The Notes option is available when using the RMB on the sound area It allows to add text in the TimeLine Each cell of the Timelin
135. Paint Animation Pro files may be stored o This directory may be modified using the associated text field or using the Set button a file navigator window then opens o The temporary files contain data relative to the current TVPaint Animation Pro session Data relative to your animations is also stored here for example the various stages of your work necessary for correct operation of the Undo and Redo options o Inexperienced users are advised not to change the default location The faster the data storage device on which your temporary files are stored the s faster TVPaint Animation Pro will work Always ensure this storage device has sufficient available storage capacity The fourth section of the General tab specific to PC users is used to enable or disable the Sub Pixel mode for future drawings This is in direct relation with your hardware and more precisely with your graphic tablet if you are using one we strongly recommend it All the latest models of Wacom tablets work in Sub Pixel i e the tablet precision is greater than one pixel on the screen Enabling this function when suitable hardware is used will allow you to use TVPaint Animation Pro drawing tools with a precision greater than one pixel In the contrary case if your hardware does not support this function tablet management may be negatively affected drift between the true position and the position of the cursor on the screen for
136. Palette Panel 108 Project Append Single Image 45 Interface Open Palette Panel 109 Project Duplicate Single Image 46 Interface Close Palette Panel 110 Project Hide Other 47 Interface Toggle Layer Panel 111 Project Show All 48 Interface Open Layer Panel 112 Project Hide 49 Interface Close Layer Panel 113 Project Show 50 Interface Toggle Navigator Panel 114 Layer Insert Tween Image 51 Interface Open Navigator Panel 115 Layer Insert Tween Images 52 Interface Close Navigator Panel 116 Layer Retime 53 Interface Toggle Remote Panel 117 Project Split 54 Interface Open Remote Panel 118 Project Duplicate 55 Interface Close Remote Panel 119 Layer Select All Images 56 Interface Toggle Gradient Panel 120 Layer Delete Image 57 Interface Open Gradient Panel 121 Project Delete Image 58 Interface Close Gradient Panel 122 Project Previous 59 Interface Toggle Coordinates Panel 123 Project Next 60 Interface Open Coordinates Panel 124 Layer First Layer 61 Interface Close Coordinates Panel 125 Layer Last Layer 62 Interface Toggle Paper Panel 126 Layer Previous Layer 63 Interface Open Paper Panel 127 Layer Next Layer 64 Interface Close Paper Panel 128 Layer First Layer with Selection 65 Interface Toggle Guides Panel 129 Layer Last Layer with Selection 66 Interface Open Guides Panel 130 Layer Previous Layer with Selection
137. STEME C Z _rowr_de_briques ap 1 j x 600 1 7924 C CREATION 0 Fl _palette tn 1 600 x 4032 Tii E D re prijs Eo _plancie tn 1 BOO u Bt a4 B BRICOLAGE E q Bl prehistoric to 1 Bal Eag 2a of Lecter CO F Letteur CD 103 Er Documents de Gestionnaire e Mus documents Corbella j Cancel This window is laid out as follows The text field at the top of the window allows you to enter the name under which the file is to be saved The second text field just below the first is used to select the type of files to be displayed in the right section of the window The popup menu to the right of this field is a shortcut used to select the file types of your choice In the default setting all file types are displayed extension PNG BMP JPG TVPaint Animation Pro projects have the extension TVP The left section of the window contains the directory path When necessary the sliders and fingerwheel of your mouse may be used to scroll through the list of folders available for storage A right click on an item in this list opens a contextual menu offering access to Open Delete and Rename functions The Ht and E buttons are used to display or hide the content of your storage supports folders or sub folders The ss is used to return to the parent folder The arrows are used to scroll through the history of selections in the file explorer In this way you may quickly find the folders in which you last sav
138. Saund Coor iframe r lla mi Froject Layer Image Effects Undo Redo It is possible to place Bookmarks on the images of your animation Clear layer circled in black above using the corresponding option in the Edit main menu oggle Bookmark nue Se es Once the Bookmarks are placed the keyboard shortcuts Shift Ctrl lt and Shift Ctrl enable you to move to the Re Apply closest Bookmark to the left or right of the current image Finally ClipBoard the keyboard shortcut Shift Ctrl 7 creates a Bookmark for the ao current image or deletes the Bookmark if the current image already enes contains one This option provides fast access to key images in your animation without having to modify the zoom factor of your timeline and or use the sliders The Preview settings The preview settings are used to configure the way your computer and program interact to play your animations bab saddens e a You may open the preview settings panel shown opposite via the Preview EO Windows main menu or by clicking on the preview progress bar in the ai Dala Roig 41 561MBis 4 SERN tool bar Enta Prowy 1 Play Aif as Flip Book 1 OO ab Three pre view modes are available in the Preview popup menu The Real time mode respects the duration of your animation when viewing it It depends on the processing power of your computer If the computer is fast all images will be displayed at the framerate chosen by you In the contr
139. Temporal management of layers Animation layers The Mark in and Mark out buttons These are numeric or time values indicating the frame from which the animation will start playing as well as the frame at which it will be stopped In order for this function to be taken into account when playing your animation you must enable the corresponding buttons Two red and green markers enable identification of the mark in and mark out points gt You may use the arrow buttons J to assign your mark in or mark out point tothe current image Now let s move on to field projects and or projects with a ratio other than 1 A The buttons B 7 and 2 of the horizontal bar are only available when you are working with a project containing E fields y 2 G 100 00 Button B enables display of both fields simultaneously when playing an animation or video Button 7 will display the field which you have defined as the first field Button 2 will display the second field of the current image Note that the 1 and 2 buttons may only be used if your project is set to use fields Furthermore moving to the next image in a project containing fields AN will have the effect that the cursor of the current image does not move to the next image but to the next field as an image is composed of 2 fields Button A of the current project window is used to enable disable pixel Aspect Ratio display This does not modify the cur
140. The Remove project button is used when the original project is not to be kept on the screen A Use of the Remove project option is at your own risk as in this case the Undo function cannot be used to help you out The right section of the project modification panel enables selection of the portion of the project which is to be modified The mark in and mark out buttons as well as the associated numeric fields will help you select the first and last images of the project to be modified The central numeric field and slider are used for navigation over the entire duration of the project Load an existing image or animation It is sometimes useful when working to load an image video or animation which has not been saved in a format which manages layers as well as their layout and opacity etc in other words an animation which has not been saved in one of the formats TVP MIR or AUR In this case a new panel referred to as import footage panel appears directly after selection of a file in the requester This panel is as follows Width 1260 Aapatt aoon Height 1024 Field Progreraie Fraire Roit S000 Print Aspect Rata 1 O00 x Fiai Progressive gingii Frama v7 Btt 517 Pisis s Makin Markut Aea B AET This panel is similar to the project modification panel Let s assume you have loaded a video file AVI or MOV On the top left hand side of the import panel you will find all information relative
141. The various program panels 1 2 The toolbar 1 3 Main panel 1 4 Color picker 1 4 Toolbox 1 4 Current project window 1 5 The layers window 1 5 Main menu 1 5 Some useful tips 1 6 Move a window 1 6 Close minimize or maximize a window 1 6 Sliders and mini sliders 1 6 Alphanumeric fields 1 6 Progress bar 1 7 Working with projects 1 7 Create a new project 1 7 View data relative to your project 1 8 Name a project 1 8 Working with several projects 1 8 Working in fullscreen mode 1 9 Close a project 1 9 The main menu Help 1 9 InLine support 1 9 The About window 1 10 To quit the program 1 10 Save the configuration 1 10 Managing the configurations 1 11 The Preferences panel 1 12 The General tab 1 12 The Display tab 1 13 The Interface tab 1 14 The Memory amp Cache tab 1 15 Some details 1 16 Working without the notion of DPI 1 16 The notion of pixel aspect ratio 1 16 Video fields 1 17 Lesson 02 Drawing basics Your first drawing 2 2 The first geometric form trace a rectangle 2 2 The Floodfill option 2 3 Recover a color on the screen 2 3 Redo and undo Notion of layers and colored background Zoom and View options Notion of pixel opacity R G B and H S L color systems The drawing modes Further details The drawing modes Color and Behind Mechanical pencil and Pencil tools The Erase drawing mode The Shade and Light drawing mode Color A and color B La rotation du plan de travail Manag
142. To create a new B spline proceed in this way Select New B spline in the popup menu Display the HUD and check the preview box add control points on the screen and close the B spline set the position edge and sharpness parameters for each points 16 18 The effects of the Rendering group The Rendering gt RotoTracking effect e The blending modes The last popup menu of the RotoTracking effect panel is called blending mode t is usefull when you manage more than one B spline If you use two splines this is also true for more than two splines The add mode will add the opacity of the two area of pixels The sub mode will substract the opacity of the current shape from the second one B spline 1 B spline 2 B spline 1 B spline 2 B spline 1 B spline 2 add mode i sub mode In those two last examples the edge and sharpness parameters are taken into A account e Some ideas to make your B spline move on the screen Let s take a common B spline The coordinates x and y of a control point define its position on the screen Three options are available in the interpolation menu spline linear or polynomial This affects the path of the control point in time If you use the tool menu its coordinates may follow the path of your choice You should of course use the pixel recorder pixel tracker etc which constitute an excell
143. We will now examine in more detail how to suppress the vapor trail of the plane Firstly begin by selecting FX stack as source sequence of the Healing Tracker effect On the first frame of the footage create a B spline surrounding the vapor trail Use the animation key controllers on the right of the spline menu to create a set of keys for each point of your B spline On the last image of the footage change the shape of your B spline in order to make it surround the extended vapor trail Use again the animation key controllers on your modified B spline Move carrefully the healing source area by using the HUD the vapor trail should not be visible anymore If you slide along the timeline with the preview mode enabled in your FX stack the shape of your B spline should progressively change Then you only have to select all the images of your layer and to apply the effect e e L gt gt i 1 image of the footage FX stack preview enabled last image of the footage The effects of the Rendering group 16 21 The Rendering gt RotoTracking effect It is also possible to suppress the clouds at the bottom of the footage In order to have a good result the healing source area needs to be an even section of the screen without clouds Some other spectacular renderings can be obtained if you use another project as source in the healing tracker effect With some training you should be ab
144. XSheet panel in order to continue our work Although all the next coming steps can be done directly in the timeline When you move your cursor ie change the current image through the timeline try to find syllables and phonemes Then add an annotation on the corresponding place To do so use the option Notes which appears in the audio track contextual menuor in the mages main menu You should obtain a XSheet panel like the one below 8 14 The XSheet Layers and Panel The steps to create a lip sync EmN i a i Sere Gk e PO Create some source columns S i a T 3 2 w or If the text that you want to EIS synchronize with our character is long try to add bookmarks to the images from which a syllable or phoneme Starts It will be easier to find again those images later layers Those layers will not be visible when the project will be finished zo You can already hide the animation s They are only here in order to be selected as source for the XSheet layers However you can set hold as post behavior for the Image layers they will stay visible until the end of the lip sync process You should obtain the image below As explained on page 8 you have now to set your sources images and columns in the right part of the XSheet tab Here below the source columns are created from the existing animation layers of our project the column fcolor is linked to the
145. a Select all images in your clouds layer then cut a rectangular brush in roughly the same size as the red frame shown above You just created a new animated brush Place your animated brush of the cloud in the free sky area just above the house Press the Undo button the cloud disappears Check that the animated brush of the cloud is applied in mode Start amp Once from image 5 Select all images of the clouds layer Press Enter You will notice that the images of the animated brush are applied in the given order to all images of the current layer a second cloud now moves from left to right net ve Line usihest Prajects iNew vjmaga jamin fit vie y Sas 7 u 5 or e dk Ge ak T F clouds d WG Wo B u m allcr oom 100 i So i alg aa pe t pT a E aet Po No Sand Mone w Frame Did you understand these two examples If yes you can now easily make the wings of a bird flap wherever you want to 4 18 Temporal management of layers Lesson 5 Handling TVPaint projects In this lesson you will e Learn how to handle TVPaint Animation Pro projects load save import export etc e Study the notions of Templates Dependencies e Discover the Video Grabber Panel e Learn how to use the project management panel Introduction Introduction In lessons 3 amp 4 we studied the concepts of image layers and a
146. a Current ragg 0 E i PEET i a e Above to the right you will find all information relative to your project including the workspace rotation angle which is accessible by placing the cursor on the project title bar Note that workspace rotation always takes place from the center of your project window r If necessary you may use the bottom and a right hand sliders of your project window to i position the latter see opposite i Al he a m yi m eit asiota LLa e be ahai a rs je AFL ria 4 arom iaa s amje ajne ee pmj og te lal Show Grid Show Guides Sow eanee While the workspace is rotated it becomes visible in the form of an animation v Show Selection disk If you do not need this function it may be disabled in the Display popup menu of the current project Show Sate Area Show Animator Field s Show Animator Disk The steps to create animated graphics 6 21 The classical tools of the animator Animation artists who prefer to use the Animator fields may use the same menu to select this option PLEnbey E Using the light table The light table is a familiar tool to cartoon and animation artists It simplifies drawing of the current image by offering a tone down view of the images before and after the current image m Z It is accessible with a left click on the light bulb icon in the tool Ps bar or via the Windows main menu wY Running Kig Load the animation R
147. a n M _ i Full ail Hide IUD Preview Fun Hida UT Pew The Source popup menu is used to select either a default particle circular with an opacity level decreasing towards the edges or an image of your choice When required the image may be a brush animated brush or current project In the case of brushes you may select it using the file requester J L BEJ LIL tiiki pE ee burga filers oe Eesti bya ag Diim cep Opposite use of the default particle The Anti aliasing option allows you to finalize the general aspect of the particles We have already discussed this when studying the drawing tools lesson 2 and lesson 7 The Handle menu works in the same way as that encountered when studying the brush and animated brush tools It defines the particle axis which is the reference axis when a spin is imposed on the particle You may choose a handle located in the center of the particle more precisely in the center of the HUD rectangle surrounding it or in one of the four corners of the latter As a last resort you may even place the handle manually The Handle is also used as a reference point when calculating collisions Furthermore if you need to calculate a collision it may be wise to place the handle elsewhere than in the center of the particles in order to obtain better results see diagrams below The Rendering gt Particles Generator effect 17 15 The tabs of the P
148. a parameter affects the light and dark pixels only marginally 11 4 The effects of the Color and Keying groups The effects in the Color menu Below you will find an example of the difference between a gamma reduction and a reduction of the brightness Reducing the Gamma by half only slightly affects the pixels making up the paint and the background the latter remain bright and clear Modifying the Luminosity to 50 gives the same pixels a darker hue i he m e e y E ET eee nF n pT ag e A hg Bo 5 Pid aft te Pie 7 E a a at Se Sec a ee Original image Gamma 1 Gamma 0 5 Luminosity 50 The Angle parameter enables rotation of colors at the angle of your choice around the color wheel see below For example going from angle 0 to the angle 90 will transform the orange colors in the image to green blue to purple etc 90 rotation Lei ot a a maii ip el i AE A A are S i mE d Original image o _ Rotation of colors of 90 The color wheel The Rotation parameter reflects the number of turns around the color wheel before arriving at the chosen angle This allows you to make the colors vary in a time cycle which is sometimes useful for colored logos In the example below we start with a blue TVPaint logo R 0 G 0 B 255 placed on each image of an animation layer comprising forty eight TVPaint An animation key is placed at the first image of the layer lock
149. ad an existing project To load an existing project from the data storage support simply press the keyboard shortcut Shift L or the Load option in the File main menu The file requester will then ask you to select an access path and file name Now that you know how to use the requester load the file running kid_2 tvp Folder C program files TVPaint Developpement TVPaint Animation Pro for Windows users Folder Applications TVPaint Animation Pro for OS X users If the project loaded is too big too small possesses too many images or has an incorrect pixel ratio you may modify it Ala File main menu Simply click on the name of one of these projects to load it again O A list of files previously loaded with TVPaint Animation Pro is available in the f Modify a project The option Modify project is accessible in the Project main menu The latter opens the panel illustrated below The project properties are indicated on the top left hand side of the window and include Project name Width Height number of frames per second frequency Pixel aspect and Field options Bottom left you will see the future size of your project after modification Just below a popup menu is available in which you may select the predefined format you require corresponding to the format you will obtain after modification It is possible to modify a project originally in VGA format to obtain a project in NTSC format 5 4 Han
150. ad the projects D cartoon3 tvp D cartoon4 tvp D cartoon15 tvp D cartoon16 tvp For number 3 to 16 NameOfTheFile D cartoon number tvp tv_loadproject NameOfTheFile End As shown above you will have to use simple quotation marks or double quotation marks in order to differenciate variables from character strings In the example above number and NameOfTheFile are variables D cartoon and tvp are character strings 18 20 The advanced functions of TV Paint Animation Pro How to use the George scripting language The variable NameOfTheFile receive the concatenation of D cartoon number and tvp In other words the character strings d cartoon and tvp the variable number have been joined end to end in order to create the variable NameOfTheFile T It is possible to use the Concat instruction to join end to end character strings lt and or variables The following lines have the same effect NameOfTheFile number jpg NameOfTheFile C oncat number jpg If you need to use simple quotation marks or double quotation marks in your character strings you must surround them with the other quotation marks at your disposal as shown in the example below Print My prefered animation program is TVPaint Animation Pro will Surround the name of the software with double quotation marks Print My prefered animation p
151. al axis to choose the method applied to connect the points with each other Linear Spline or Polynomial to select a pre defined profile if required to do this use the two arrow buttons to scroll the pre defined profiles and then click on the profile of your choice to display the corresponding profile on the screen As for the palettes and mixers TVPaint Animation Pro offers you the possibility to Load Save and Reset the profiles File popup menu The coordinates The Coordinates window is accessible via the Windows main menu or via the icon of the tool bar shown opposite left you find the coordinates in pixels of the pixel pointed with the mouse as well as its RGB values right you find a small zoom box with a central point if you draw a rectangle the two empty lines will indicate the height and width of the latter in pixels There you will also find the length of the two half axes if you draw an ellipse Drawing basics 2 15 Further details The Re apply option This is a situation that is often encountered you have drawn an ellipse on your screen But you have used the wrong tool you used the Oji brush instead of the Penbrush The Undo option allows you to go back the ellipse drawn with the o brush will disappear but you may have trouble drawing the ellipse again with the same precision Even when having noted the exact coordinates of the ellipse center coordinates and length of the tw
152. amera has focused on the rose and the tree is blurred In the right photo the camera has focused on the tree and the rose is therefore blurred 15 2 The Rendering gt Multi plane Camera Effect Editing table and computer multiplane camera Editing table and computer multiplane camera Below on the left you will see the schematic diagram of a traditional multiplane camera setup often referred to as editing table Each plane is placed on a sheet of glass and is moved progressively while filming Our computer multi plane camera effect seen below right does not function in the same way In this case it is the camera which moves progressively while filming and the scenery is automatically duplicated horizontally the starry sky background does not move and is always placed in front of the virtual camera The project used in this chapter The drawing shown on the previous page corresponds to the MPC tvp project which will be taken as a basis to study the multi plane camera effect Here you have the corresponding timeline a F oe 1 a E g E ETENI a a eee ie a ed a ae ee a RE E Layer where the effect is applied Bb ut Pune Camera p PETE Al iit 7 he E iar Coa me m Layers sky and stars which ay Sis on donot move co Layer character Layer distant trees near Layer distant trees far Layer forest Layer mountain E TE came mm T
153. an use either the left 0 or the right 1 mouse button Of course the circle will be drawn on the current image on the current layer tv_Dot x y 0 1 this command allows to use the current tool airbrush pen custombrush on the pixel with x y coordinates in the current image on the current layer The 0 1 parameter indicates that you can use either the left 0 or the right 1 mouse button tv_Warn text This command displays a popup dialog box containing the caracter string text and an ok button The character string must be surrounded by quotation marks tv_Pen size This command allows to select the pen tool with its current parameters drawing mode opacity power and change its size You should always remember that a George Script will use TVPaint Animation Pro as it finds it i e with the functions and options that are currently set For instance if you want to draw a red line with a George Script the script needs to be told more than just the line coordinates Unless you explicitly tell it to use a red color your script will go ahead and use the current color when the script is run whatever it may be Similarly if when you run the script it is in the Behind or Colorize drawing mode you won t exactly be getting the clean line you were hoping for 18 16 The advanced functions of TV Paint Animation Pro How to use the George scripting language A few useful options It is no
154. arre Type Scripts Command Grab the A color Grab A Color r Grab B Color Grab the B color AA AMASE Grab the current tool with the A color with the B color or with those Tool Grabher b two colors Set ke tHike F Sel Polack Bir i Set Plugins p Set Tool Bar a You may call up a George automation script Select a script command for example TV_LayerAnim TV_Circle TV_Airbrush etc CL E e George Scripts and commands will be discussed further in this lesson How to manage the created actions Once your buttons are created in the custom window other options become available With a simple selection in your custom window you may cut or copy the icons actions that you have just created You simply use the menu described above to paste your icons actions later With a right click on an icon action in the custom window you may edit duplicate or delete it Al APLE OF oll dil at i afaa Se EEr 18 4 The advanced functions of TV Paint Animation Pro Customized windows How to manage the panels Now we will look at the options proposed in the panels themselves In the sub menu shown below which is accessible with a right click in an empty area in your custom window you may This Panel Rename a Show leon Only Rename the current custom window All Panels Deck Show icon only without text Dock your window under the tool bar Dock Bin De
155. articles Generator effect er e eee n eet toi When the Source chosen is an animated brush the Animation popup menu is used to set the order in which the source images appear on the screen The None option authorizes display of the AnimBrush s first frame only The Once option is applied to each frame of the animated brush one after the other and stops at the last The Loop option is also applied to each frame of the animated source one after the other but starts a new cycle each time it reaches the last frame and so on until the particle dies see predefined example objects gt coinfountain The Random and Loop option randomly selects a start frame amongst the frames making up the animated source then repeats these source frames in order starting from the selected frame When the source footage has come to an end it starts again see predefined example cartoon gt eyes The Ping pong option is used to first repeat the animated source frames in a rising order Once the last frame is attained it repeats the frames in a descending order and so on until the end of the particle lifespan The Random option is used to display the animated source frames randomly The Random at start option is used to display the animated source frames randomly for each particle and then to keep it until the end of the particle life span See predefined example objects gt tetris The Particle age option varies the source frame displ
156. ary Here is the name of each new element visible on screen j1 2 5 Opposite we have an nstance containing four Cells The first cell is called Head Cell or more simply Head The following cells when existing are called Exposures cells or Exposures The tail of our instance is the little handle ending the nstance which you can drag to adjust the number of Exposure Cells The content of the cells Whatever the size of the instance could be the exposure cells are an accurate reproduction of the head cell At the first sight all the cells of the instance have then the same content You should however take into account that all the cells of an instance does not have the same function Indeed if a modification of the head cell has a repercussion on the exposure cells it s clearly not the same if you decide to modify an exposure cell directly Spliting an Instance into two smaller Instances Once an exposure cell is modified the current instance is broken into two smaller instances For example opposite our instance contain the letter A Modifying the third exposure cell by deleting the letter A and drawing the letter B will create two different instances the first one containing the letter A the second containing the letter B We will then see the following images when playing the sequence AAABB How to use the Instances for animating Now let s study a new example In our anim
157. ary case some images are not displayed in order to respect the framerate In real time mode the progress bar displays No proxy o NoProw __ The Proxy mode uses periods of less activity in the program to carry out a pre calculation for viewing If for example you spend ten seconds without drawing and without using any program options this time will be used to prepare some of the images for viewing 4 12 Temporal management of layers More details The Render mode does not carry out the calculations required for viewing during viewing It pre calculates the viewing in advance just before playing This compensates the inconveniences encountered in Real time mode for slower computers jerking image jumps etc but requires a lot of disk space and time for this calculation The progress bar below shows how many images may be viewed within the project Proxy 32 126 Proxy 126 126 lf you modify several images at the same time in Proxy mode for example by erasing a layer the viewing calculation will be re started for the number of images concerned images may be viewed in Proxy mode The other images will be viewed in Real time mode i If you start viewing before the calculation process is completed only some of the In TVPaint Animation Pro the preview ratio quality is automatically set depending on the data rate of your temp drive In other words the data rate automatically change the size ratio of your previ
158. aths tA In lesson 9 when studying the Center Blur effect we already discussed _ the idea that an effect may make use of the Position parameters which F will then define a path on the screen We will now discuss this Path notion in more detail Linear v x 320 4h Tools v afz Position Pixel Tracker Path Recorder Copy trom Stack List P When an effect authorizes use of a path s for one or several of its Path Manager parameters you have access to the Tools menu in the panel of the Add to Bin corresponding effect as shown opposite Copy From Path Bin P Center Reset This is what it contains You may use the Pixel tracker to create a path You may also record a stroke on the screen to create a path The third option of the Too s menu allows you to re use a path you have already created previously in your effects stack and use it with the current parameters As is the case for the palettes the tool settings the effects etc a path may be renamed saved etc The option Path Manager is used for all these tasks The option Add to bin allows you to save the current path under a name of your choice for later use we have already done the same for customized palettes mixers tools The Copy from path bin allows you to re use a path saved in the Bin for your position parameter The Center option replaces the position values for the current key with those of the center of the image
159. ation the elephant falls from the top of the screen then gets up and finally leaves the screen by walking on the left direction j a j ae BT aw i i i L L e A rai gt ms i _ HA i F a io Em T riain 1 j 7 Hadi i We pL at a _ te 1 gt 2 3 gt 4 The steps to create animated graphics 6 11 Working with instances new We can already and easily distinguish four key images from which the inbetweens will be drawn Let s re use the method introduced earlier in this lesson but with image instances Firstly create a new animation layer and duplicate the current frame three time You must have four empty instances on the timeline We need then to draw the four key images in each instance Just after this operation you can adjust the timing by choosing the appropriate number of exposure cells in each instance a A pA If you need a quick preview of the animation when drawing it is advised to use the FLip Book option see lesson 4 for more details Once this task is finished we can break the four existing instances in order to draw the first inbetweens the inbetweens are drawn in blue for more readability wl O You can use the Lighttable option to help you during the drawing process It will take only the head cells into account please read the lighttable section further in this lesson 6 12 The steps to
160. ature is drawn progressively on the screen To ensure that your stroke is carried out on the number of images of your te i EOS choice two methods are availabe You may stretch or contract the set of keys right after recording the stroke as indicated above You may create an animation layer with the number of images desired and select all images before recording the stroke 14 2 The effects of the Motion and Paint groups management of the paths The Paint gt AutoPaint effect Let s now study the AutoPaint effect in detail Recording the stroke generates a large number of key points on the timeline each of which stores the position of your stylus at a given moment When the stroke is recorded you may modify the position of the stylus on the screen for the key of your choice thanks to the numeric fields X and Y For a given key the Draw button indicates if the stylus was in contact with the tablet or not If it is not enabled for a given key there will be no stroke for this key e g this is the case if you lifted the stylus during recording Recording a stroke with the AutoPaint effect allows for other recordings too in particular the data relative to Pressure Altitude Azimuth and Fingerwheel available on the tablet It is also possible to choose whether this data will be restored or not when applying the FX stack by checking or unchecking the corresponding boxes The section Stroke mode offers se
161. ayed according to the age of its particle All animated source frames are displayed once during the particle lifespan With the Particle direction option the animated source frame chosen depends on the direction of the source in space A coin thrown into the air for example will show one side on the way up and another on the way back down to the ground With the Generator s direction option the animated source frame chosen depends on the angle formed between the particles generator and the horizontal plane see above in the chapter Emitters tab page 7 with examples line point rectangle or ellipse With the Emitter direction option the animated source frame chosen depends on the angle formed between the particles emitter and the horizontal plane see below in the chapter Emitters Current tab page 18 4 images AnimBrush A amp C A A B C orD AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA ven ABCDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD once ABCDABCDABCDABCDABCDABCD gt ABCDCBABCDCBABCDCBABCDCBA frins pong DCBCABAACACDCBCCCDDDCBAD random XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX random at star AAAAAAABBBBBBBCCCCCCDDDDD particte age X CDABCDABCDABCDABCDABCD random and ioon particles particles birth death particles moves and life 17 16 The Rendering gt Particles Generator effect The tabs of the Particles Generator effect The Blend popup menu is used to choose the mode to be used when drawing the particles on the screen color behind erase etc R
162. bar or by selecting FX stack panel in the Windows main menu Apy Er Back Initial study of the FX stack Load the project named house which you have created in lesson 4 Merge it and spread the layer over thirty images The resulting layer will be named house 9 2 Working with the FX stack The effect stack or FX stack We obtain the following timeline and screen Our effect stack is presently empty Select the effect Stylize gt Mosaic from the menu The effect stack must looks like the one shown opposite Now modify the parameters Width and Height by setting the values to 20 and 30 gmoath man 3 Full al Hide Huo Prvrvivrey Ea The result is immediately visible on the current image the image is cut in blocks of 20 pixels in width and 30 pixels in height the color of a block is equal to the average of the pixels making up the block in the original image The Smooth button enables blending between adjacent blocks the image obtained is therefore closer to the original image Original image Image with preview of the effect That said the right image above is in fact for the moment only the preview of our mosaic effect disabling the Preview button allows you to return to the original image To validate your settings and apply them into the current layer all you have to do is apply your effect click on the Apply FX stack button at the bottom of the FX stack window Your
163. bove a zoom on the HUD These particle emitters are of course virtual If you use the particles generator effect for animating water coming out of a fountain or tap or smoke coming from a steam engine you just have to draw the fountain tap steam engine It is possible to work with several emitters placed where you want The Emitter popup menu will facilitate your task as it offers you the possibility to Create Rename Delete and Duplicate emitters note that the name of the emitter you are working on is displayed in the header of the popup menu Using several emitters may be useful when for example you wish to animate a building starting to burn with several emitters fire and smoke may come from several windows or chimneys with varying intensity see below 17 8 The Rendering gt Particles Generator effect The tabs of the Particles Generator effect All these types of emitters have a center that you may place wherever you wish using the X Y and Z coordinates the Z coordinate is used to set the depth parameter as you have already seen when studying the Keyframer The Tools and Interpolation Linear Spline or Polynomial popup menus are used to define the path to be followed by your emitter source in time By clicking on the little padlock buttons it is possible to lock your emitters in space so that they cannot be moved along the axis or axes of your choice This enables in
164. bra To open the matrix relative to this effect just click on the Edit button of the panel FF Cimo Props Prete FP Matin Edit Banin Miia pip ke tas r Lite Aeris ge r The matrix of our effect contains 13 rows and 13 columns and as a consequence 169 numerical fields Each numerical value is usually called coefficient The grey boxes are located on the two diagonals of the matrix It usually gives a better readability when you fill in the matrix We have already seen that each color can be broken up in various ways depending on the color system For example the Slider tab of the Color Picker panel gives the numerical values of the A color in the R G B and T S L color systems The Stylise gt Convolve effect calculates a new value and so gives a new a color for each pixel in an image or an image sequence by using the values and so the colors of its neighboring pixels In the mathematical point of view each new value in the R G B color system will be calculated by taking the average of itself and the pixels surrounding it It a weighted average using the matrix coefficients Well you are an animator not a mathematician it doesn t help you a lot to get an idea of the internal working of this effect How to obtain convincing results by changing the numerical values of the matrix The examples below should help you in this task 1 _ example How to create a Blur E Let s take a look at the matrix o
165. cles gt Current tab 17 18 The Rendering gt Particles Generator effect The tabs of the Particles Generator effect However in this case we are dealing with master controllers they are set as a percentage and have a direct influence on all particles of the emitter at the same time This is extremely practical when you wish to increase or decrease the size of all particles at the same time without modifying the size value for each type of particle emitted This also eliminates the need for numerous calculations for each operation The use of animation keys with the master controllers often allows you to save a great deal of time To finish off you may have noticed the animation key controllers next to the Emitters and Particles popup menus These are used to create animation keys for all parameters of the emitter or particle named in the popup menu header at the same time me Ernifiers angle 1 i Direction a Angle am Rotation 0 Width T Height di Particles Particlet 7 Single ia Link fo Emvither dt Humber Asos db Life Wis Points fo sd ab Linear x aloo _ Conte raat a Y ABO e AAi y aoo K Direclion Angle 000 di Rotalion 0 wian 50 Height 50 z Particles Particle 1 Single m Link t Emitter p e q olb Number 50s ojh Lie As ejg olb Poinis fo ST ae 4 D gt The Rendering gt Particles Generator effect 17 19 Lesson
166. click slide of the mouse Apoy tp Selection The Wrap option enables you to wrap the image see below AAliasing If you check the Apply to image box the current image will be taken into consideration when shifting see below Original image Shift option Wrap option If you check the Apply to selection box as well as the Apply to image box the current selection will be taken into consideration when shifting See below a Original image Wrap option Wrap option Shift option with selection without selection with selection with selection If only the Apply to selection box is checked the image will not change but only the selection 1 24 Other TVPaint Animation Pro drawing tools The transformation tools Original image Wrap option Shift option If the AAliasing box is checked the image contours are smoothed The Transform tool in the main panel onta Applytoimage The Transform tool in the main panel is used to shift increase or Applyto Selection reduce the image Panning a Below you find a detailed description of the options proposed in this Panning Y a panel ___ ene The popup menu allows you to either Shift the image or to Fill the Scale screen with the current image Angle ie 6 l ai i ae As with the Panning tool it is possible to shift the image and or the selection see examples below i i ts Proview Apply The Panning
167. click on one of the a F gt five buttons on the panel Whatever your choice may be you will have to draw a vector on the screen to determine the direction and extent of the gradient see below From left to right the gradients Linear Spherical BiLinear Radial and Rectangular Gradient w Another use of papers Apart from reproducing a given pattern the papers may be used to simulate drawing on a real paper The combination of papers with different drawing tools provides very realistic results and enables imitation of different drawing styles charcoal painting on glass lithography etc see below Some images are constructed using many papers The image opposite for example which is available on the CD was compiled using 10 papers Numerous options are available in the papers window You may Modify Hardness Size and Angle of your papers hardness 33 hardness 66 aranes 100 3 12 Layers spatial management Further details size 200 size 100 pe A a angle 0 angle 60 angle 120 Invert the papers Negative option phe Ci Tha Ey y5 a Ai a T x s di j T Hardness 100 4 Invert 7 n Y DEYN 7 Size 100 00 4 Flipx AM PS Angle T a ime paper inverted paper Create a symmetry along the horizontal axis
168. corresponding key or to set its opacity or alpha value ee ee E NA r i l E 1 Ld ii j I H Osi Color O The spread number field mixes the pixels within the current gradient The Dither numeric field works in the same way as the Spread numeric field but uses colors which are not necessarily among those you have chosen although they are quite close to them this process is often used in the video sector The nvert option flips the current gradient The V cursor enables calibration of the transition zone from one gradient to another The File popup menu enables you to load or save your gradients on a memory support You may also choose to recover the pre defined gradients of TVPaint Animation Pro if required Here again it is necessary to Save the configuration to recover the gradients you have created using this program Color gradients and drawing tools Color gradients are also useful when working with drawing tools Assigning a color or opacity gradient to a drawing tool provides a wide variety of interesting visual effects see example opposite The more power applied to the tool or the more repetition on the screen the more its color will cover the gradient chosen Layers spatial management 3 11 Further details The different types of gradients When the gradient field is ticked on the Filling shape panel several types of gradients are available to you
169. ct Frame Rate w Stretch ta Project Frame Rate w Time Interpolation Tirne Interpolation Single Frame Single Frame When a video is loaded as a custom brush the same options are available with the exception of the Stretch to project size option x17 When you load a file in PSD format a new project is automatically created no Bow import footage panel is opened and the image layers are all present in the timeline Handling TVPaint projects 5 7 Load an existing image or animation ee iz 1 The Import footage option in the New Layer ANIM timeline shown opposite returns the New XSheet Layar amp user directly to the import footage Now Layor From Currant image panel New layer tab impor Fooiaga N Saund Color F BB Frame ooo f Dependencies CiDocuments and SettingsiHometBui PreLoad The Preload button present in the import footage panel is used to choose whether the video footage on which you wish to work is to be read directly from the computer storage support or if it is to be included in your current project This option is important for the following reasons Let s assume your projects possess layers composed of non preloaded video footage When loading the same project again TVPaint Animation Pro will look for the data necessary to display the images layers and timelines in the external video files This function is interesting as it saves space whe
170. d Cancel In this window you have the possibility to define whether or not each plane is to be enabled together with the customized Z axis position value or not for each plane You may also modify the HUD color Now all that remains is to click on OK and the Wizard will automatically create all your planes using the layers The Rendering gt Multi plane Camera Effect 15 13 Other situations Other situations We have now learned how to use the multi plane camera effect with a simple example Our Multiplane camera effect may also be used in other situations Below you will see the transversal movement of the two planets with a fixed sun and Lens Flare effect it will be studied in the next lesson The multiplane camera can also be used to zoom between the planes you have created After you have created the planes with the wizard go in the View tab and on the first frame of the multi plane camera layer in the timeline Create an animation key for the Camera with a negative value for the Z axis Go to the last frame of the multi plane camera layer in the timeline create another animation key for the Camera with a positive value for the Z axis Apply the FX Stack to the whole layer Use the Play button in your project window to view the result the first planes should disappear smoothly as shown in the exemple below Now you try it 15 14 The Rendering gt Multi plane Camera Effect
171. d and animated by Olivier Michon The skull lesson 13 the countryside lesson 15 and the character lesson 8 used to describe the Wrapping Grid the multiplane camera and the lip sync were created by Peter Wassink The particle presets lesson 18 were invented by Manuel Zander Lineart at the beginning of lesson 13 was created by Yoann Robert The original idea of the Sketch Panel comes from Dave Cockburn The red planet the tree the prehistoric the house the flowers paintings the color picker the photos and various diagrams were created by Fabrice Debarge All other images screenshots panels are protected by copyright of TVPaint Developpement Many thanks you to all those who have helped us from close and far to complete this task Lesson 00 Introduction Getting to know TVPaint Animation Pro TVPaint Animation Pro is a program compiled for graphic design and 2D animation This program is intended for drawing and animation enthusiasts With its bitmap approach its objective is to cover the main needs of the artist It offers a complete range of high performance tools the parameters of which may be set whether for the layman or the professional artist and yet still offers the creative feeling provided by pen and paper TVPaint Animation Pro is the animator s home studio Based on TVPaint technology which is renowned worldwide since its success on the Amiga in 1991 and constantly upgraded for ever b
172. d brush images or size of the brush A Right click on the brush in the tab to Add the current brush to the bin Get the brush you just clicked on as current brush Swap the current brush with the one you just clicked on Export the brush Delete the brush from the bin Your settings will be saved if you click on Save this configuration when you leave the program If you reset TVPaint Animation Pro s configuration your settings will be lost Opposite you will find an example of the predefined animated brushes available in TVPaint Animation Pro 7 20 Other TVPaint Animation Pro drawing tools To perfectly master the drawing tools The Tool Bin panel The Tool Bin panel is the third custom panel present when you start the program for the first time Located under the Animator Panel it has the following form Although relatively basic at first sight this panel is also very useful to store your brushes thanks to the first two buttons it contains The M is used to grab the current tool and place it in the panel under the two buttons An icon is automatically created according to the tool to be used The second button m fulfils the same function as the first except that it grabs the tool together with the A and B colors active when the tool was grabbed Now all you have to do is click on the icon of the tool grabbed in order to use it again This proves extremely practical when you have specif
173. d in red and the B spline itself is colored in yellow Every key dot can be animated in time So it is for the whole spline and thus the dolphin He can for example move his tail to swim The effects of the Rendering group 16 13 The Rendering gt RotoTracking effect i E ta Resulting pictures once the effect is applied Resulting animation once the effect is played i m Here is the main difference between the rototracking and a simple selection created with the main panel tools Our B splines can evolve and change their shape in time e The control panel Let s now study the control panel in detail Here is the control panel as it appears when you add the Rototracking effect in the FX stack see below 16 14 The effects of the Rendering group The Rendering gt RotoTracking effect pari 100s ae ae a invert A Hidu HUG Brew Appty FA Etack PC rj AOU Optong we R ang Fahne Penseea Prana pari ibis ae oe iei j a plea ephin i 4 eit AMAAAAM l Wo pointe Enit oa d Lj paanpn DAAE taia Pran Ton wj fas m Esya 0 ae pe Eram i 4 EE Blending Mode Mii If fy 14 birie E Ful 7 Hait HUG Pial At the top of the panel the Spline popup menu is used to create rename duplicate or delete B splines Once a first B spline is created some new buttons and menus appear The Point and Blending Mode
174. d on an empty animation layer gt Options a wr Toun Strading Progress Profits a Profile Size 0p Angle 135 00 a Rolalinn in iF Spread 74 C RayCount j2 d elb Border v shadow ony v Image Source ie Progress Profile Soure bayer colors Pre Aehawinr Hnli First Anim Hormnal x Post Dehavior Hold Last onset 15 Flip Nong Blending Mode Color Opacity 100 i D I Gs gt Hide HUD renga ply FA Stack Direction P EXBin Full ha In the FX stack opposite the Stylise gt Toonshading effect will be applied on the animated layer called Toon Shading see the timeline below The effect Colors gt Image Source allows you to specify the reference layer used to render the shadow Here the Source is the animation layer called color If we use the Erase blending mode as we did in the first example the shadow will disappear the toonshadow is inside the running kid That s the reason why we will keep the Co or blending mode and use the Shadow Only option of the Stylise gt Toonshading effect It allows to create the shadow of the running kid without re drawing it It is then possible to generate a shadow for our running kid on a separate animated layer As a consequence the character is not altered by the rendering of the shadow In this example the Colors gt Image Source effect allows you to define an image or an animation sequence
175. d slide of the left mouse button under the timeline icons The images selected are then marked in yellow see below A Time Line Sheet Proiecte Hoi oo New imore e Auta Fi oF Z Tie tees yds dL _ ab Ss d At Siami Color Biome 2 E e It is therefore possible to duplicate or delete all images selected in the same way as described above Cut Copy Paste images When using the method described above it is also possible to cut copy and paste your images anywhere you wish This may be in the same layer from one layer to another or even from one project to another if you are working on several projects Once you have created a selection within the layer of your choice the contextual menu displayed with a right click on the timeline allows you to cut or copy the images selected Finally to paste your images you must select a current image which will be directly in front of the images you wish to paste in select Paste images in the contextual menu of the timeline wi gee TheCut Copy Paste options are also available in the mage main menu Cut Copy Paste layers The method employed to cut copy and paste an image or animation layer from one project to another is the same as that used for images To select several layers simply left click on these layers while pressing the Ctrl or Shift keys as explained in lesson 3 The layers selected then appear in yellow The layer s contextual me
176. data We therefore obtain the same effect as photos taken with a black and white film Increasing the value of the Red parameter will make the red pixels of the original image lighter when changing over to gray Reducing the value will make them darker see next page The same principle applies to the Green and Blue parameters 11 2 The effects of the Color and Keying groups The effects in the Color menu pager ax he ee ee T iea is a y Parameter Red at value 0 a J A t a ei Tia Arie 8 a wih ta ae oe a E a E ie Default settings ee Si pai a re si 7 i yir DEE a ve De af Parameter Red at value 255 noni gt i Default settings Parameter Red value 0 Original image Parameter Red value 255 n ms The Color gt Color Adjust effect e a Paini Adal Portit traii 7 We ll keep the image from the beginning of this chapter and mgin olde study the Color Adjust effect shown opposite in detail Eria i lt This effect uses the traditional notions of color modification ais for drawing and photo touch up software packages Hun fo ange 000 i Reais Furl moj Proe Appi Fx Stack The Brightness parameter is used to increase or decrease the global brightness of the current image or video use negative values to decrease lighting In other words all the pixels present are either changed over to the black color or the white color an eke V e g
177. deo may be created either as a new project a new layer in the current project or as a custom brush these three options are mutually exclusive When a video is loaded as a new project two options are available nw Project New Layer New CustomBrush impot Audio E Single Frame The video sample loaded will be that located between the two time markers on the right side of the panel You may also choose to include sound with your video by checking the mport audio box in the import footage panel The single frame check box if checked will create a project with a layer and a single frame the frame selected in the right side of the panel When a video is loaded as a new layer a new set of options similar to those encountered in the Modify Project section becomes available You may Stretch your video file to fit the dimensions of your current project Adapt the aspect of your video to that of the current project Compensate for any possible frame rate differences between your current project and your video by stretching or contracting your video Choose to stretch or contract with or without interpolation Create a layer with a single frame here again a single frame or large sample may be imported between the mark in and mark out points New Project New Layer New CustomBrush Stretch to Project Size 4 New Project Mew Layer Mew CustamBt Correct Aspect w Correct Aspect w Stretch to Proje
178. dling TVPaint projects Modify a project Project Untitfted 03 With S31 Pinel Apuct 1 000 Hinigint Fini Progressive Frame Fate bh ted Modify Projecto Ousion T Lock Aapret w Width 621 a Height gt i we Fram Rate 2 iin Agpoct Ratio Mawo Field Progressive Rolation Doo iF Resize to New gie 7 Camrect Aspect Ratio we Stretch to New Frame Rale w Time Interpolation f Remove Project Pira Panijarct Siar 671 212 Pirels Markin Mark Gut ae a o Mody anced i The numeric fields located under the popup menu change according to your choice in the predefined formats menu Of course you may modify your project for your own format for example to create an animated gif on a website All you have to do is modify each option manually Width Height Frame rate Aspect Ratio Field a mini popup menu is available for the parameters Frame rate and Aspect ratio The Lock aspect button allows you to keep the width and height ratio of the original project The Rotation parameter is used to rotate the project 90 180 or 270 degrees Here you will discover the functions of the next five buttons By default when the Modify project function is used TVPaint Animation Pro keeps your original project and creates a new project which is modified according to the parameters you have selected The Resize to new size button enables when checked
179. doubt it the cloud has turned ammu into a paintbrush aE Don t forget to erase your tests before continuing e A Several CutBrush tools are at your disposal in the main panel to simplify O your task when creating a brush Rectangle CutBrush Polygonal FreeHand and Magic Wand See opposite EiB Gh A The first animation The first image in our animation layer cloud contains a cloud The other nine images however are empty Go into the second image of this animation layer and apply the brush in order to place the cloud slightly to the right of the cloud on the first image in our animation layer Proceed in the same way for the third image of the animation layer again moving the cloud slightly to the right of the one in the second image Proceed in the same way to the last image of the animation layer You will note that the corresponding icons of the timeline display the cloud and when you move inside the layer using the lt and arrows on the keyboard your cloud will move TVPaint Animation Pro and compositing Now extend viewing to all layers Sliding along the timeline again displays the complete scenery for the first image but on the nine following images there is only the cloud We learned how to stack our image layers like transparent glass sheets on a colored background in lessons 2 and 3 In a way it is possible to do the same here and stack the transparent rolls
180. e After this new inbetweens are added among the A Fa previous one this usually helps a lot to obtain a good A PS S pan quality of animation in other words a smooth flow of SFP movement Mi K Xe The subdivisions are repeated until the animator is satisfied of the rendering 4 final This simple process needs some successive subdivisions along the animation layer of the timeline That s not always easy because the images duplication creation or copy are not always convenient to use Adjusting the timing of the whole animation usually needs to duplicate and or delete some frames and can be time consuming That is the reason why the use of the images instances is clearly advised What is an Instance An instance is simply an image in an animation layer an image which duration can be adjusted It is the new animator dedicated tool Each icon or cell of the timeline has now a small colored square which allows to use this feature To do so simply click on this little handle it becomes yellow and move it as shown opposite 6 10 The steps to create animated graphics Working with instances new You have just increased the duration of the current image Any image of an animation layer can be considered as an instance The use of the instances allows to save a lot of time when following the previous steps It also allows to manage more easily the timing Some vocabul
181. e Modify the Step between two applications of the brush on the screen y 2A 2 a4 This option enables drawing in a discontinued manner A AA Color Fong The SubPixel option is used for more precision during drawing Use the Shift option It allows to distort the current image in the direction of your stroke It is often used with the opacity parameter set to 0 see below r Eda Fu olor Size 100 00 _ shin c 000 Jitter 0 00 4 MN When using the Shift option the Aloha Stamp and Alpha Max Stamp modes are not available Opacty c i0000 Angle c ooo Use the Drying option see end of lesson 3 Optimize the brush i e re align the brush to conserve less transparent Heats a areas around the brush Drying Change the Handle of the brush in other words change the position of Gptimze the cursor in relation to the brush which is centered by default Pact vee a Reset the brush settings The Anim option will be discussed later Rest A The state of the SubPixel option shown above will be kept if the Keep button is O enabled when the brushes are cut 4 14 Temporal management of layers More details The illustrations below show the various concepts described on the previous page Let s take a look at the colors A R 5 G 255 B 8 and B R 255 G 183 B 11 below An example of the various br
182. e layer in the timeline is called Current layer When you draw in the work window the modifications are only applied to this layer The gray layers remain unchanged independent of their position To change the current layer you can Use the arrow keys t and on your keyboard Click on the layer of your choice in the Timeline Select Current in the popup menu which is accessible with a right click in the timeline Use the shortcut to select the layer by clicking on it Press then the layer you wish to select If there is a multiple choice a menu will appear The advantage of working with several layers Now draw a gray blob in the center of the image on the new layer using the penbrush tool radius 50 pixels power 100 opacity 100 mode color At first sight the gray blob seems to cover the little man But in reality this is not the case Layers spatial management 3 3 Layers and timeline When looking at the thumbs in the timeline we see that the gray blob and the little man are on two different layers We have thus superposed two layers on our white background as illustrated in the diagram below Gray blob layer Little man layer White background The gray blob therefore does not delete the little man If you use the same tool in Erase mode on the same gray blob you will note that the little man will reappear Flip layers Before continuing w
183. e Auto Fit wiz ti ir miry ra ams l USN agp va som O Wey aracler H CET A left click on one of the arrows in the black circle on the diagram opposite increases or decreases the size of a layer in the Timeline bo No Sound Color r Wane 0 t ala 4 The layer itself is not changed in any way but only its name and global opacity are visible in the timeline 3 10 Layers spatial management Further details Assign a color to a layer ma Le Shed Prope Another operation that does not affect the layer itself is to assign a color to a layer This operation allows you to simply organise and mark the layers using pre defined colors Click on the C icon in the first column of the timeline to modify the color of the chosen layer F tii foun l 7 Comet Weme J fT Ll E J ja The color gradients As for the mixers and palettes there are pre defined color gradients which you may Copy Rename Delete These pre defined gradients are accessible in the popup menu indicated in the image below in the Gradient window It is also possible to create your own gradients according to your color and opacity criteria sme fit A right click on one of the keys of the color bar enables you to E ge Ce S either delete the key to assign the A color or B color to it or to Omena e recover a color A right click on one of the keys of the opacity bar enables you to either delete the
184. e a project displayed on the screen or even a file for which the access path must be given You may set the Size Offset and Angle parameters as indicated for the lens flares discussed previously Your image will be applied as a lens flare on the current layer This is possible in the various Drawing modes color behind erase etc studied in lesson 2 e The Render order for lens flares The Render order popup menu offers the following four options Creation your light artifacts are calculated and drawn by the program in the order they were created i e as they appear in the lens flare popup menu from top to bottom Invert creation your light artifacts are calculated and drawn by the program in the inverted order of creation in the lens flare popup menu from bottom to top Lens to light your light artifacts are calculated and drawn by the program according to their offset in the direction Lens gt Light Light to lens your light artifacts are calculated and drawn by the program according to their offset in the direction Light gt Lens Take the image type artifacts illustrated below for example Based on their position in the Lens Flare popup menu opposite they were created in the following order blue then green then red Rename Duplicate Delete w blye green reg The effects of the Rendering group 16 7 The Rendering gt Lens Flare effect Here you have the effect obtained for applica
185. e 86 Layer Pick Layer 20 TVPaint Animation Quit 87 Layer Merge Display 21 TVPaint Animation No Border 88 Layer Merge visible 22 TVPaint Animation Iconify 89 Layer Merge Selected 23 Printer Config 90 Layer Make Anim 24 Printer Print 91 Layer Rename 25 Twain Acquire 92 Layer Select All 26 File Import Sequence 93 Layer Select Image From Keys 27 File Import Brush 94 Layer Delete 28 File Export Sequence 95 Layer Duplicate 29 File Export Brush 96 Layer New 30 Interface Open Main Panel 97 Layer New Layer From Selected Images 31 Interface Open Menu Panel 98 Layer Insert Single Image Before Current 32 Interface Toggle Tools Panel Image 33 Interface Open Tools Panel 99 Layer Insert Single Image After Current 34 Interface Close Tools Panel Image 35 Interface Toggle FX Panel 100 Layer Duplicate Single Image 36 Interface Open FX Panel 101 Layer Insert Images Before Current 37 Interface Close FX Panel Image 38 Interface Open Time Line Panel 102 Layer Insert Images After Current Image 39 Interface Open XSheet Panel 103 Layer Duplicate Image 40 Interface Open Project Panel 104 Project Insert Images 41 Interface Toggle LightTable Panel 105 Project Append Images 42 Interface Open LightTable Panel 106 Project Duplicate Image 43 Interface Close LightTable Panel 107 Project Insert Single Image 44 Interface Toggle
186. e Layer New Layer From Current Image Rename Layer Delete Layer Untitled 1 Delete Selected Layers Call up the popup menu by clicking on the layer name in the Timeline Duplicate Layer here Untitled 1 Select All Select Layer Once the popup menu is displayed select the name of the layer at the top Cut Layer of the menu and release the mouse Copy Layer Paste Layers Split Layer Join Layers Align Lett Align Right Make Anim Pre Behavior Post Behavior gt Opacity 100 Yv 3 2 Layers spatial management Layers and timeline Independent of which method was used a text window will appear You character may now enter the name Character in the text field and then validate it by clicking on OK OK Cancel d 3 Create a New layer TVPaint Animation Pro offers the possibility to work with several layers With a bit of practice this will make your work much easier To create a new layer you can me Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl N tL brane baler nss select New Layer Image in the Layer New XGhaat Layar main menu or select New Image Layer in the New menu of the timeline see example opposite Our timeline now comprises two layers the Little man layer and our newly created layer referred to by default as Untitled 1 You may also rename this layer We will call it gray blob The current layer The whit
187. e brush to an angle of your choice add a border to the brush you may choose the color and thickness of the border anti aliase the brush when modifying size and angle use the opacity map see lesson 3 reset all settings to zero and recover the original brush validate the modifications and use the new brush It is possible to obtain all the configurations shown below and many more i A k J X lt c ow J F i hy s rd a My p 4 L has ha eal E a a k i i s w YQ ath J Mi A i ae d T f Sai f j a 1 Tp rr z EF b 6 3 i w A A F gt gt A rl iy ty p i ripe K I N are s i j Vi a a q i f i 2 A Fo W Floodfill using a brush The Filling shape panel appears when you decide to draw a filled surface or floodfill a surface on the screen This panel enables the use of the brush as a floodfill pattern The Brush Wrapping button enables this function There are several methods available Following the horizontal and or vertical axis you may apply the brush while adapting its size width and or height to the surface to be filled without distorting the brush if necessary the whole brush will not be visible Stretch option apply the brush at regular intervals without distording it Tile option distort the brush so that it takes the shape of the surface to be filled Wrap option TVPaint Standard brush Stretch T Brush Wrappi
188. e can receive a note Ho 6 Nien ir Auto Fal l IE o P United 1 hat amc F i is La Iinbetweens to fini Mo Sound 7 k Inbetwesns latest coor Wome 9 I1 eja OK Cancel 8 2 The XSheet Layers and Panel The XSheet Layers and XSheet Panel The XSheet Layers and XSheet Panel Introduction and principle Maybe are you not familiar with XSheet layers and Lip Sync notions Here are some informations regarding their origin The word XSheet comes from eXposure Sheet or dope Sheet It comes from the days of traditional animation when the XSheet was a paper list that numbered all frames of a scene and in which the animator could write down his drawing numbers with the right timing see below It helped the animators to plan their animations and also functionned as a guide for the cameraman to know how to shoot the scene For instance synchronising the lips of a character with a recorded soundtrack in other words doing a Lip Sync was possible with the XSheet sq SCENE GHEET CAMERA INSTAUCTIONS Column where Indications about camera the actions o movements zooms are descnbed pannings etc The XSheet panel commonly called XSheet tab in TVPaint Animation Pro see next pages is the numeric transposition of the classical paper XSheet The reason XSheet panels were included in TVPaint Animation Pro is to make easi
189. e current image The Misc section 2 These 2 buttons enable the use of a virtual stack in which you will store the current image with the first button This image may then be used by simply pressing the second button Note on the one hand that the last image added to the stack is always the first to be removed and on the other hand that the number of images stored in this virtual stack depends on the hard drive space available A 2 This button opens the Tool Bin panel seen in the next lesson 6 20 The steps to create animated graphics The classical tools of the animator The classical tools of the animator Rotate workspace When working with pencil and paper you often have to rotate the page in order to touch up the lines drawn This is also possible with TVPaint Animation Pro thanks to the workspace rotation function This is done by left clicking on the button illustrated opposite in the current project window and then moving the mouse A right click on this button offers access to predefined workspace rotation values You may also use the keyboard shortcuts Ctrl ShifttPageUp PageDown li Project a Running Kid tp U S 4 Ej Sine 2731 x 210 ap E Framo Raio 25 000 rf Piel Aspect 1 000 el Fiold Progressive ts Mig hy n Cisplary Ney ry WoO Fu Al di Current L yAr n Running Eid 1 0 53 54 E ajaj achapa Ua e pa alairon EFL lint baa sal am ee og PL Dota
190. e have selected the cloud Any drawing with your stylus will affect only the cloud Original image Images with selection You may also select an area of a layer and then make the modifications in another layer for added safety 1 22 Other TVPaint Animation Pro drawing tools Selections and cutbrushes O If you have selected an area using the Delete image icon in the main panel will only delete the selection s The choice of a color channel for working also affects only your selection The various types of selections Five icons in the main panel are used to enable these selections From left to right Rectangle select Circle select Freehand select Spline select refer to lesson 2 for further details about this type of spline Select with Magic wand Regarding the function of the magic wand refer to the section Inking Process in lesson 6 In the present case we create selections instead of filling surfaces otherwise the mode remains identical Complex selections and brush creation That s not all the Selection tool window opposite extends the range of possible actions ee From the popup menu Mim The Add and Sub options may be used to create complex selections asl Ke the Add option allows you to add a new selection to the previous Adllaging 7 l l l l i eien a selection while the Sub option as the name implies will remove the new char selection from the previous selection Y
191. e it spends in the air once the ball has landed it is no longer possible to see it in the sky and it is too far away from the field of view to see it on the grass from afar If you check the Single box a new golf ball will be shot only when the first ball has landed independent of the fact whether the latter has left the screen on its trajectory or not and even re entered it on the same trajectory see below Shooting the second ball when the first has landed i e at the end of its life a The Number of Points is only valid with the emitters line rectangle and ellipse It is used to distribute the areas from which the particles are emitted along the contours of the emitter you are using Below the particles of the pre defined example party gt stage lights are used with a Line type emitter then with an Ellipse type emitter 17 10 The Rendering gt Particles Generator effect The tabs of the Particles Generator effect Line type emitter Ellipse type emitter From top to bottom Point parameter 0 or 1 Point parameter 3 Point parameter 5 Point parameter 9 A parameter referred to as Link to emitter is present in this tab it is used to define whether the particles will follow an emitter or not when it moves along the path chosen by you 1 example a steam engine was drawn on the screen The Keyframer effect was used to simulate steam engine movement from left to right A Pixel tracker was used to
192. e options when using the Wacom airbrush fingerwheels Other TVPaint Animation Pro drawing tools 7 13 To perfectly master the drawing tools Opposite you will find a summary diagram of the connections indicated above Note that some tablets do not offer all these options For optimum results TVPaint recommends the use of Wacom Intuos 3 tablets A The speed fade orientation and direction connections are A adjustable _ Reset umio e Orientation angle direction angle speed curve and fade speed Faon a may be modified in the Connection Settings window select onanan a Option in the connections contextual menu shown on the previous page Direction io i Below you will find some examples to illustrate the effects Size connected to Fade for various fade values Size connected to Orientation right drawing Size connected to Direction left drawing Size connected to Speed using various curves All three lines were obtained by increasing the stylus travel speed i e with progressive acceleration The Text tool with Rotation connected to the stylus Direction 7 14 Other TVPaint Animation Pro drawing tools To perfectly master the drawing tools The connections Profiles A Profile Editor option is also available in the connection menu Once selected pes it opens a new window with a profile curve gt This profile curve allows to adjust the interaction between the parameters size c
193. e pixel Value of the Blue component of the pixel Value of the Alpha component of the pixel x coordinate of the pixel y coordinate of the pixel Width of the current project Height of the current project And here are listed the arithmetic operators Arithmetic Operators Examples add 18 3 21 substract 18 6 12 multiply 18 3 54 divide 18 3 6 It is possible to use parentheses in order to set priorities in your calculations If you don t use them the Color Factory plug in will evaluate the operations from the left to the right For instance 1 2 3 9 1 2 3 7 18 6 The advanced functions of TV Paint Animation Pro How to use the plug ins Here are a few examples using the Color Factory plug in Let s begin with a classic image without any modification Fed Gren 255 y M Below the red and blue components of the landscape have been inverted the sky turned into orange and the road turned from red to blue The green component stay unchanged The Color Factory plug in can also be used to create nice color gradients Therefore the formulas on the right panel below are more complicated Red Ta Green keas ym o i awsm OoOO Alpha a Re y 20 Green r 60 i Bluu Alpha The advanced functions of TV Paint Animation Pro 18 7 How to use the plug ins Here is the last exemple An opacity gradient from the
194. e steps to create animated graphics 6 23 The inking process The inking process The fllodfill tool Our running kid is drawn on an animation layer We will now fill in the background with the Floodfill tool elec aiid SENE IA R Ee ny zj ee Once the Floodfill tool has been selected various options are proposed in Opacity ion ons the Filling shape panel shown opposite Fourie ki Lirfur Fill Golorabensiy The color modes were discussed in lesson 2 Gap Claser o _ e The Smooth Opacity Gradient and Opacity mapping options were a discussed in lesson 3 Aut Pick Color The Wrapping brush option was studied in lesson 4 Gradient We will therefore only take a closer look at the second section of the Filling E oO H Ei g Shape panel Brush Wrapping Width Streten 7 Height Siratit w peci Mapping When using the traditional Fill option you choose a pixel in the current project window and then click on it We refer to this pixel as the origin pixel The Fill option changes the color of neighboring pixels until it is prevented from progressing by the border pixels Source Layer r Fill color amp Density GapCloser O e E Range gt The options indicated above allow you to choose the type of pixels to be used as a barrier for the Floodfill function i e pixels which will not be modified after choosing this option Depending on your choice made in the Fill po
195. e the blur in our example Here is what you can expect by using bigger matrix constructed in the same model than the one above TVPaint Above the source image Below the blurs that you can obtain by using a TVPaint 3x3 matrix TVPaint 9x9 matrix TVPaint 5x5 matrix TVPaint TVPaint 7x7 matrix 11x11 matrix TVPaint 13x13 matrix 5 i The execution speed of the Stylise gt Convolve effect depends on the number of Ess coefficients which are different from zero inside the matrix In oher words the more zero coefficients you will have in the matrix the faster the effect will be applied 3 example How to have a sharper image Obtaining a sharper image is the opposite as obtaining a blurred image The surrounding pixels will have less weight than the central pixel in other words they will be less represented than the central pixel ke le Ie Let s take a look at the matrix opposite each coefficient is equal to 2 2 22 i except the central coefficient which is equal to 22 The central a a io coefficient is really higher than the coefficients surrounding it Now we can apply this effect to our logo TVPaint VPaint Before applying the effect After applying the effect 12 18 The effects of the Stylize group The Stylize gt Convolve Effect As seen above the weighted average of the blue or opaque
196. e tree before flying off again and leaving the screen ee FETT When using animated brushes or animation layers as source images additional settings will be required In this case you have two popup menus at your disposal Before and After They may be used to define how the images of your animated brush or animation layer would be applied by the Keyframer effect if their number were lower than that of the sequence you are working on application of the brush or animation layer images with Loop Pingpong Random etc For our butterfly we have chosen the Loop mode 14 14 The effects of the Motion and Paint groups management of the paths The Motion gt Keyframer effect i in gt Please note that the H U D displays the splines followed by the four corners of the 5 source and also the edges of the first and last frames see below e 4 example This example will help you understand the Blend menu in the Rendering tab Load the video footage of your choice and then create an animation layer containing only black and opaque frames just in front You should then see the following timeline a ee ee iji we ti ravers ine ahe Preh f z BO 5 ritad 2 Ie soc 4 lel i f Oo gt arbre i Li i lol E ou k I F otamni o F Chack SM rama fs Create any type of movement for the object of your choice using the Keyframer to
197. e using this source see lesson 12 for more details od FH Tapii Y le Healing Tracker Progress Profle Soue xStack dl Pre Behavior Hold First AANA AA Points Polmios T nome X apr 5 m Posion Togi F yaa aF 3 ail b Edge fU afd oo b Sharp 0 ed In the second section you can manage your B splines Blending Mode Ang F oaeiy inna jelag This has been explained in detail in the Rendering gt seni TRES A Rototracking Effect chapter eat Fuit T Hide HET Preview wr Here is how it works on the image below an unwanted floor lamp is visible This effect will apply the healing mode inside the B spline surrounding the floor lamp So the floor lamp will disappear The healing source area can be recognized by its unique centered handle the HUD should be enabled 1 Note that the distance offset between the healing source area and the destination area of the effect inside of the B spline can be modified in time by using the animation keys Thoses two areas have always the same shape for a given image of the footage 16 20 The effects of the Rendering group The Rendering gt RotoTracking effect Take a look now at the video footage below a plane is flying slowly in the sky over the sea Time Line RShee Projects i moge os lanorit izle ia Attached timeline P No Sound e olor il BB Tinie Code 00 00 06 19 Us ej
198. eas of the image E i E E E E F b E E E amp amp 2 2 amp im E E E E E F cs E E E E E amp E a i a F E Pa os ENEP g a TENNE E E g E The Size parameter is used to set the size and therefore the number of dots on the screen Opposite and on the page above you see the print effect applied with the Color channel and with the Black amp White channel The effects of the Stylize group 12 9 The Stylize gt Negative effect The Stylize gt Negative effect This effect replaces the color of each pixel with its negative The Stylize gt Solarize effect This effect reproduces the photographic effect named solarization which consists of mixing the colors of an image with the colors of its negative AN These two effects have no parameters The Stylize gt Color Range effect This effect substitutes the colors of one of the channels Red Green Blue Alpha or Luminosity with those of the gradient of your choice see lesson 3 for gradients In the example above the gradient blue gt orange gt yellow was applied on the image s luminosity channel the yellow pixels replace the light pixels of the image the red pixels replace the mid tone pixels the blue pixels replace the dark pixels 12 10 The effects of the Stylize group The Stylize gt HalfTone effect The Stylize gt HalfTone effect is
199. ect several images in a XSheet layer 8 10 The icons of the XSheet tab 8 11 Select a default source 8 12 About the projects 8 12 The steps to create a Lip Sync 8 13 The files used in this chapter 8 13 Calibrate the options relative to the audio track 8 14 Positioning syllabe and phonemes 8 14 Create source columns 8 15 Create XSheet Layers 8 16 Lesson 09 Working with FX Stacks The stack or FX stack 9 2 Initial study of the FX stack 9 2 Working in real time 9 3 The various viewing modes 9 4 Some operations 9 4 Working with animation keys 9 5 Manage the effect progress 9 7 Managing effects with several parameters 9 8 The path 9 9 Moving from key to key 9 10 The contextual menu for the keys 9 10 Contract stretch a key line 9 10 Use the selections 9 11 More details about the FX stack 9 11 A more complex effect the Rendering gt Lighting effect 9 11 Single effects multiple effects 9 13 Current effect preview and collapsing of effects 9 14 Invert two effects 9 15 Reset and rename effects 9 16 Saving the settings of the FX stack 9 16 FX stack and TVPaint Animation Pro projects 9 16 Introduction to the video effects 9 17 Lesson 10 The effects of the Blur and Transition groups The Blur group effects 10 2 The Blur gt Cubic blur effect 10 3 The Blur gt Gaussian blur effect 10 3 The Blur gt Chroma blur effect 10 3 The Blur gt Center blur effect 10 4 The Blur gt Radial blur effect 10 4 The Bl
200. ect you are working on The time code of the first and last image of the project TimeCode or image number The total project duration The name of the current layer The time code of the first and last image of the current layer TimeCode or image number The total duration of the layer If working with time data provided in time units seems difficult to you click on the TimeCode button at the bottom of the timeline All prior values and time codes are then converted to image numbers To simplify future lessons we will from now on work in this way later you are free to work as you wish with your own animated sequences Create a brush Go to the first image of the animation layer named cloud and draw a gray cloud using the tools of your choice Then reduce viewing to the current layer icon H in the first column of the timeline or shortcut We will create an animation in which the cloud will move from left to right To do this we have to make our cloud into a brush Select the icon shown opposite from the main panel This option is used to carry out Rectangle CutBrush But what does this mean 4 4 Temporal management of layers Animation layers Let s take an example Draw a Rectangle around the previously drawn cloud When this is done you will note that your current brush is not one of the standard tools the cloud itself has become your brush Press the stylus on your tablet if you
201. ed Profiles and a Ratio close to 0 see Special brush panel below When required the current image used as spare image may also provide a very original artistic effect aaaea 7 44438 Opposite an illustration in impressionist mode with parameters panel together with the current image Spare image Sue c 2000 e Power 100 Opacity 100 a Aspect C 2 e Angle g e Step 12 50 je Oring The Text tool The Text tool is used as its name implies to generate text brushes 44222 Me AT Size Size XScale XScale ma zbe Space Space eae cm wmn Italic lale 5 ee Rotate Roe Seale oc 50 0 sw loos je Track Track Track mane e fanme eee Opacity Opacity parems Outline Ouiline iiaii ipa a i Smooth Smooth Space 25 D if ferenci e ate Ea Border Border Track 125 Difference oe Glow Glow sais le tente bt ri BE a T FTO Gma Braet Here you will find a general introduction into how to add a text to your images Enter the text of your choice in the text field at the bottom of the panel Select the font of your choice Other TVPaint Animation Pro drawing tools 7 11 To perfectly master the drawing tools Select Letter mode or Word mode depending upon whether you wish to display the entire content of the text field or simply one letter at a time Modify the parameters as you requi
202. ed study the pre defined examples objects gt dice and objects gt tetris The Align parameter if enabled acts on the rotation parameter and directly turns the particles according to their trajectory See below two particle jets with and without alignment i With alignment Without alignment All parameters studied have the parameters Variation and Profile to their left size po el The profile preset is used to vary a parameter Size Velocity Velocity OA go Ie Opacity Bounce etc during the life span of a particle veight Val o e Click on one of the profile icons circled in black in the example opposite to open a traditional profile window We have already seen these when studying the drawing tools The Rendering gt Particles Generator effect 17 13 The tabs of the Particles Generator effect Let s take the pre defined example pyrotechnic gt smoketrail shown opposite The three circled profiles below are those used in this example You will note that the particle behavior and profile size and opacity are well balanced The smoke particles are small close to the emitter source and become bigger as the smoke dissipates in the air b The smoke particles are opaque at the beginning yellowish orange areas and become transparent at the end red black areas A parameter with the profile indicated opposite does not vary during the period the particles are displayed
203. ed to define a first region whose colors will be kept and another region whose colors will become transparent Selecting those two regions can be easily done thanks to the two dedicated Region buttons To select the colors you want to keep after applying the FX just use the left mouse button on the Keep button After this you will be able to select an area directly on the HUD your cursor will be changed into a lasso To select the colors which will become transparent you can use the same method with the Drop button Use the left mouse button to add it to the previously selected area O When selecting a new area on the HUD Use the right mouse button to substract it from the previously selected area To visualize the render of this effect use the right mouse button on the current activated button Keep or Drop Of course the result depends on the two areas you have just selected In the example below On the left image there are two areas located on the sky and on the pathway They indicate the colors red and cyan that will be kept on the whole picture On the right image there is one area located on the grass and on the trees It indicates the colors orange and green that will be dropped The picture in the right shows the result after applying the effect Keep region Drop region Final result The swap keep and drop regions button allows to swap the Keep and Drop regions
204. ed to the present effect When Simple FX is checked the chosen effect will replace the present effect Check Multiple FX in the menu and choose the Rendering gt Lighting effect explained above this effect will automatically position itself over the current effect Working with the FX stack 9 13 More details about the FX stack sn a a Set the parameters for the two effects as shown AMO RK o T eptions sin opposite wv Lighting exwine j Progress Profile To simplify our example there is only one type of lighting used and our effect applies only to one source Saez irom d elb frame so no key is required mes a a This said everything that follows still applies if honan q ci P you use keys and animation layers stnation gladly fons F vaho Atitudelso J ae Jd b a Radius 70 Jejda clb Once the preview is enabled you see the intensity 200 Je fd clp e following result Calor PEETS lighting is applied above the center blur of the previous page Lights Spott zdob Profile The advantage of our stack with two effects is that it is possible to modify any of the two effects at w M Center Blu 7 Ranm any time during the preview Progress Profile p Lasanie x fsa a enler Z EFSI Modifications of this kind would indeed be very a EC fastidious if you used a single effect at a time bet ta l applicati
205. ed your work 5 2 Handling TVPaint projects Use the requester The right section of the window displays the files contained in the folder you selected on the left side of the window You may choose to display thumbnails of your files button Thumbs button Scan or display a list containing information relative to your files type name count resolution time size date of last save button List then button Scan Note that some data is not taken into account for all file formats It is also possible to delete the selected file rename it or create a new folder using the buttons Delete Rename and New folder Once you have selected the file or folder you require click on OK To quit the file requester and ignore all operations click on Cancel ert gt When using the second text field the question DI ees Mark is considered a random number or letter whereas the asterisk is considered a complete random word For example Enter jpg to display all image files of the type jpg in the right section of the window Enter dessin003 jpg to display all files named dessinOO3 followed by another character and the extension jpg Therefore files between dessin0030 jpg and dessin0039 jpg will appear whereas dessin0020 jpg or dessin0040 jpg will not Fation All Files All Files Bureau G J Temis msp z Fi t de trawl ih Fannes de com guration Hi l Diegues 34 tA
206. efer to the predefined example nature gt sun for an example of how to use the Add mode In lesson 2 you were given a detailed description of the drawing modes available in TVPaint Animation Pro the Substitute and Mix modes refer to the modes encountered when using a spare image The Color source popup menu is used to modify the particles color The Color option is used to give a tint of your choice to the particles use the Color box and Alpha parameter An Alpha value of 100 will totally change the natural color of the particles The Gradient option is used to modify the color of particles emitted based on a color gradient refer to the predefined examples party gt fireworks or misc gt worma The Mode menu contains some of the options already seen in the Animation menu above However these options do not apply to all consecutive elements of an animated brush but to the colors of your particles in accordance with the color gradient chosen The color gradients chosen to be applied to your particles will depend on the choices you make in this menu In the example party gt fireworkscold the particles color covers the entire color spectrum of your particles for as long as they live In the example party gt stage lights the particles color is chosen randomly and kept as long as the particles live The Emitters gt Current tab Let s take a closer look at the Current tab megh is nieee Cur
207. effects of the Color and Keying groups 11 9 Look at the following graphs for a better understanding Y Range Y Range 2 Tange E Y Range The effects in the Color menu Three curves are represented The black curve represents the impact of the modifications in the histogram on the dark tones Shadows tab The gray curve represents the impact of the modifications on the medium tones MidTones tab The white curve represents the impact of the modifications on the light tones HighLights tab The tones concerned are located on the abscissa The impact power is represented on the ordinates axis the higher the curve for a given range the higher the influence of the histogram modification on this range The circled sliders in the graph opposite are used to move contract or stretch the three curves and consequently modify the effect of the tabs The Color gt Sliders effect eee 7 Options z an 7 In addition to the effects affecting the color on a Progress Profle we correction effect which is more complete and is applied Master Shadows Minton Highlights id ine mane moi samme ERETON using sliders as the name implies a SE Sliders Eann geometric and statistic level there is a last color F I4 alp It also has four tabs Master Shadows MidTones and HighLights which have the same task as those in the Histogram t
208. emanding a large storage capacity With regard to this point it should be noted that TVPaint Animation Pro manages operating systems using over 3 Gigabytes of physical memory Some details To save your shortcuts colors or other predefined preferences for later use with TVPaint Animation Pro do not forget to save your configuration before quitting the program Creation of a new project requires some additional explanations which you will find below Working without the notion of DPI You may already be used to the notion of DPI dots per inch The DPI is a pixel density unit often used in imaging and printing software packages The higher the DPI value of an image the more pixels it contains and the sharper the printed image will be In the animation field the measurement used is the pixel The notion of pixels is more practical as it adapts to the specificities of both metric and non metric systems For example the European PAL format uses a resolution of 720 pixels in width and 576 pixels in height whereas the American NTSC format uses a resolution of 720 pixels in width and 486 pixels in height The global size of your animation in centimeters meters or inches depends entirely on the TV or cinema screen used to view them The notion of pixel aspect ratio The pixel aspect ratio is the multiplication coefficient which links the pixel width to the pixel height Depending on the video formats the pixels may be e
209. embourg Findel Aiport 55 Km http www luxair lu fr airport Trains Metz Railway Station Booking Information SNCF Phone 33 0 8 92 35 35 35 http www sncf com Metz Taxi Phone 33 0 3 87 56 91 92 Car Autoroute A31 Exit n35 For a custom itinary http www viamichelin com Appendix A 15
210. ement of palettes and mixers History of colors Drawing splines segments and circles Adjust the Shape settings The Panto drawing mode Setting the tools Draw floodfilled shapes Setting of the brush profile The coordinates The Re apply option Use the Grid Use the guides The Safe Area Display settings Lesson 03 Spacial management of layers Layers and timeline Further details The Oilbrush tool Rename a layer Create a New layer The current layer The advantage of working with several layers Flip layers Erase the contents of a layer Use of a Paper soften the contours of a surface Apply a color gradient Modify the global opacity of a layer Gradients and Opacity mapping Display and hide a layer Merge layers Delete duplicate a layer Lock a layer Reduce a layer 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 as 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 oouw kf Ww O O O OON N OO 2 2 2 2 ek ek ek ek Sk ek CONN OO AA ah WW O O O OON DOA aaah WWWN DNDN N Assign a color to a layer 3 11 The color gradients 3 11 Color gradients and drawing tools 3 11 The different types of gradients 3 12 Another use of papers 3 12 Create and manage your own papers 3 13 The Papers and the Oilbrush tool 3 14 Using the mask 3 14 Display masks and papers 3 16 Opacity mapping 3 1
211. en drawn We are going to replace it by its own glow Let s take a look at the FX stack opposite Acted FX v Options Bin 1 The first effect that will be applyed is the Yj mage Source v FXBin Stylize gt Glow effect Progress Profile ia Source Current Layer x 2 The Colors gt Image Source effect is the Pre Behavior Huld Firs second effect that will be applied The Source ryPaint Anim Normal oF selected is Current layer and the Blending Mode Ws Post Behavior Hold Last is the Erase Mode offset 0 e Fip Nong In this way the TVPaint logo will be removed Blending Mode Erase i just after the rendering of the glow on the screen opacity jiao a olf T r Glow 7 EXB Progress Protile waho Jeli ajb NA This process works with other effects Hoant fau a jd ep S of the Stylize group like Add Border cor MRN e or Bevel with Outer option selected Alpha 255 an For the Drop Shadow and Toonshading Full X Hide HUD Preview s effects please study the next example apply Fx Stack E g z iT d TO aint TWRair IRAIN as gt gt gt gt Original image After applying the effect After applying all the FX stack Stylise gt Glow only The effects of the Stylize group 12 13 The Colors gt Image Source effect 2 example In this example we will create a shadow for the running kid thanks to the Stylize gt Toonshading effect This shadow will be rendere
212. encils to rough out your drawing The two colors orange and blue can help you to differenciate the portions of the image here the head and the legs are in orange the arms are in blue If you need to do so use the two erasers at your disposal to refine on our image In the example below the first eraser was used on the head of the character the second eraser was used on the legs the colored eraser will only delete the corresponding colors r y Le A en ah j The steps to create animated graphics 6 5 Working directly with TVPaint Animation Pro I POS Either you draw or erase don t forget that the rotative drawing disk can help you B work with more precision Once the sketch with orange and blue colors is finished use the black pencil to clean up the drawing Now use the blue cross icon you now have deleted the blue construction lines of the arms only the black lines of the arms are now visible The orange and black areas of the image head and legs are still visible b _ When you use the two colors blue and orange to draw it is easier to choose B whether part of the image should be erased or kept If you use now the orange cross icon only the black lines will stay on the screen The sketch is more precise than at the beginning At this state of
213. ened character as focus area and the values for the parameters Track W and Track H are too small this will make it difficult to find it in the following images as our character is moving Inversely high values for these parameters may define the left eye of the character as focus area during the process and this will falsify the path obtained The third section contains three popup menus The Reference popup menu is used to choose if the reference focus area for the process is always that of the first image selected or will be updated as tracking progresses The Channel menu will depending on your choice restrict the channels to which analysis of movement tracking will be applied The Accuracy popup menu allows you to define the complexity of the concordance test If you choose 1 1 the test is carried out at pixel level The tracking is then fairly rough If you choose 1 64 the pixels determined by the 1 1 test will be moved 64 times by a 64 of a pixel in order to fine tune tracking The fourth section is a zoom on the focus area you have selected The fifth section contains two buttons The Track button starts the process of creating a path with the chosen parameters whereas the Rev Track button has the same effect but reverses the path 14 8 The effects of the Motion and Paint groups management of the paths The Motion gt Keyframer effect The Motion gt Keyframer effect The Keyframer is doubtle
214. enerate a horizontal and a vertical line It is therefore possible to create a grid with irregular graduations and to impose the line intersection points as the only points to be used The Reset button is pressed to go back to a project window without guides The Show box when checked displays the guides The Snap box imposes the yellow pixels at the intersections of the horizontal and vertical lines as the only pixels to be used This works as if the cursor on the screen were magnetically attracted to the guide intersections The Files popup menu enables saving and loading of your guide positions The Safe Area The safe area may be displayed in the current project window it may be enabled via its Show popup menu see below It is therefore possible to recover the markers normally used in the film industry the action and text safe areas allow viewing of what will effectively appear on the TV screen i e the Safe Area NE mm TT Show Grig Show Guides Show Stencil Show Paper Show Selection Show Sate Area Show Animator Field eed celine ae y aE v Show Animator Disk Drawing basics 2 17 Further details Display settings anne Sea The Display Settings window is accessible via the Windows main menu RRS ee j and is used to choose the color and opacity of the guides stencils safe area animation disk etc Anim Field Sos e Anim Disk y B sox You may also enable display of the ste
215. ent way to manage the movement of control points in time Once the effect is applied its shape and parameters will go from a location to another one The effects of the Rendering group 16 19 The Rendering gt RotoTracking effect The Rendering gt Healing Tracker effect Maybe you recorded a video sequence which contains some faults it could be a micro boom a floor lamp or the vapor trail of a plane Any modifications to the video sequence require a lot of work each frame has to be corrected separately Most often you need to remove the unwanted areas of the sequence and finally you have to replace them one by one The Rendering gt Healing Tracker effect allows you to apply this kind of correction really quickly It combines the use of the Healing mode studied in lesson 7 and the B spline notion encountered in the Rendering gt Rototracking Effect chapter The Healing Tracker panel appears as illustrated opposite In the first section several choices are available for the source image or footage needed for the healing mode FX stack current layer display paper current brush other project When choosing another animated source you may adjust the Pre and Post Behavior the position and the animation mode random animation ping pong animation reduced to the image indicated in the position 4 uel parameter etc As required you may choose to flip your source vertically horizontally or both befor
216. ep the previous brush handle refer to the following section to study the various handles available Remove as many transparent pixels as possible around the brush Optimize option The Display option is used to cut your brush through the visible layers This is referred to as deep cut Temporal management of layers 4 13 More details Below the sun cloud and sky are placed on three different layers The current layer is the cloud layer Brush obtained with deep cut Brush obtained without deep cut Area to be cut Edit brush options Once a brush is cut it is possible to use it as such Numerous parameters are available You may Use the brush in Color mode In this case the color of the pixels is not modified Use the brush in Aloha Stamp mode only the opacity of the brush pixels is taken into account their color becomes the A color Use the brush in Luma Stamp mode the color of the brush pixels varies from A color to B color depending on the original luminosity of the colors of the brush pixels Use the brush in Hue stamp mode in this case the hue of the brush pixels becomes that of A color the luminosity of the pixels is preserved Use the brush inthe Aloha Stamp and Alpha Max Stamp modes see lesson 7 for details about those modes Modify the global Size of the brush Modify the Jitter of the brush Modify the Opacity of the brush Modify the Angle of the brush
217. epresented in the diagram TVPaint qvPaint aR y d The combination of these three parameters gives a wide variety of results It is now up to you to use these rotations in your animations and videos The effects of the Motion and Paint groups management of the paths 14 11 The Motion gt Keyframer effect The logo may carry out several rotations around an axis you simply modify the value of the Rotation parameter when creating the animation keys to increase the angle to 360 In the examples above our logo always turns in relation to its center the axes the logo turns around cross each other in its center The Pivot parameters may be used to modify the position of the rotation axes in relation to the brush Modifying the pivot X coordinate by increasing it by 100 pixels and decreasing the Y coordinate by 100 pixels will generate other types of rotation when modifying Pitch Heading and Bank as the rotation axes are outside the logo Below you will see the effects of the Heading modification for our new pivot TVPaint Modifying the Z coordinate of the pivot allows even more complicated 3D movements Each of the buttons Bank Align Heading Align Pitch Align when enabled allows modification of the brush angle depending on the path it follows Below the angle of the Heading parameter varies according to the logo trajectory Some words regarding the Rendering tab N TAa eres The Fill option is
218. er a simple mouse click on the project window The character string single will be assigned to the variable called command if a point is drawn on the screen a The point coordinates will be assigned to the variables x and y The button selected by the user to place the point will be assigned to the variable called button 1 for RMB O for LMB ey With the following script lines Param Line Parse result command x1 y1 x2 y2 button The George Script will be launched only if a segment is drawn on the project window The character string Line will be assigned to the variable called command if a line is drawn on the screen The coordinates of the points at the ends of the segment will be assigned to the variables x1 y1 and x2 y2 see opposite The button selected by the user to place the point will be assigned to the variable called button 1 for RMB O for LMB xl yi far ye With the two script lines below Param Circle Parse result command x y r button The George Script will be launched only if a circle is drawn on the project window The advanced functions of TV Paint Animation Pro 18 19 How to use the George scripting language The character string Circle will be assigned to the variable called command if a circle is drawn on the screen The coordinates of the circle center will be assigned to the variables x
219. er have independently set parameters thanks to the use of the animation key system Regardless of the mode chosen the second section of the panel enables selection of the Font of your choice Size variation setting of Position parameters for the current project modification of font and background Color and Alpha The effects of the Rendering group 16 29 The Rendering gt Time Code Generator effect Opposite an example of an application with the current frame number in black with a gray background en alej Compton Od el a lft ore if ct oo barh Cat a j Makin The Rendering gt Pattern Generator effect I E The Rendering gt Pattern Generator effect allows Bana eee BSL 2s 2 A EZ to display the classical video patterns on screen rie Fater Ganerabor Progress Profile pe H r MAHA w Bar 100 Bar 75 Bars Pluge S Bars Rod Bars SMPTE I GraysiepS f 7 Full sil daeet ME m mew Gray ramp Bar 100 Bar 75 Bar pluge Bar red Bar SMTPE Grey step 10 Grey step 5 Grey ramp 16 30 The effects of the Rendering group Lesson 17 The Rendering gt Particles Generator effect In this lesson you will learn e To create a particles system e To modify a particles system e louse a particles system in order to add special effects to your videos or put the finishing touches to your an
220. er to time and synchronise the animations thanks to the XSheet layers It is also a very usefull tool for people who uses to scan their drawings The main advantage of the XSheet layer is that a frame that is used multiple times in a scene need only to be adjusted or colored once and all instances of this image in the XSheet layer will change accordingly It saves a lot of time since the process of copying and editing frames is much simpler and easier to control through the XSheet panel This is much simpler than the old way in which you d have to manually copy and paste frames in the layers of the timeline For example let s assume that the coloring and the shadows of a character are on separate layers If you need to re arrange your animation in time it is always very tedious to edit a layer in the same way twice or more Fortunately with the XSheet panel this can be done really easily and quickly The XSheet Layers and Panel 8 3 The XSheet Layers and XSheet Panel All those notions may seem abstract at first but you can relax We will quickly study some concrete situations and examples The projects used in this chapter To make the XSheet layers easier to understand we will need to load the project file Running Kid tvp from your TVPaint Animation Pro CD Rom Those who have downloaded the 30 days trial demo version of the software will find this file in the content sharing section of the TVPaint forum www TVPaint co
221. erShot SD10 IXY DIGITAL L DIGITAL IXUS i PowerShot SD110 IXY DIGITAL 30a DIGITAL IXUS Ils PowerShot S410 IXY DIGITAL 450 DIGITAL IXUS 430 PowerShot S500 IXY DIGITAL 500 DIGITAL IXUS 500 PowerShot SD20 IXY DIGITAL L2 DIGITAL IXUS i5 PowerShot SD200 IXY DIGITAL 40 DIGITAL IXUS 30 PowerShot SD300 IXY DIGITAL 50 DIGITAL IXUS 40 PowerShot SD400 IXY DIGITAL 55 DIGITAL IXUS 50 PowerShot SD500 IXY DIGITAL 600 DIGITAL IXUS 700 PowerShot G1 PowerShot G2 PowerShot G3 PowerShot G5 PowerShot G6 PowerShot Pro90 IS PowerShot S1 IS PowerShot S2 IS PowerShot Pro1 AN The EOS class of digital cameras are not supported at this time The George instructions Here is the complete list of George instructions abs date parse acos do until pause asin exit print atan len rnd break for sin char if else end sar COS max tan cmp min time cut param trunc version while concat for to end function local return while end Appendix A 3 The George language commands The George language commands Here is the complete list of George commands tv_airbrush tv_alphaloadmode tv_alphasavemode tv_areadraw tv_areainit tv_areamove tv_tvpaint2back tv_tvpaint2front tv_background tv_blend tv_bookmarksenum tv_bookmarkset tv_bookmarkclear tv_bookmarktoggle tv_bookmarknext tv_bookmarkprev tv_brushcut tv_brushfromclipboard tv_brushinfo tv_brushpoly tv_brushrestore tv_brushtoclipboard tv_ b
222. erged layer JD mF Opposite four layers i A B C and D are going a E i E to be merged we used the option Merge all Layers The resulting layer at bottom use the instances system Please note that if you merge an image layer containing more than one image it will be transformed into an Instance with the adequate number of cells See below Opposite two image layers A and B are going to be merged In the resulting layer at bottom we called it A B the A and B layers are replaced by two instances The empty space between the two original layers is replaced by an empty instance Stretch a layer We have described how to increase the number of images of a layer by inserting some new exposure cells in the instances There are however other methods to increase the number of images in a layer cee Click and slide to the right on the tab encircled in black see next page to call interpoiatef Up the panel shown opposite a The example below gives you an idea of the effects produced by the various Moll Options Aadempiimages nterpolation is nothing but a fade effect calculated and applied by Add empty Eapusures TVPaint Animation Pro to fill the intermediary images which will be inserted apply cance between the original images I POS It is possible to stretch a layer
223. es from the left to the right of the project window The progress of those options can be set by using the position parameter The extreme values 0 and 100 makes the text lines disappear from the screen A value of 50 corresponds to the initial position of the text lines on the the project window The Rendering gt Time Code Generator effect Mkh FX xj Opinn Bir F p Time tode enersior o PHT Progress Profile le 7 Generation Fres Run LT Mode Frame uz Siar Friern t iF Frame Fate 30 it Reverse Fowit Anal a Dinnar or X aon aF Msi caso t Toole y m36 as Fom cotor Alpha 255 iF Hack Cotor Lintwersal Time 17 34 46 19 This effect displays the time code of the current image in the current layer at the position of your choice Three modes are available Current project mode duplicates the timeline data in number of frames or time code depending on the selections made Frame or Time Code refer to lesson 4 Free run mode is used to define the parameters to be taken into account for the entire current layer independent of the timeline You must therefore specify the position of the first frame the number of frames per second and the display frame or time code in hours minutes seconds and frame number The nvert option is used to create a count down effect User defined mode works in the same way as Free run mode with the simple difference that all frames of the lay
224. esents the aspect of the gradient as Coul A Coul g fie jt will be displayed on the screen Mew Copy Rename Debete Soresd 0 w invert ities 0 a The second bar displays the colors chosen for the gradient In our case the two keys at the end indicate the A color on the left and B color on the right The third bar indicates the opacity chosen for both colors Geiss coor T e Click on the left key of the opacity bar and modify its opacity using the Alpha mini slider to adjust the percentage to around 20 ste Se The keys are symbolised by a colored rectangle The first horizontal bar changes and its left section becomes transparent presence of a check under the cyan color Now draw the rectangle that represents our glass and you will note that the cyan section is transparent while the blue section is opaque Note that no modification was made regarding the global opacity of the layer named glass 3 8 Layers spatial management Layers and timeline 2 method ny You may also use the Opacity mapping option in the Filling Shape panel Smooth If you draw a single colored rectangle after having enabled this option Gracy 50 00 i the opaque and transparent areas are respectively layered on the black source Layer xj and white areas shown in the frame below see below Fill colora pensii For those who wish to know how to edit your own mapping this is
225. et size power opacity etc 1 4 Size 100 00__ Power Pi 30 4 Opacity 100 __ Aspect C 100 lt e Angle Cjo 4 sto fw 150m Drying _ Gradient Reset 1 4 First approach of TVPaint Animation Pro The various program panels Current project window posited eee te oe BAE The current project window is the one in which you will be able to express your artistic talents and create a wide variety of animated sequences Time Line Sheet Projects H S New oF Merge w Auto Fit a Bo i i FT w Untitled 1 Oo lalc 100 This window is also referred to as the timeline by many users It is used to manage your layers and insert keys for your effects we will discuss this point in subsequent lessons Main menu File Edit Project Layer Image MaWie v Multiple Fix Windows Help Single FX Blur Ei oe Color do Black And White Convener Distortion Color Adjust keying Color Eraser Mation Color Raplacer Paini Cunes Rendering Histogram Stike Sliders Transition TVPaint Animation Pro has numerous menus located just above the toolbar in windows they are located at the top of the screen on Mac OS X File Edit Project Layer Image Effects View Windows Help Each of these menus offers specific options all of which will be described in detail in this guide First approach of TVPaint Animation Pro 1 5 Some useful tips Some useful tips Move a
226. eter corresponds to the image n of your project animation layer or animated brush The Animation mode controls the behavior of your brush layer or project random animation ping pong animation reduced to the image indicated in the position parameter etc If the number of source images is lower than the number of images to which your effects are applied you may adjust the Pre and Post Behavior for your source random pingpong loop etc 12 12 The effects of the Stylize group The Source Image notion As required you may choose to flip your source vertically horizontally or both before using this source The Colors gt Image Source effect The Colors gt Image Source effect allows you to display the image or the sequence of your choice on the current layer The Source menu use all notions encoutered in the last paragraph As a consequence you can choose to display the current layer another layer a paper the spare image an other project the current custombrush etc The Blend popup menu is used to choose the mode to be used when drawing the Source mage or Sequence on your current Layer Color Behind Erase The Opacity parameter allow you to adjust the opacity of the displayed image or sequence This effect could seem simple even obvious but it has a lot of useful applications 18 example na REREN Projects On the unique layer of our timeline a TVPaint logo has be
227. ethod described above is not the only way of using this effect Many others The Distortion gt Optical Flow effect The purpose of this effect is also to distort the current image or animation but in a different way than the Distorsion gt Wrapping Grid effect It uses a vector field instead of a grid This vector field defines a flow that will be followed by the pixels of the current image This effect comprises four tabs e The Edit tab w sA Optical Mow Progress Prolia Sit Salecton Fendi Dl Renel Bie d E Frode A Biz 100 i Fui Hirde HA of Printeri L image source The first button allows to set the size of the vector field More exactly it allows to set the number of vector that you will use on both the horizontal and vertical axis The effects of the Distortion group 13 15 The Distortion gt Optical Flow effect Once you have chosen the size you can edit the current vector field itself To do so display the H U D and draw directly on the screen to be exact on the H U D with the purple circle as shown below If you have a picture behind the vector field you should see the render of the distortion Vector field Modified image The left mouse button allows to increase the tension of the vectors in a chosen direction yo ii The right mouse button allows to decrease the tension of the ga ge an vectors in a chosen direction qN A O S
228. etter performance TVPaint adapts to all production diagrams whether traditional fully digital or hybrid Designed to work with all resolutions it will delight all drawing enthusiasts thanks to its tools which offer limitless possibilities Your creations are only restricted by the boundaries of your imagination Typographic conventions In order to simplify understanding of the techniques described this user guide uses the following typographic conventions Italics the names of menus buttons tabs windows commands tools all elements referring to one of the objects present in the program are written in italics key designates a keyboard shortcuts key1 key2 designates a key combination Keep the first key pressed and then press the second key left click right click LMB RMB these shortcuts refer to a click on the left or right mouse button As you are advancing in the guidebook you will encounter the following symbols ey TIP A symbol representing a light bulb indicates tips and hints for using the program Remark A symbol representing a warning sign emphasises information that requires particular attention and indicates an important comment Reminder The reminder symbol characterises any information the explication of which was already given in the guide book Table of Contents Lesson 00 Introduction and typographic conventions Lesson 01 First approach of TVPaint Animation Pro
229. ew to play it as well as possible regarding the playback frame rate of your project The temp drive is the drive containing the temp folder that can be chosen in the preference panel See lesson 1 You can use the test button to determine the data transfert rate of your temp drive The quality ratio will be reduced if you decrease the data rate value i It is not advised to set a higher value than the one TVPaint Animation Pro computes when you click on the Test button If you do so the quality ratio will be increased but the sequence won t be played fluently anymore The Show TC button is used to display the time code during pre viewing The Play all button forces the program to display all fields and images during viewing even if this affects the display rate of the chosen images The Flip Book text field enables adjustment of the number of seconds to play on either side of the current image when the Flip button is pressed in the project window see page 6 The CutBrush tool options TOOGE e com 7 Ifyou select one of the four brush creation icons in the main panel the Smosh 0 Cut Brush panel appears in place of the tool panel A iasing kaap Opin p Cigplay al You may Create a brush by deleting at the same time the area in which it is located on the screen Cut option in the popup menu Smooth the cut brush see lesson 3 smooth the contours of a surface With the Keep option you may ke
230. factor of 2 the points are linked by incoming arcs From left to right Form factors 2 1 0 5 and 0 You may modify the Angle of your lens flares ae E ee a From left to right E z O gt Oo o C 0 15 30 45 60 be given its own Blades mode different from the Global blades mode described above The latter is located at the bottom of the generic Lens Flare parameters and offers the same options pO When required each Lens Flare of the generic type may a The effects of the Rendering group 16 5 The Rendering gt Lens Flare effect e Streak type Lens Flares wo Lons Flare Soi 2 4 z P Even if the Lens Flares of the Streaks type offer a sien 100 a ja T r completely different effect than the Generic lens onset 0 4 aid cl b Flares see examples below the parameters are nonetheless quite similar Taah You may therefore set the Size Offset Color s and Profile in the same way as described on the previous pages Yo CnlorMede Golo Gal r Aipha 755 Profile There are however several specific options angie ooo ef which we will now take a closer look at Rotation paf l Spokes Su d ce b i i a Ratatar f Minin E de fi Noise 0 5 4 ye p d ity lf F ull Hide MUD Preview w Apply FH SIAE ooo The Angle and Rotation parameters are used to rotate light interference effects oppos
231. g a i k ee Warr i 2 Brightness 75 Original image BS Brightness 75 The effects of the Color and Keying groups 11 3 The effects in the Color menu The Contrast parameter if increased will accentuate the luminosity differences between the light and dark areas When decreased it will reduce them A setting close to 100 will only make the primary colors appear as well as black and white A setting close to 100 will make the image or footage almost entirely gray ARN Contrast 75 Original image Contrast 75 The Saturation parameter accentuates or reduces color vivacity A setting close to 100 will reduce the number of pixels close to the gray colors while reviving the colors a setting close to 100 will produce a gray drawing oe ete j rae A Sy ia Ty i mt rs Ty Rise a weiss Piel eo nome ee fr a ioe Vek Poe a ae s A Us Wap a na Ves Kok ti s Saturation 75 g Original ir image Saturation 75 The Gamma setting is often used for photo touch up but also enables lightening or darkening an image without leaving the impression that a dark or light sheen was placed over it Its value may vary between 0 01 and 5 ah Sas ae et engine image EEr At first sight the Gamma parameter seems to have the same effects as the Brightness parameter This is true with the difference that the Brightness parameter affects all pixels on the screen whereas the Gamm
232. ge Y However they do not modify the videos photos and images themselves Your will find them all in the View main menu o These zoom options are available to make your task easier when working in detail Your project displays are anti aliased when zooming out 20 25 33 or 50 of the original project size This very useful for people who works in very high resolution for exemple the HDTV format In lesson 1 we learned that it is possible to work with several projects at the same time It is also possible to open several project windows for the same project You may use the M key of the keyboard or select New project window in the View main menu to do this This is recommended when working with large zoom values and to keep an eye on the entire project modification made in one of the windows results in the same modification being made in all the other windows of the same project a Note that in this case any y The button of your project window also offers you several very useful viewing options depending on whether you use it with the left button of your mouse or the right button A left click without releasing the mouse button followed by sliding the mouse moves the image in the same way as the sliders located next to it A right click without releasing the mouse button may be used to slide the current layer and only this layer to quickly view the enabled layer see next les
233. ge of the cloud layer and slide the mouse to the right before releasing the button You have now moved your layer in time Do the same with the sun layer In the screenshot below the cloud layer will only be shown starting from the tenth image of the animation and the sun layer starting from the fourth image tz The range in number of frames or in seconds if you are in TimeCode W ON display mode located at the top of the timeline offers a global identification system enabling location of each layer in relation to the others within the current project The ranges under the frames of a layer in number of frames or Time Code only refer to these layers 4 10 Temporal management of layers More details More details Show hide the icons It is possible to show or hide the icons of an animation layer in the timeline You will find this option in the contextual menu of the animation layer the first and last image are however always displayed Similarities with mage layers Many of the details regarding the image layers discussed in lesson 3 are also valid for the animation layers locking duplication reduction of layers as well as assigning a color work exactly in the same way for the animation layers The reference images for the masks are those located in the same temporal position as your current image The Auto Fit option in the timeline When using a very long animation layer it may
234. ge on the screen contains the more dense the graph is to the left this is the case for our red planet The more light pixels the image on the screen contains the more the graph is concentrated on the right this is the case for the image of the tree For a luminosity value given in the abscissa the graph proportionally represents the quantity of pixels of the image having this luminosity value on the ordinates axis The blue curve represents the percentage of pixels having at least attained the luminosity value in the abscissa the vertical red line represents the pixels the luminosity of which is the most represented on the screen and image analysis is reduced to the channels of the corresponding colors O The tabs Red Green Blue and Alpha work according to the same principle The second function of the histogram as you may have guessed already is to modify the color properties of the image or video of the current layer here again the animation keys lock the parameters for a given position in the timeline 11 8 The effects of the Color and Keying groups The effects in the Color menu To do this we have to use the slider system of the histogram You may use two three or four of them The latter enable re calibration of the histogram by stretching or contracting it Let s again take a look at the pixel luminosity component Below you see the example of luminosity modification using the three sliders Points
235. ght ratio p O aa ame s l after cropping The steps to create animated graphics 6 3 Working with hand made drawings Clean up the sequence Once the drawing has been scanned it is possible to Delete white or gray pixels to imitate the use of a true animation overlay this operation is necessary for later coloring as well as for use with a background zoom Those who have worked with earlier TVPaint D veloppement software packages use the Lumakey effect followed by one of the color effects to remove the light gray aspect of the semi transparent pixels New users will no doubt prefer the new Scan cleaner effect specially designed to accomplish the two aforementioned operations in a few clicks even the veterans should give it a go To use this function simply open the FX stack discussed in lesson 9 and add the Color gt Scan Cleaner effect Once all drawings have been scanned many users wish to delete add or duplicate images Sometimes they also have to transfer complete images or layers from one project to another It is this traditional and yet vital aspect that we will now examine in more detail Flip an image It is possible to flip your images around the horizontal vertical or both axes Original image Horizontal flip Vertical flip Horizontal and Vertical flip To do this simply use the main menu options Image gt Modify gt Flip Horizontally Vertically or Both an image or
236. ghts menu may be used to create one or several lighting effects among the following categories Spot Omni and Ambient As soon as a lighting effect is created you may duplicate delete or rename it The Lights menu displays the name of the light whose parameters are shown in the stack If you work with several lights you may go from one to the other by selecting their names in the Lights menu Here an overview of the different lighting types Ambient lighting lights up the scene globally in the color of your choice Values under 100 will darken the image values higher than 100 will brighten it Omni lighting lights up a circular area of your choice similar to a projector located on an axis perpendicular to the image The parameters to be set are color lighting intensity center and radius of the circular area as well as altitude of the virtual projector Working with the FX stack 9 11 More details about the FX stack rs Oro 1 4 Omni projector diagram Omni HUD Omni lighting Spot lighting lights up the image similar to a tilted projector Two position parameters are available for this mode which allow you to adjust the position of the light source as well as its direction Saat spot ore Spot projector diagram Spot HUD Spot lighting tie many of the parameters described above the settings may be made A amp A directly on the screen don t forget to display the HUD Spot and Omni lighting ha
237. gt Chroma Keyer effect will help us to obtain better results The Tint parameter bar will make transparent the blue pixels in a wide range light blue or dark blue will not change change the result The orange red pixels of the flowers and the green pixels of the stalk will stay unchanged The effects of the Color and Keying groups 11 15 The effects of the Keying menu The Saturation parameter bar permits to make green pixels more or less transparent depending on their saturation As a consequence we will be able to make transparent all the blue gray pixels Here is the result we finally succeed to keep the the pixels of the flowers visible and made the pixels of the shutter transparent To finish our work we can easily add a landscape on a layer and put it behind the flowers layer see the timeline below Wide Let s go back to our blue screened character Although we used the Keying gt Color Keyer effect with the our blue screened character in the last chapter you certainly guess that it is also possible to use the Keying gt Chroma Keyer effect When characters are shot with blue screen there are sometimes some undesired light effects especially little blue reflections colorizing some part of the image see image below on the left It is of course possible to remove the blue tint to these pixels by making them grey That s the function of sliders and buttons from the Spill Removal section of t
238. hape Settings Connection Settings Display Settings Video Grabber Preview Settings _arbre tp v planete tvp _palette typ Working in fullscreen mode It is also possible to work in Fullscreen mode by simply pressing the V key on your keyboard or by clicking on the toolbar icon indicated below When in Fullscreen mode the keys of the numeric keypad may be used to move your project on the screen In fullscreen mode the F12 key allows to hide all the tool panels Here again the Tab key is used to switch from one project to another To return to windows mode simply press the V key or the icon above again these options are also accessible via the View main menu Close a project A project may be closed in four ways Use the E buttons at the top of your project window Use the fourth button from the left on the toolbar Use the File gt Close project main menu Use the keyboard shortcut Shift W Projet modification done since the In order to avoid any mistakes a confirmation last save will be lost message will appear see opposite Are vou sure you wantto clase the project The Help main menu Each menu proposes specific options At this stage we will take a closer look at the Help menu InLine support At any time a help function referred to as nLine help is available in TVPaint Animation Pro Move the cursor over the icon for which you wish to obtain information without cl
239. he corresponding field of the Filling Shape panel and enables precise definition of the opacity and transparency areas when applying a filled shape You may trace the spline of your choice on the X and Y axes by placing points at your convenience Three types of interpolation are available to connect the points with each other Linear Spline or Polynomial In accordance with your settings a new opacity mapping will be defined The two red splines define the opacity of each point of the card as indicated in the dotted example The File popup menu enables saving loading or resetting the opacity mapping As required you may swap the two splines corresponding to the X axis and Y axis of the mapping Swap button or flip each spline vertically or horizontally Flip X and Flip Y buttons The Copy button is used to copy the current spline the one that has a point selected thus yellow on the other axis On the image above the current spline is the Y spline At the bottom left of the window pre defined opacity mapping are at your disposal You may also adjust the mapping by clicking on the image and sliding the mouse Here again you have pre defined parameters at your disposal Press the T and 4 buttons at the bottom left of the panel then click on the pre defined mapping of your choice 3 16 Layers spatial management Further details The icons at the bottom of the window have a special function They enable y
240. he Distortion gt Perspective 4 points effect This effect is constructed in the same way as the Perspective tool from the main panel except that the position of each point can be moved along a stored path Source Image Current Image Result after applying the stack The Position tab allow you to manage the coordinates of the four points used for this effect the four corners of the H U D The Render tab permit to select the type of image called Source Image which will be put in perspective current layer FX Stack other project brush etc lesson this effect can wrap a video sequence or a picture onto a moving shape This could be the case if the cameraman was moving his recorder while filming the computer screen above oN Associated with the Pixel Tracker this option will be explained in details in the next fa Here below a shadow was created for our character The two effects Color gt Source Image and Stylize gt Drop Shadow were used in order to have the shadow drawn on an empty layer go back to the last chapters of the last lesson for more details This shadow was put into perspective thanks to our effect We succed to imitate the projection of a shadow on the floor ee ER wf Pompectie 4 Panis Prog Prete Passion Render Toi Valo p Lint Ya fe Jej Tojs j Yafo e P3 Lireat F A aja LEI 0 J Toole Yafo pg D a E Drop Enadow Progass Pr
241. he area of pixels inside the B spline will become transparent Normal Opacity 100 4 rwar 7 Spline Daphin z Al ALALALANA Al With the invert button checked The effects of the Rendering group 16 15 The Rendering gt RotoTracking effect es Cpacity 100 o Show HUD First opacity parameters set to 50 Second opacity parameters set to 50 e Let s now study the icons under the spline popup menu Position ne o Balle an q i From left to right A The first icon allows you to place the control points of your B spline at your convenience This icon is selected by default each time you create a new B spline You only have to use the left mouse button on the project window to lay your control points Once a control point is created the point menu displays its number and its coordinates see below Points Point 04 clb eosition FER v x afiges o 4 iili gt gt on Foals y aliens o l pO If you need to re open a closed B spline you only have to select the icon B again A This second icon allows to move a control point interactively on the project window don t forget to display the HUD To do this just click and drag the control point This may also be done by using the numeric fields and associated mini sliders shown above It is also possible to move several points at the same time To do this simply use your lef
242. he main panel or via the Window main menu It puts at your disposal several ranges of color derived from the current A color Some luminosity variations based on the A color fot a EERE Some saturation variations based on the A color AANA Some chromatic variations based on the A color 11 The Step option allows to adjust the chromatic l J variation aN If the Lock button is not checked the color boxes are automatically refreshed if you change the A color A simple click on a color of the Color Variation panel will change the A color into the one you have chosen If the ock button is checked the color boxes will stay the same whatever you do Drawing splines segments and circles a This icon on the main panel enables the FreeHandDots tool S This icon enables the FreeHandLine tool for continuous lines PA This icon is used to trace Straight Lines To draw a segment in your project window Left click on the first end of the segment Keep the button pressed while sliding the mouse Release the button when you reach the second end of the segment m At the beginning of this lesson we learned how to draw a Rectangle Ol This icon is used to draw Circles and Ellipses In the current project window point your stylus to the center of the ellipse to be drawn then move it to create the ellipse you desire Press the Shift key first to obtain a perfect circle Drawing basics 2 11 Further de
243. he panel The Keying gt Alpha Control effect Let s take back the example of our flowers The Keying gt Chroma Keyer has been already applied and the landscape background is visible behind the flowers If you look at it in detail you will see 11 16 The effects of the Color and Keying groups The effects of the Keying menu that some imperfections remain a black borderline more or less visible is still remaining small lines or points are not fully transparent and stand out from white clouds The Alpha Control effect can fix these errors al w F aipha Gontro Here is how the effect appears in the FX Stack Pr g Profiles Points 3 cogi a You can first notice the presence of a histogram a tool you are now familiar with This one represents the quantity of pixels displayed on screen depending on their luma in percentage r In the bottom of the panel there are some numeric fields and mini sliders at your disposal Erodi 0 4F e iej gt Blur vwd U ol b The Shrink parameter can trim the opaque pixels of the image That is the best to remove the black borders around the flowers The Erode parameter erase progressively the opaque pixels of the image by starting from its borders It permits to soften the transition between transparent pixels and opaque ones and even to improve the superimposition effect Both Blur parameters can reduce and soften the shapes borders be
244. he stylus pressure Smoke Size of the brush chosen in Random mode Opacity connected to Fade Ink Luma stamp mode with A and B colors of your choice Size connected to stylus Azimuth Angle chosen in Random mode An animbrush using the Add mode can be applied directly on an empty layer and can be also shifted thanks to the shift option see lesson 4 It could give very good result if you need to use some Oilbrush or Watercolor How to use the brush modes As explained in lesson 4 it is possible to use the brush modes to modify their colors This is very useful to create your own drawing tools In the example below the A color is red and the B color is Yellow Color mode Alpha Stamp mode Luma Stamp mode Invert Luma Mode Hue Stamp mode 7 18 Other TVPaint Animation Pro drawing tools To perfectly master the drawing tools The brush modes Stamp Alpha and Stamp Alpha Max Thanks to the simple brush below it is possible to create a powerful drawing tool We used the jitter and rotation parameters and connections to obtain better results However some overlappings can become visible during your drawings For example if you go several time on the same place with your stylus The Stamp Alpha Max mode records the maximum opacity value of your brush pixels and uses it as a a limit not to be exceeded during the drawing a C i S l l ann c oms Ja In other words
245. he wrapping grid is an extremely useful animation tool and is capable of distorting the images in time according to the criteria of your choice The Wrapping grid effect when correctly used can produce quite spectacular results wave movement 3D rotation of faces movement of hair blowing in the wind etc below you will find a summary overview of the possibilities proposed aie Boss Fa T n E i 1 image project skull tvp Last image Once the effect has been placed in the FX stack a grid is displayed on the current image some hints for beginners The use of two grids will be necessary for your effects to work correctly these grids are referred to as Source and Destination grids The Display popup menu is used to select on which of the two grids you intend to work Depending on your choice the HUD will be modified accordingly the letter S appears when the source grid is displayed and the letter D appears if the destination grid is displayed Intersections in the Source grid Intersections in the Destination grid In the HUD when the source grid is displayed the destination grid is always visible behind in a less bright color When the destination is displayed the opposite case applies see next page The effects of the Distortion group 13 11 The Distortion gt Wrapping Grid effect Display of Source and Destination grids the current grid is green the other is blue Modificat
246. hen the program is over you often see the signature Position m a diit of the speaker s displayed on the screen Draw oF S ue P It is possible to reproduce this effect in TVPaint Animation Pro using the effect Paint gt AutoPaint Have you ever watched a weather report Tablet Lite Pressure p a eldejp This is the perfect way to dynamically sign your future yee Mainu he animated works of art Wee Finger wviasi ri 0 Siroke Mornial Top Hido HUD Pruvvicres Apph Ex Sack First you have to record the stroke which corresponds to the signature go onto an empty animation layer click on the Record a stroke button in the AutoPaint effect and then draw your signature on the screen When this is done click on the Sfop button or press the Escape key You have now recorded the signature in the program memory A long series of keys is visible in the timeline see below aL Untitled a 40 Su Untitled 1 1 gt Auto Paint T i THR 0 RHE HHHH PEER A HEH HHH Sound Coor v Frame Ji A Delete the current image on the screen i e the signature Select the tool of your choice and adjust its parameters for the future stroke of the signature Stretch your animation layer so that it covers all keys of the timeline Select all its images and then apply the FX stack When you play the project you will note that the sign
247. her keying effects more complex which have to be used in some specific situations 11 14 The effects of the Color and Keying groups The effects of the Keying menu The Keying gt Chroma Keyer effect The Keying gt Chroma Keyer effect is used to make pixel transparent depending on their tint and saturation Aud Fs E Chron kiir Progress Profle Display Rasid bl coor Add lolerance Sub Gotiness Sub EM iF 5g a T T j E za J fay i 266 ae o r F Spit Attra Add Polerance Sub Cmar M hag cotmess Subj The panel and the buttons of this effect look very similar to the ones of the effect Color gt Color Eraser That s why we will not explain each parameters in details Let s take for example the video sequence above with orange and red flowers The background of this sequence is a blue gray shutter more or less dark blue gray tints If you use the Keying gt Color Keyer effect by selecting one of the dark shutter colors it will not remove all the shutter pixels but it will remove some pixels of the flower s stalk too see below 1 If you use the Keying gt Color Keyer effect by selecting one of the light shutter colors it will remove all the pixels of the shutter but it will remove the light pixels of the flower s too see below 2 2 The results above obtained after the use of the Keying gt Color Keyer effect are imperfect The Keying
248. hereafter the advantage of TVPaint Animation Pro resides in the fact that it is possible to superpose several rolls for example one with a background scenery another with a character and another with a Merge foreground scenery It is possible to create animation layers using the New menu in the timeline 4 2 Temporal management of layers Animation layers ie Sheet Propects T aiai H F Ne i hargi AED Fil 3 Layer irage _ ae E a Layer Anim bi n afer Po No Roumi es T f tow f j P An animation layer is represented by an icon in the timeline An image layer only has a gray icon see encircled area shown opposite A ol Check Frame i Jele ne XSrast Proetct H S Mew viage Aor Y Gi clouds l A oe HEC house AnA Ae ksn fal ua _ alo ores fal inns sy moks fall tone l 7 P He Saimi l Check t Frame 1 rf Add images image Emacts View winde Now Laver Image Now Lavon Anim Now Aono Coyor Duplicate Layor Mew Laver From Curren image Rename Layer Delele Layer Align Len Align Right Ingertimages Beina Current triage leer magis Aller Current Image Cuplicale image Deleie image Insert Exposure Remore Exposure Feniove all Exposures Goto Prev instance B Create an animation layer and name it cloud Place it in front of all the others You then have the timeline sho
249. herefore change the yellow hues only a little The Unsaturate mode will modify them according to different shades of gray Penbrush tool in Saturate mode Penbrush tool in Unsaturate mode 1 2 Other TVPaint Animation Pro drawing tools The others drawing modes The Smooth and Sharp drawing modes The Smooth mode attenuates the contours of elements in the image and creates a blurred effect while the Sharp mode will accentuate them The Colorize and Tint drawing modes These two modes modify the color of the pixels The Colorize mode adds the A color while respecting the pixel luminosity of the source image The Tint mode also adds the A color but respects the saturation as well as the luminosity The more a pixel is close to a gray white or black color with all the shades they contain the less effect the color change will have This is visible in the drawing areas corresponding to the cloud they are less affected by the Tint than by the Colorize mode Here the A color is red R 255 G 0 B 0 Other TVPaint Animation Pro drawing tools 1 3 The others drawing modes The Negative and Solarize drawing modes The Negative mode inverses the value of the pixels in the source image the yellow of the sun becomes blue the black text becomes white etc The Solarize mode gives a slightly different result than the Negative mode It mixes the negative of the source image with the source image itself and thus imita
250. ic drawing habits Please refer to the end of lesson 4 in order to learn how to cut your own animbrushes and as a consequence create your own drawing tools Once you grab a tool with or without its colors the current paper the parameters and the connection profiles are taken into account It is then possible to create and store more realistic drawing tools Furthermore you are also free to create new panels for each type of tool and to save your favorite brushes which are easily identifiable A right click on the icon opposite of the Tool Bar allows to choose the custom panels which you want to be displayed It also allows to display and load new custom panels A lot of thematic custom panels manga pixel art chinese brush are available in the Contents Sharing section of our online forum http www tvpaint com forum saved In other words if you decide to save a custom panel only the brushes and their settings will be saved on your harddrive This doesn t matter if you used the papers that are given by default with the software However if you have created and used your own papers you will have to save and load them separately Your custom papers are located in the Papers sub directory of your configuration Here is the path for Mac and PC users C Documents and Settings your_name Application Data TVpaint your_config_name Home Directory Library tvpaint animation your_config_name Be ca
251. ich reduce this fastidious process to a few seconds the Animation keys Working with animation keys It is possible to set the parameters for our fade effect to 0 for the first image in our layer then to 100 for the last In this way TVPaint Animation Pro takes charge of calculating the progress of the effect on the intermediate frames This is what we refer to as working with Animation keys Once this concept is understood you will no longer work frame by frame Proceed in this way for our current project Go onto the first image of the house animation layer Set the effect to 0 f then click on the button shown opposite _ A symbol appears in the timeline see opposite under the first image Working with the FX stack 9 5 Working with animation keys The name of the Fade effect is written to the left of the timeline The Fade effect is now set to a value of 0 for the first frame of the timeline At this stage application of the FX stack has no animation effect Indeed the value of this key will be repeated for all frames after this one It is necessary to create a second key before applying the FX stack in order to obtain an animation effect Go on the last image of the house animation layer create a key using the button of the FX stack You may now immediately set the effect to 100 In this case it is not necessary to click on the button C as before and the key rep
252. ich the character whose movement you wish to follow or any other element is located Two time or frame markers determine the section of the layer that will be taken into account for pixel tracking the entire layer by default In the second section you must define a focus area within the current image The Pixel Tracker will try to find this in the following images of your video in order to create a path To follow a human face i e to create a path from the face the eye is often used to define the focus area The values Ref X and Ref Y are used to choose the center of this focus area and the values Ref W and Ref H to set its width and height The parameters Track Wand Track H will limit search in the focus area to the number of pixels in length and height of your choice around the focus area of the first image see diagram below Ref W e Track W When the pixel tracker tool passes from one image to another it will memorize the focus area of the first image and try to find it in the next image in the tracking area Ref H Track H pu E ITAA This enables creation of the position keys necessary for Ee ee i path creati on a If HUD display is enabled after having clicked on the Set tracker button you a may modify these parameters directly with the following combination Ctri right click slide the mouse or Ctrl left click slide the mouse If for example you select the right eye of our blue scre
253. icking on it and a brief description of the icon you are pointing at will appear together with any associated keyboard shortcut First approach of TVPaint Animation Pro 1 9 The Help main menu Opposite you will find the description corresponding to the Floodfill tool If you wish to reduce the content of the InLine help or a Se ion mouse baton to prevent it from appearing on the screen entirely the BE display a realtime previuw COFresponding options are available in the Help menu 291 atthe area to be filled Keyboard shortcut F The About window ae This section provides information about the program name of developers beta testers date of creation serial and license number copyrights The Check for Updates option This option allows to check directly on the TVPaint Developpement website if there is an update for your software If your version is outdated you will be allowed to download the lastest version Lock and Unlock codes are needed to perform this operation To quit the program We will now quit the program To do this you may Click on the Close button at the top of the screen LAI PC or a Mac Select main menu File gt Quit Use the keyboard shortcut Shift Q _ l sssseppgppppale Projet modification done since the j l i i last save will be lost The confirmation window opposite then appears Are vou sure you wantto clase the project Save
254. ide the latter Now let s take a look at the timeline As soon as an animation key is created a left click on the Center Blur triangle in the Timeline below displays the name of the parameter which have been set with the animation key To the right of the parameter names corresponding key lines will be displayed as you create your keys It is possible to create animation keys for each parameter for the image of your choice along the timeline 9 8 Working with the FX stack Working with animation keys Ole pehini Ti me L a ae means that the parameters may progress in time independently of each other For example the power of the centered blur may decrease slowly while its radius may increase rapidly all at different times Thanks to several keys the parameters can be adjusted in time This is the case for the Center parameter in the timeline above three animation keys are placed on the key line associated with the Center parameter Below the effect produced using these three keys e E E F E tia ia E n The first key line in the timeline has the name of the effect in the stack and displays all its keys The path When position parameters progress in time there must be a path taken by the parameter in question For example three animation keys were created at the images 1 6 and 30 for the Center parameter above The center of the Center blur
255. igned points in the drawing In the second popup menu you can modify the nature of the splines you will draw using the Spline tool studied previously You may choose to o draw Bezier splines multi point splines o draw three point splines To draw a three point spline in your project window o left click on the first end of the spline o keep the button pressed while sliding the mouse o release the button when reaching the second end of the spline o Slide the mouse o left click when satisfied with the spline The section named Panto enables adjusting the vector of the Panto mode studied in the following sub chapter The Panto drawing mode The Panto mode is used to reproduce by translation of the vector of the X Y coordinates all sections of the layer the X Y values being those present in the Shape settings panel Ay keyboard shortcut Shift P of the Shape setting panel tracing a segment on the o It is possible to interactively define the X Y values using the Adjust button screen will determine the X and Y values E g for X 360 and Y 238 you will obtain after having used the penbrush to draw a line at the height of the sun in the final image corresponding to the diagram below A coordinate of he yecior L U ran Guiry RP WIE se ho HA EK JG Ge Gul Here are the steps to use the panto mode correctly 1 first use the RMB on main panel
256. imation Pro How to use the plug ins Asound should ring out as soon as the picture as been transmitted see previous page Here are some useful tips To preview the next to shoot image low res finder preview over your last grabbed frame Enable the V button of the project window Change the mix parameter value It is a percentage of visibility between the video and current frame see below Pato a ee buh ohio sfisis s a en san dapiay Wii ioo on TF It is advised to use the effects A Key gt ChromakKeyer to delete the colored background behind your characters Rendered gt Healing Tracker to remove all the small imperfections of your images You can also shoot an empty background and put it as image layer behind the current animation layer After this operation you should be able thanks to the erase drawing mode to remove all the crutches wedges wires that you used If you want to grab a picture inside an existing sequence of images Begin by selecting the image that you want to change in the timeline Enable the display with video parameter Change the Mix parameter value in order to compare the existing image with the camera preview Once you are satisfied click on the Grab Input button The grabbed image is then replacing the selected image The advanced functions of TV Pain
257. imations Presentation and concept Presentation and concept Let s take the following elements into consideration fog smoke fireworks snow fountains sunshine a tennis ball bouncing off the ground These natural phenomena and other objects taken from daily life don t seem to have anything in common except maybe that a lot of time is required to make a successful and correct animation of them Let s study them more closely Fog and fountain are made of fine water droplets they are suspended in the air and more or less opaque in the case of the fog they are projected into the air by a source and fall back with the force of gravity in the case of the fountain Sun and fireworks are respectively composed of helium hydrogen and various chemical products The latter are concentrated in a ball for the sun or expelled into the atmosphere in the case of fireworks Smoke is also composed of various chemical products generating different types of smoke As it is very light it is not subject to the force of gravity and moves with the wind The tennis ball however bounces several times before coming to a standstill and the wind has little influence on it In each case we deal with particles in the broader sense of the word water droplets chemical products tennis ball etc These particles move and are affected by the force of gravity the power of wind or air resistance etc They may bounce or come from several places at
258. ime file numbered frames sequence etc You will find this very practical as you are able to save your work in smaller files This option is present in the File main menu Once selected the following panel appears ghar Proect Layers Cam RIEA Pioi Untied dies a Pees peel 1 000 Height H2 Field Frograssho Tiie Pate op ConvatProjectio eiom Procoree Proportion wr Wama 431 di Height 212 a Frare Aale 3u mu Pial AapectRana 1 m0 ey Fa Pogisa fackgraune pr Cored Aspect Siraich 0 Frame Rate er Tine ir arpolatina fo j ipa mm MM Its layout should be familiar to you You may choose to export an image or image sequence from your project while retaining the layers or current brush possibly animated These three possibilities are mutually exclusive To export the project image A box on the top left hand side is the first section of this tab and provides information relative to the current project The second section deals with the export file format TVPaint Animation Pro allows you to export your projects in a wide variety of formats DIP AVI GIF QUICKTIME FLI PNG PCX SUNRASTER PSD TGA JPG ILBM TIFF FLYER CLIP D1 RTV CINEON SGI SOFTIMAGE VPB Each format has its own features which are explained in an appendix Some are configurable for example AVI format others are not Video Codes LOCE LVN When the export file format impose
259. in a script without declaring that the variable MyNumber is numeric or the variable Answer boolean MyNumber 10 Answer false The advanced functions of TV Paint Animation Pro 18 17 How to use the George scripting language A As for commands and instructions the George language sees no difference Q between uppercase and lowercase letters For instance MyNumber mynumber MYNUMBER MyNuMbEr are all exactly the same variable The George language use a few reserved variables in order to work correctly You AN can use them as you wish but it is not advised to modify them That is the case with the two variables Time and Result encountered in the clock grg script above which contains respectively the current time and the control results of the last used George command The operators at your disposal Op rateurs Arithm tiques negative exponent multiplication division addition subtraction Op rateurs Logiques amp amp et Il ou exclusif Operateurs Apparentes equal not equal to greather than greather or equal than less than less or equal than The operator is an assignment operator and allows to assign a given value to the variable of your choice For example Examples 18 gt 18 18 3 18 18 18 5832 18 3 54 18 3 6 18 3 21 18 6 12 Examples a amp amp b allb Examples x x 5 x gt 4 X gt 3
260. in front of our projector The white background is used like a white light projector The image finally obtained is referred to as a composite image composed of several images In the case of our house and cloud it is possible to spread the house and sun as fixed backgrounds or immobile backgrounds in time In other words one of the transparent rolls may be composed of identical images The procedure is simple Temporal management of layers 4 5 Animation layers ime Lind 4SAer Prapects gt yi pa p H S New oF Merge rlaAutort iz SS e SSE aa ESE BO clouds js 7 i gt Ey al 100 e E oes p F ees E ss FE p oe T a E es E g T b rj i J s F a j4 mjolk Slo I E Yr moren lal os FO id molhos Fal ioe MEU T E ST Dolks fall tom Fi Po NoSound aee None viE Frame 1__ r Jale In the screenshot above we selected background none in order to have a better readability in the timeline Select one of the four image layers in the timeline and use the nsert frames option as described above Do the same with the other image layers then move within the timeline again this time scenery and moving cloud are still visible Play an animation Using the keyboard arrows to play an animation is not very practical You have certainly noticed already the most suitable opti
261. in your projects However you are of course free to modify these colors as you wish o The first popup menu allows you to select the element for which you wish to modify the color buttons text selected sliders etc o Next to this field you will find a square box indicating the display color of the interface element selected Simply click on this bx and then select any color on the screen to be assigned to this element o The Color scheme popup menu is used to quickly select a set of predefined colors or the default color scheme for this interface The Highlight mini slider the Border and Mirror options allows to have a new gradient look D Background Sa on v Default v Color scheme Custom v Color scheme cc as Color se schere Booo d Highlight d Highlight d Highlight Border Border Border Miror Miror miror _Apply Reset Apply Reset Lappy Reset Color scheme 50 Highlight T Border v Mirar The Save and Load options allows to share the interface settings The Reset button is used to return to the colors present when your configuration was loaded The Apply button applies the colors selected to your current interface 1 14 First approach of TVPaint Animation Pro The Preferences panel The second section allows you to choose the Style of your cursor The different possibilities are cross arrow point or circle as illustrated opposite
262. ing on a colored background see perspective diagrams above What we will refer to as Image layer in all future lessons is the equivalent of a transparent glass plate placed on a colored background of your choice You are drawing on this plate and not on the colored background It is possible to change the color of the backgrounds Check and Color in the same way it is possible to recover a color on the screen thanks to the color fields next to the menu 2 4 Drawing basics Your first drawing Zoom and View options ae eee M SADO 2 1 KEES GS Fi Stay in check mode we will zoom in on the sun i a E A y mu 2 Bey 100 00 a po To adjust the zoom you can Use the small and icons above as well as the mini sliders Use the keyboard shortcuts lt and gt Adjust the zoom numerically by modifying the percentage in the text field intended for this purpose Use the Zoom button on the main panel once enabled this button may be used to increase or decrease the zoom at an exact point of the current image by simply left or right clicking with the mouse Note that there are other options in the project window which may facilitate your task The button 1 enables re initialization of the zoom to 100 A left click on the F button re aligns the image in the project window A right click on the F button extends the project window to display the entire ima
263. ing the corresponding effects Working with hand made drawings Scan and print your images You may choose to create the images for your future cartoon either traditionally on paper with PEG holes see below or more directly in TVPaint Animation Pro TVPaint Animation Pro works with Twain standard scanners in Windows The File gt Twain gt Select option is used to choose the scanner you intend using The File gt Twain gt Acquire option displays the Twain interface of you scanner in order to begin working with the latter On Mac OS X TVPaint Animation Pro works with ICA standard scanners Use the File gt ICA gt Acquire option to display the acquisition interface In this way when you scan a set of images you may either import these images directly after the current animation layer or in a new animation layer or simply in a new project no Renee Projects 4 S Now mat go oF Auto Fit zz La i jy HE a je aller 100 ee E a m Ei E m Fn Ei m m 16 18 20 ai 24 26 at Sand Color color M Frannie m F l Inversely it is also possible to print the content of an animation layer The File gt Configure printer option displays the options available on your printer The File gt Print option opens a new window At the top of this window you will find the name of your printer The Setup button displays the options available on your printer 6 2 The steps to create animated graphics
264. ing the value 0 for the Rotation parameter A second key is placed at the last image of the layer locking the value 2 for the Rotation parameter When the FX stack is applied you see the following result I 1 I I I I I I I I 1 TYPant T Rant T Pant T Panr TP ler it ane T Rant T Rant T Pant T Parnr E The logo changes color in cycles going twice in a row through the colors of the color wheel The effects of the Color and Keying groups 11 5 The effects in the Color menu The Color gt Color eraser effect Let s assume that we want to delete the green and blue colors in our image This is easily done using the Color eraser effect composing the pixels and not modifying the opacity of the pixels In other words we unsaturate the pixels with a precise hue i By erasing the color we understand erasing the data relative to the color ARITE i E Prk we Ciir i heist Progett Pris Cesar Ramt d And TEHA Sub Coie sac pes a Adi Eariri Sun WSE Ha _ VS de Image with green and blue hues erased Original image a Start by selecting a color in the green area of the image in the Color box of the panel above Part of the green pixels will then be unsaturated and turn to gray To obtain a better finish you may increase or decrease the tolerance or softness thresholds To select the pixels according to their hues the color bar of the panel as well as
265. ion of an intersection in the Source and or Destination grid distorts the current image accordingly The image is distorted stretched or contracted over a narrower or wider area on the screen so that the points on the source grid of your initial image are moved to the same location as the points on the destination grid Below source and destination points on a grid with the resulting distortion oint source The Point menu is used to edit each grid point present on the screen The latter may be identified by their position on the grid see below Display Destination Points Point 03 03 z H 426 667 ab Soure Tas ih 4 0 ar x Destination Tools 7 The first two numeric fields are used to select the number of intersection points on your grids Source and Destination grids have the same number of intersections You may increase or decrease the height and or width of these grids 8 x 12 grid 4 x 4 grid 8 x 4 grid 13 12 The effects of the Distortion group The Distortion gt Wrapping Grid effect The five buttons H am Edit grid points Distort the grid as a whole Copy the source grid to the destination grid Copy the destination grid to the source grid Swap source and destination grids Sal Bs pS present in this panel are used respectively to When this option is enabled each intersection point of your grid source or destination grid may be moved in space al
266. ions for a PC and three for a MAC The first is used to select the HMI language At present the user may choose between French and English The second section is used to attribute keyboard shortcuts to almost all icons and menu options To create your own shortcuts click on the Configure button in the second section The window opposite then appears mm i FEF You have probably noticed that when the InLine help appears many tools options drawing modes etc already have associated keyboard shortcuts o The left hand column indicates all keyboard keys and key combinations with the associated functions when attributed The right hand column indicates all TVPaint Animation Pro functions which may be attributed to a keyboard shortcut o The Assign button is used to assign a function to a specific key or combination of keys in which case you will create a shortcut for this function The combination Ctrl Assign is used to add a function to a key The various functions will be executed in the order they were added o The Unassign button has the opposite effect in this case it deletes the shortcut o The File popup menu is used to save the keymap on your hard drive load an existing keymap clear the current keymap or reset the default keymap 1 12 First approach of TVPaint Animation Pro The Preferences panel The third section of the General tab is used to define a temp directory in which temporary TV
267. isplays the current image and the visible layers The display is automatically updated when you move throughout the timeline Below the preview window you Can view datas relating to the current project Name Size Frame Rate Pixel aspect Field city Size 800 x 600 Frame Rate 40 000 You can also add Dinah Aatent 1 000 comments to your project Field Progressio those comments are ce saved each time you save a project Add your comments he B O OOO 5 12 Handling TVPaint projects The projects panel On the right part of the tab the thumbnails of the opened loaded project are visible You can change the current project by clicking on the thumbnail of your choice For each thumbnails you can use The button allows to hide the corresponding project The El button allows to displays the corresponding project The 4 button allows to close the corresponding project A contextual menu is available for each thumbnail see below The options at your disposal are standard Activate Project Activate the current project ie ORE Ge Hide the current project KENALAN byt Hide the other loaded opened projects Clase Project Show all projects Movtity Project Close the current project iti bch aa Modify the current project Gave Project Duplicate the current project Sane Serer Save the current project Save the current project with an other name Export the cu
268. it remedies our overlapping Jaor c Ems e problem Senn m Anga c oor 1 Beppe 12 50 Crying our brush Anin Loga 7 mep 22 i dAn ak x z4 ent coe Je Pram opan fran ate TH Alpha mode Stamp Alpha Max mode AN The Shift parameter does not work with the Alpha et Alpha Max modes Other TVPaint Animation Pro drawing tools 7 19 To perfectly master the drawing tools The drawing tool panel Bin tab oo A amp E Two tabs are available for each drawing tool 4 Fa Z Ped 2 The Options tab you have already seen and the Bin tab Cult Tootione Bin Regardless of the tool you are using you may save the settings applied Sm ys Size Power Opacity Angle Profile Connections Gradient Mode etc in PEN 436 order to use them again later a 4 Right click on the Bin tab window to check whether any predefined settings exist and to use them or create new settings if you feel they are required be f Lu At this point we will study the Bin tab of the custom brush the same applies to all other tools ee Right click on the empty area of the Bin tab to Add Brush either Add the current brush to save it Get Brush or Get a brush of your choice to be saved Swap Brush In both cases a miniature of your brush appears under the tab Export Brush Delete Brush l pos The numbers next to the brushes indicate the number of animate
269. ite as a spare image main menu Edit gt Spare gt Copy to spare or shortcut Shift J r Delete it from the current layer standard delete tool f then TVPaint draw an ellipse with an opacity of 75 in its place The option Swap spare shortcut J returns the TVPaint logo to the screen and replaces the spare image with the ellipse Spare Using this function again will redefine the TVPaint logo as spare and will display the ellipse in the center of the window Depending on your selections in the popup menu the Spare mixer option offers the following results Current image Spare Sub Aipha T Apply Emar Appi titer Appiy Emar Appty titer Finally the option Delete spare is used to delete the spare image If you are working with several projects at the same time note that each project fN has its own spare image The Merge drawing mode is only available once a spare image has been defined It may only be used with theairbrush penbrush mechanical pencil pencil and wetbrush tools It is used to draw the portion of the spare image corresponding to the area traveled by your stylus on the screen The Impressionist drawing mode This drawing mode will be discussed in the Special brushes section of this lesson It also requires the use of a spare image Other TVPaint Animation Pro drawing tools 7 9 To perfectly master the drawing tools
270. ite from left to right the Spoke parameter with the values 200 50 and 20 The Minimum parameter is used to adjust the contrast between the spokes If this parameter is set to 0 maximum contrast is obtained If this parameter is set to 1 minimum contrast is obtained opposite from left to right with contrast values 1 0 5 and 0 The Noise parameter is used to adjust the sharpness of the spokes If this parameter is set to 0 the spokes are less sharp If this parameter is set to 1 the spokes are more sharp opposite from left to right with noise values 1 0 5 and 0 The Seed parameter is used to randomly vary the streaks layout 16 6 The effects of the Rendering group The Rendering gt Lens Flare effect 2 Combined use of several types of lens flares and light E interference applied to the same point in your project may create a very realistic effect Opposite you will see two generic lens flares and one streaked lens flare to create a sun surrounded by a light halo e Lens Flares of the Image type Lens Flare mage 2 _ vii ic size 100 4 oc Citset 10 4 jd ci S ure Cataatt Hening Mode Ana T An 0 00 ar oy Rotation ee dicit Rotation 0 aF amen Lens Flares of the Image type allow as the name implies selection of the image of your choice to create a lens flare This image referred to as source image may be a default imag
271. ith our work we will flip the two layers This is how it is done left click on the small frame representing the gray blob in the timeline then slide the cursor on the timeline until it is under the little man layer Release the mouse button N Ghum olor EF before flip no flip merge Little man layer Gray blob layer White background position of layers after flip We now have the configuration as shown in the diagram above In the current project window the little man is positioned on top of the gray blob When trying to flip two layers a frequent mistake made is to move one layer on_ top of another This is the process of merging two layers which will be described in detail later in this manual The case being click on Cancel in the merge options window to return to the original layer disposition 3 4 Layers spatial management Layers and timeline l POS The Undo option in the main menu may be used for the modifications made to the project as well as for those applied to the timeline Erase the contents of a layer It is possible to erase the contents of a layer without using the Erase mode To do this just click on the icon of the main panel opposite or use the shortcut Shift K This option has no effect on the layer named little man which is not our current layer Use of a Paper With TVPaint Animation Pro it is possible to accelerate drawing ce
272. ither square or slightly rectangular 1 16 First approach of TVPaint Animation Pro Some details Left pixel width pixel height x 2 The ratio is therefore 2 Right pixel width pixel height The ratio is 1 and the pixels are square The pixel aspect ratio has a value of 1 067 for the PAL format and a value of 0 9 for the NTSC format Avoid confusion between pixel aspect ratio and width height ratio of a video 4 3 f 16 9 The ratio is the width height ratio of the pixels Video fields Normally a video image is composed of two fields which alternate at a speed which is too fast for the human eye these fields are referred to as upper fields and lower fields A field is a vertical half resolution image which contains every other line of the image Interlacing of these fields is linked with the PAL SECAM and NTSC standards In PAL SECAM the upper fields appear first whereas in NTSC it is the lower field which appears first upper field N quick succession of the two fields lower field This framing technique even if twice as many images are required for the same video 50 instead of 25 images per second in PAL mode has been adopted in order to improve the quality of image movement and precision Taking advantage of the persistance of vision effect it also allows the user to work with lower resolutions The use of video formats with fields is possible in
273. itial frame we obtain the image shown opposite Only the Lighting effect is taken into account There is no Center Blur applied before it Swap two effects fad FX a zl ini Sara Genter Blur Progress Profile ener iiS Y coe Power io Radius b fr Lighting Progress Protte Lights Spul i Linear afem l iais afu 4 Deshnation Linoar gt se CE e Tools Y fioo e Ahitude fan e Radius 75 intencity 200 a Color Source Hide HUD App EA Sack Full l Preview of the FX stack above Preview l The effects contained in the stack are executed from bottom to top during preview or application There is a kind of chronological order for the effects The results may therefore vary if two effects are swapped In the left image below the FX stack applied is the one illustrated opposite The center blur is applied after lighting In the right image below the FX stack applied is the one illustrated on the previous page The center blur is applied before lighting Preview of the FX stack of the previous page Working with the FX stack 9 15 More details about the FX stack Add FX Options Bin F w a Center Blur FBIn Progress Profile Center Blur A left click on the right triangle above calls up a contextual menu which may be used to Create Key Delete Key Rename the current effect in the FX stack Create
274. ition variable at the end of the layer and place the TVPaint brush outside the current project as before but this time to the right As needed you may adjust the position of the movement key points using the numeric fields and mini sliders use the values shown opposite The X and Y fields represent the position of the brush center on the screen Playing your project in Preview mode allows you to check that your brush appears on the left of the screen and disappears to the right i Hi i The effects of the Motion and Paint groups management of the paths 14 9 The Motion gt Keyframer effect ee TE TWF oer A To create a path you may position a brush outside A S the area zone the brush then appears hidden and only its outline is visible as HUD see opposite Do not immediately apply the FX stack Did you notice the Z position numeric field This is used to set the depth of the object moved on the screen Let s now modify the second key we created enter the parameters for the following positions X 540 Y 240 Z 800 A fast slide along the timeline allows you to see that our logo moves from left to right but in addition to that zooms towards the viewer see below nt TvPaintl 2 TVS It is possible to generate even more subtle movements as our logo may follow the pre defined path of our choice thanks to the Path Recorder or Pixel Tracker You may also curve the paths thanks to the HUD
275. jectnew tv_projectselect tv_readprojectstring tv_oilbrush tv_ quit tv_rangeclear tv_rangegrab tv_rangenoise tv_rangeset tv_ratio tv_readuserstring tv_readtextfile tv_recorder tv_rect tv_rectfill tv_redo tv_reqangle tv_reaqfile tv_reqfloat tv_reqnum tv_reqstring tv_request tv_resetdisplay tv_resizepage tv_savebrush tv_savebrushanim tv_savedisplay tv_saveimage tv_savemode tv_savepalette tv_saveproject tv_savesequence tv_selectshapetool tv_serialnumber tv_setapen tv_setbpen tv_setcolor tv_setpalette tv_shadow tv_smooth tv_smoothdensity tv_smoothedge tv_spareadddensity tv_Sspareswap tv_sparetoback tv_sparetofront tv_specialbrush tv_speed tv_stacksavebin tv_stacksave tv_stackloadbin tv_stackload tv_stackexecutebin tv_stackexecute tv_stackopen tv_stackclose tv_stackapply tv_stackclear tv_startframe tv_strokepoint tv_strokesize tv_tcmode tv_textbrush tv_texttool tv_tornado tv_undo tv_updateundo tv_unlockcacheflush tv_unlockdisplay tv_unlockmouse tv_version tv_vfgetfont tv_vfstringsize tv_waitbutton tv_warn tv_warpbrush tv_wave tv_wetbrush tv_writepixel tv_writeuserstring tv_writeprojectstring tv_zdot tv_zline tv_zspline tv_getmouse tv_mosaic tv_sparecopy tv_getpalette tv_noise tv_sparekill tv_getpath tv_nop tv_sparesubdensity A 4 Appendix The main characteristics of the export formats The main characteristics of the export formats You can export projects from TVPaint Ani
276. keys they will then be displayed in yellow Copy Key cut copy paste keys a process already used for images and layers Paste Keys see lesson 6 When using animation keys The layer contextual menu offers the possibility to select the frames corresponding to the keyline The Auto Fit menu is used to adjust the zoom of the timeline in order to view the keys Contract stretch a key line In the previous lessons we learned how to contract or stretch an animation layer This is also possible for key lines see below 4 q F Stretch _ G E Contract A f required it is possible to move a key ee F POS from one place to another in the E timeline click and slide with the left mouse button 9 10 Working with the FX stack The path Use the selections When you make a selection on the screen and then apply an FX stack the latter is only applied to the selected area whether you apply the stack to one or several images makes no difference This is very useful when you apply your effect to a precise area in your image or animation More details about the FX stack A more complex effect the Rendering gt Lighting effect Ambient Rename mni Duplicate Spot Delete Ambient 2 Omni 3 Spot 4 This effect is used to light up the image or sequence of your choice as if using an exterior light source light projector By default nothing is present in the list The Li
277. kspace The button located in the project window is used to freely define an angle by left clicking and holding the button followed by a left right movement of the cursor You will see the workspace rotate in real time and you just release the button once the desired angle is obtained This free adjustment may also be carried out using the keys Ctrl Alt left click The free adjustment and its HUD in the form of a traditional drawing workspace Reset Rotate counter clockwise Rotate clockwise You may also right click on the same button which will open a menu E see opposite in which you have the possibility to 30 ce Reset the overall angle value keyboard shortcut Insert gg Rotate the view 15 keyboard shortcut Shift PageUp Rotate the view 15 ShifttPageDown manually define an angle value Set option or choose a pre defined angle among 15 values all multiples of 15 Note that Rotate 15 will always be rounded off to the prior next multiple of 15 For example if you work at first with an angle of 25 and then decide to tilt the project by 15 using Shift PageUp you obtain an angle of 30 and not 40 as 30 is the first multiple of 15 after 25 Drawing basics 2 9 Further details Management of palettes and mixers blue clouds The Mixer and Bin tabs in the color picker may be used to optimize your choice cyan_green_yellow of color Pe A right click under one
278. l value to the minimal value The vertical axis of the Connection profile panel shows the values of the Size parameter As a consequence if we change the profile curve as shown below you will obtain the following results Other TVPaint Animation Pro drawing tools 7 15 To perfectly master the drawing tools Ta a E e Angle and Random Color Sire ele a Irr ee ee aI R ALT ims me gt Angie omoo a Step e soos uit a Supe Drying _ Optimize Handie Canter Anim Random xj rm Let s admit that you are using an animbrush with four images in order to add some colored flags on a picture see below the handle of the animbrush is on the red cross or red line and the anim behavior is set to Random handle Here is the result if you draw a straight line with the settings opposite Don t hesitate to modify the Step parameter if you need to change the distance between the flags If we choose an angle of 90 the result is monotonous 7 16 Other TVPaint Animation Pro drawing tools To perfectly master the drawing tools If we connect the animbrush Angle parameter to Random the flags will be arranged in every directions It is completely disordered 360 0 Now let s modify the profile curve as shown hereafter 370 The angle of the animbrush will be randomly chosen between 80 and 100 compared to the horizontal
279. l gaps whereas high values are used for larger gaps it is worth noting that higher values sometimes result in a lower floodfill quality Image with a gap Floodfill the character without Gap closer 6 26 The steps to create animated graphics The inking process Floodfill the character with Gap closer The Auto Pick Color option Finally you have noticed that there is also a box called Auto pick color This option will save a great deal of time as it allows you when checked to pick a color when you click and to place it when you release the button Combined with a Light table which only displays the previous frame you may pick the color from the previous frame and place it in your current frame 7 i al ok 7 sin y aan Ly aon a Sure Se ET Opaciy 10 00 ak Lk ee f j E oo Create shadows Once you have finished coloring your running kid you may add shades to the latter using the toonshading effects discussed in lesson 12 toonshading toons hading Drop Shadow The steps to create animated graphics 6 27 To finish the animation To finish the animation Camera movements Now that your running kid is animated it is possible to add a scenery behind him and to add camera movement see below Two effects will help you with this Keyframer and Multiplane camera go to lessons 14 and 15 for details of these effects Add music The graphic desig
280. l shift page up page down shift page down ctrl page down ctrl shift page down mmb shift mmb ctrl mmb ctrl shift mmb Layer Last Image Layer Last Layer none none TVPaint Animation Delete Selection TVPaint Animation Delete Selection none none Zoom Rotation Reset none none none Layer Clear Shape Select Clear Layer Previous Layer Layer Previous Layer with Selection Layer Move Layer Up BookMarks Toggle Layer Next Layer Layer Next Layer with Selection Layer Move Layer Down Color Down Layer Prev Image Layer Prev Image with Selection Brush Previous Animbrush BookMarks Previous Layer Next Image Layer Next Image with Selection Brush Next Animbrush BookMarks Next Layer Prev Key Zoom Rotate 15 counter clockwise none none Layer Next Key Zoom Rotate 15 clockwise none none none none none none Appendix The initialization file PC only The initialization file PC only As a lot of software nowadays TVPaint Animation Pro use an initialization file in ASCII format This file contains a lot of parameters Its name is TVPaint Animation Pro ini and is located in the directory C windows system on Microsoft Windows XP C WINNT SystemRoot on Microsoft Windows 2000 It is possible to edit this file with any text editor like Notepad from Microsoft Windows Here is the content of the file 7VPaint Animation Pro ini by default STARTU
281. le below a few pictures from the thrid layer are selected They are enlighted in yellow in me Timeline ang alae in the EAE tab FERERR None Hirm Repeat Bindu E a FI Timeline tab XSheet tab After selecting several layers the option Align left and the option Align right allows to align your layers on either side of the current image in each tab Timeline or XSheet How to create a XSheet layer Let s now open a new project and come back to the Timeline tab You already know how to create an Image or an Amination layer Creating an XSheet layer can be done using the same way using the New popup menu of your Timeline or using the Layer main menu ingen images Duplicate Intages Datate Image Select AN Yelec image SBS Tape iom ke onr Ora Geel Pagid maga Alagri Right s Dhow leans Pre Arshervonr p Pon Alun Opacity 100 gt XSheet Layer Ligh Tatha gt Animation Layer MEYVErSE Deferred MENEE At this state the Rename Duplicate Delete Copy Hide and other classic options of the software are still available But you certainly noticed that you can t shrink or stretch this new layer There are no thumbnail icons too The and buttons of the XSheet tab can also be used to create or delete a XSheet layer The XSheet Layers and Panel 8 7 The XSheet Layers and XSheet Panel Managing the content of an image of the XSheet layer or managing the posi
282. le to obtain those results The healing source project The picture on which the effect will be applied Above one of the two B splines we used Here is the final result The sea has been replaced by the clouds l Zy The use of the edge parameter for the points of your B spline is sometimes useful E to have better results 16 22 The effects of the Rendering group The Rendering gt Background Generator effect The Rendering gt Background Generator effect The Background generator effect is used to create horizontal vertical or four corner color gradients These gradients are applied to the current image as described in lesson 2 You may choose any color you like as well as the opacity and then have them change with time by creating animation keys Below you will find four examples of gradients used in Color Add Tint or Subtract mode It is also possible to change the colors of clouds planet or even place the planet within a bluish atmosphere Source image Gradient in Color mode Gradient applied in Colorize mode Source image Gradient in Color mode Gradient applied in Add mode Source image Gradient in Color mode i S Source image Gradient in Color mode Gradient applied in Subtract mode The effects of the Rendering group 16 23 The Rendering gt Plasma effect The Rendering gt Plasma effect The Rendering gt Plasma effect is similar to the Wave effect
283. lete Delete the current window Duplicate Tool Bar Duplicate the entire window And Action Export Import Export the current window Add Mew Line import Add vertical Separator Add Horizontal Separator This Panel All Panels E In the second sub menu you may Load anew Tool Bar ij iti bar you may create an unlimited Bin number Animator Panel Load a new tool bar from its bin file Add Action Tool Bin View the name of the custom windows Add Mew Line Tool Bar visible on the screen Add vertical Separator Add Horizontal Separator This Panel This last sub menu Is used to All Panels Save a customized window in order to re use it later Delete one of the customized windows that you have ME o at savod Delete Add Action Add Mew Line Tool Bin Add Vertical Separator Animator Panel Add Horizontal Separator If you save the configuration your custom windows saved under the Bin menu will still be present when re starting TVPaint Animation Pro This being the case a reset will delete these settings Remember to export the custom window you need the most sai lt You may also define a keyboard shortcut for each action created using the keyboard shortcuts panel The advanced functions of TV Paint Animation Pro 18 5 How to use the plug ins How to use the plug ins To use the plug ins at your disposal you have to Open a custom panel Crea
284. lines may be vertically centered top or bottom justified here below the text was firstly rotated at 90 12345 abcde fghijkl abcde fghijkl The three last buttons allow you to set the horizontal and or vertical offset between the text lines Note that the unit is the pixel It is also possible to use negative numbers of pixels abcde fghijki 12345 aiani mnopqrstuv mnoparstuvwxyz R i tuvwxyz 12345 abcde It is possible to set or animate each line of the whole text by using the same method than encountered in the Rendering gt simple text effect The framed area of the FX stack below shows the font position border shadow parameters discussed in the previous chapter At the top of the panel the line popup menu is used to create rename duplicate or delete lines The header of the menu contains the name of the line for which the options are displayed in the panel Progress Proa E impor tamm 16 28 The effects of the Rendering group The Rendering gt Multiline Text effect 85 control key located next to the line popup menu O It is possible to create animation keys for all parameters of every line by using the Let s now study the animation popup menu The roll option allows you to move your text lines from the bottom to the top of the project window The crawl option allows you to move your text lin
285. ll Down Left i Project Append Images 2 Zoom Scroll Down j Spare Exchange 3 Zoom Scroll Down Right k none 4 Zoom Scroll Left Shape Line 5 Zoom Center m Zoom New Zoom window 6 Zoom Scroll Right n Color Invert A B T Zoom Scroll Up Left O Brush Outline 8 Zoom Scroll Up p Interface Toggle Palette Panel 9 Zoom Scroll Up Right q Shape Spline ctrl pad O none r Shape Rectangle ctrl pad 1 Interface Open Time Line Panel S Shape Freehand Dot ctrl pad 2 Interface Open XSheet Panel t Tools Brush Text ctrl pad 3 Interface Open Project Panel u Undo Last Action ctrl pad 4 none V Interface Full Screen ctrl pad 5 none W Preview Flip Book ctrl pad 6 none X Brush Flip Horizontally ctrl pad 7 none y Brush Flip Vertically ctrl pad 8 none Z Brush Resize ctrl pad 9 none shita Interface Toggle Tools Panel Tools Brush Decrease Size 2 shiftb Layer Toggle Background Mode j Tools Brush Increase Size 2 shiftc Tools Healing Set Tools Brush Decrease Size shiftd Interface Open Preferences Panel Tools Brush Increase Size shifte none l Layer Pick Layer shiftf Layer Goto Image A Color Pick shiftg Interface Open Grid Panel l Tools Brush reset shith Brush Double Size none shifti Project Insert Images lt Zoom Out shift Spare Copy To gt Zoom In shiftk Layer Clear amp none shift File P
286. loud become transparent The green and dark colors of the tree are further away from blue and therefore opaque sm These two keying effects may of course by applied to a complete footage which makes work easier when using a scanner with loader or a recorded video sequence Let s take another concrete situation The character nearby was shot on front of a blue screen We are going to explain how to remove this blue background and to replace it by another background It s a technique often used for animation weather reports are shot with a single colored background which is removed and replaced by a weather chart The effects of the Color and Keying groups 11 13 The effects of the Keying menu Let s go back to our character the purpose is to make transparent all the blue pixels and to display a new background on another layer To do so let s load a landscape background nearby and put it as an Animation layer under the layer containing the character wi ON The blue color is called key color that s why the effect is called keying You should have a timeline looking like this Now select the Color Keyer effect in the FX Stack Choose a blue pixel from the background and adjust the tolerance and softness parameters Apply the effect to the whole image sequence and here it goes the blue background has disappeared and is replaced by the landscape There are ot
287. love power opacity and the connection you have just chosen fade pressure Orientation random stark A lot of profile curves are then available For instance the airbrush tool has 4 parameters which can use up to 10 connections There are then 4 x 10 40 Abert potential profile curves anmuth The applications of the profile curves are numerous and we will only study here er the most important examples Finger Wheel 01 Opkhans e Size and Pressure If you connect the stylus Pressure to the Power of the Pencil tool the more you push down on the tablet with the stylus the thicker your line will be In the example below on the left the size of your tool will be bounded between 0 pixels and 30 pixels In this exemple we want to focus on the size parameter behavior so we will choose connection none for the power parameter Now if we change the profile curve as shown below on the right the minimal size value for your tool will be 15 pixels AALZ 2 4 4 AS Cabot a SS puu aze P ft PE Pressure minimum 0 pies 15 pixels e Size and Fade Let s admit that we draw a straight line on the current picture from right to left with the oilbrush tool If the profile curve stays unchanged the line thickness is smaller and smaller In our example The horizontal axis of the Connection profile panel shows the chosen connection from the maxima
288. lurs are often used to hide faces in recorded animations Sometimes they are also used to create artistic effects In order to study the effects of the Blur group we will use the two pictures below a photo and a drawing __ Independent of which blur effect you will choose don t forget it will be controlled by tthe animation key system A recorded video sequence can also become gradualy blurred in time 10 2 The effects of the Blur and Transition groups The Blur group effects Some details regarding the Blur effects of TVPaint Animation Pro The Blur gt Cubic Blur effect This is the most standard blur the more you increase its size the less the sharp and angular areas of the source image will be visible It may also be applied only to the transparency channel of the image alpha channel The Blur gt Gaussian Blur effect An image with a Gaussian Blur may be compared to an image seen through a camera that is not set correctly The Gaussian Blur is more precise than the Cubic Blur The Blur gt Chroma Blur effect The Chroma Blur takes only the tint and saturation pixel informations into account The dark and light areas of the picture are not affected by the Chroma Blur Only the chromatic component of the picture is affected by the blur The effects of the Blur and Transition group 10 3 The Blur group effects The Blur gt Center Blur effect We studied the Center Blur in detail in lesson
289. m KR X X viv Digital Camera quicktime Bluefish 444 avi Jf Jf x lt X x lt cineon ant oh Should be added in the next updates of TVPaint Animation Pro J Available x Not available N The hardware native file formats if they are available are used by TVPaint 7e Animation Pro and your video card during the video import and or export process A 2 Appendix The digital camera working with the Canon Plug in PC only The digital camera working with the Canon Plug in PC onl Please find below the list of theorically supported models regarding the canon SDK we used for this plugin PC only at this time PowerShot A10 PowerShot A20 PowerShot A30 PowerShot A40 PowerShot A60 PowerShot A70 PowerShot A75 PowerShot A80 PowerShot A85 PowerShot A95 PowerShot A100 PowerShot A200 PowerShot A300 PowerShot A310 PowerShot A400 PowerShot A510 PowerShot A520 PowerShot 10 PowerShot S20 PowerShot S30 PowerShot S40 PowerShot 845 PowerShot S50 PowerShot S60 PowerShot S70 PowerShot S100 IXY DIGITAL DIGITAL IXUS PowerShot S110 IXY DIGITAL 200 DIGITAL IXUS v PowerShot S200 IXY DIGITAL 200a DIGITAL IXUS v2 PowerShot S230 IXY DIGITAL 320 DIGITAL IXUS v3 PowerShot S300 IXY DIGITAL 300 DIGITAL IXUS 300 PowerShot S330 IXY DIGITAL 300a DIGITAL IXUS 330 PowerShot SD100 IXY DIGITAL 30 DIGITAL IXUS II PowerShot S400 IXY DIGITAL 400 DIGITAL IXUS 400 Pow
290. m forum Once the project is loaded you should obtain the following animation and timeline Five layers are visible an image layer called background and four animation layers called shadow colors Running Kid and Toonshading Each layer has its own assigned color Please note that your project does not have any XSheet layer at this time First approach of the XSheet panel To swap between the Timeline and the XSheet panels you only have to click on the corresponding tab see below Sheet Projects viel BegesHa Sa A amie Let s study firstly the left part of the XSheet panel the right part will be the subject of a further chapter The left part of the XSheet panel is in a way the mirror of the Timeline see next page for the screenshots Each column of the XSheet Panel corresponds to a layer of the Timeline with its colour The title of a column is the name of the corresponding layer Each line of the XSheet panel is numbered This numbering is the same as the one you can find on the top of the corresponding timeline see below The image layers contain an unique image repeated through the time so they are not subdivided in the XSheet panel As the animation layers contain differents images they are subdivided The bookmark located here and there on your timeline are also visible and modifiable in the XSheet panel Projects
291. mation Pro using several different file formats DIP AVI GIF QUICKTIME FLI PNG PCX SUNRASTER PSD TGA JPG ILBM TIFF FLYER CLIP D1 RTV CINEON SGI SOFTIMAGE BMP VPB The FLYER CLIP file format lets you export an animation that you can use with the VideoToaster Flyer from Newtek The animation is saved as a single file and has usually a resolution of 752x480 You can use the D1 RTV file format in order to export an animation usable with the VideoToaster from Newtek The animation is saved as a single file and has a resolution of 752x486 for NTSC ans 720x576 for PAL The CINEON export format was created by the Eastman Kodak Compagny in order to be used with their scanners and recorders It uses logarithmic datas 10 bits The VPB format is native to the Quantel Video Paintbox It uses 24 bits per pixels more than 16 millions of colors Although the VPB format use stencils and layers TVPaint Animation Pro does not translate its layers into VPB layers at this time The other export formats are classified in the table below Appendix A 5 The main characteristics of the export formats wen WV V gt WV VV x re V yV hh hUuM VV X VX VY KX KX Vv VV VK mwmw X V we VY X V XXV u Vv v xX XX v X Vv vv xX Vv x XV VXXX wm X Vo Vv X X ce Si A A A A ra X Vi VV KX Vv re X V Vv KX KX Vv w X V
292. menus The effect can use several B splines at the same time The header of the menu contains the name of the B spline for which the options are displayed in the panel Enable the Head Up Display and check the Preview boxes of your FX stack Once the first point is drawn on the project window new parameters related to the points drawn in the screen appear position edge sharp To close the spline that you just began to draw you only have to click on the first point displayed on the screen points while B splines don t Do you remind B zier splines We encountered them in lesson 2 when we studied the drawing tools B splines and B zier splines are mathematically linked Try not to confuse those two kind of splines Bezier splines go through their control e Managing the opacity Once the B spline is closed the opacity of the pixel area outside the spline becomes transparent after applying the effect The pixel area inside the spline stay the same This being the case the two opacity parameters allows you to modify the opacity of any of those two areas The numeric field on the top of the control panel allows you to set the opacity of the pixel area inside the B spline The numeric field on the bottom of the panel allows you to set the opacity of the pixel area outside the B spline The invert button allows you to invert the effect the area of pixels outside the B spline will remain unchanged while t
293. meter which requires the use of the animation key system as described in lesson 9 As well we chose to make this parameter vary between 0 and 100 for each transition effect in order to show you their specifications A setting of 0 will leave the picture intact and a setting of 100 clears the picture 100 transparent In order to study the effects of the Transition group we will use the picture below image i Be careful that the transitions are made between the frames and a full transparent Transitions are not transformations between two pictures The Transition gt Block effect In this effect you can adjust the number of rows and columns which will create blocks To set the number of blocks you just have to increase these two values You can also select the way these blocks will appear or disappear on screen random or in a direction you want The effects of the Blur and Transition group 10 7 The Transition group effects The Transition gt Blind effect This transition hides progressively a part of the current image The numeric field value represent the number of division on the screen There are three types giving different results crop slide and stretch ajaja ele The Transition gt Classic effect Classic transitions makes the current image appear or disappear by moving a frontier This one can have different shapes circle line rectangle as well as the color you want or
294. n Mamme o EE Above you find the example of an action which selects all images of the current layer flips them and copies them all to a new layer Namal comment i TA Image Buffer Image Interface Layer Sound rvrwvrvrvrvrvrvrvrvwvrvrvrvVrvVvrTvrvwhsavrvrvrwvrwrwrwvrvwvrovrvrvrvrvrvv wv Close Coordinates Panel 0 None l Close FX Panel 1 Type Scripts Command Close Gradient Panel 2 Grab A Color Close Grid Panel 5 Grab B Color Close Guides Panel Grab Current Tool Close Layer Panel 4 Set Script Close LightTable Panel 5 Tool Grabber Close Navigator Panel 6 Set KeyStro ke BookMarks Close Palette Panel i Set Plugins Brush Close Paper Panel Set Tool Bar Clipboard Close Remote Panel 8 j Color Close Tools Panel g ra a Close Window rawing Moge Configure Keyboard File Export Full Screen File Import Next Cursor File Project Open Connection Panel FX Stack Open Coordinates Panel Grab Open Custom Panel Gradient Open Display Panel Grid Open FX Panel Guides Open Gradient Panel Open Grid Panel Open Guides Panel Open Layer Panel Open LightTable Panel Layer Open Main Panel Preview Open Menu Panel Printer Open Navigator Panel Project Open Palette Panel Shape Select Open Paper Panel Shape Transform Open Path Manager Panel Shape Open Path Recorder Panel Spare Open Pixel Tracker Panel Tools Brush Open Preferences Panel Tools Mode Open Preview Settings Panel Tools Pan
295. n the pixel s color is NOT black End Else Return the pixel is transparent End End Theline AW tv_warn TestBlackColor abscissa ordinate Can be replaced by the two following lines Answer TestBlackColor abscissa ordinate tv_warn Answer 18 22 The advanced functions of TV Paint Animation Pro How to use the George scripting language Here is the syntax of the instructions relative to the procedures and functions Function NameOfTheFunction Variable1 Variable2 Variable3 etc This instruction declares the existence of a function or a procedure in a George Script there is no instruction called procedure This instruction is followed by the procedure or function name and then by the name of the variables from the main part that are needed Functions and procedures must always be located after the main part of your script Calling a function or a procedure in the main part of your script can be done by writing its name and the needed variables between brackets separated by comas Local LocalVariable1 LocalVariable2 LocalVariable3 etc This instruction allows to specify the variables which will be used solely inside your function or procedure Return Result This instruction allows to specify the result of your function and to make it available in the main part of the script It could be a character string a numerical value a boolean val
296. n the thumb button allows to swap between the XSheet display and the thumbnails display AN If you selected a project as source its layers are considered as if they were merged How to manage the content of a XSheet layer We are now going to modify the content of our XSheet layer Before beginning you must know that it is possible to stretch a XSheet layer by doing a drag n drop at one of its extremities So you can obtain several cells as shown next page After this operation you have to enter in the cells the references from a source image To do so you have to use the following syntax Source Column Source Line The cells containing the character doesn t have any reference The cells manually filled have their reference image written in black The XSheet Layers and Panel 8 9 The XSheet Layers and XSheet Panel By default all the cells following a manually filled cell are written in pink color and have the same reference image Those images are also called keyframes Once finished each cell from the XSheet layer correspond to an image choosen into the Source columns For a better readability you can use the thumbnail view in order to replace each cells by its correponding image Opposite here is how to stretch an XSheet layer Opposite The first three cells of the exposition layer are empty The fourth cell of the XSheet layer is the 26 image from the source column called Kid
297. n creation of an inner or outer relief You may also use both effects at the same time which gives a relief effect to the contours of your image To give an image relief you must set the Size of the bevel as well as its Lighting using the following parameters Force Altitude Direction Color and Power The Smooth parameter enables attenuation of rough contours by applying a slight blur TVPaint TVPaint TVPaint Inner bevel Outer bevel Inner and Outer bevel Inner bevel Outer bevel Inner and Outer Bevel The Stylize gt Drop shadow effect This effect is useful to add a shadow to a logo or any other image that is not entirely opaque Color Direction Distance and Opacity are parameters that may be set using keys at your disposal In this way you can make the shadow of your logo move as if a light source were moving above it TVedint MwRaint Rain various shadow distances and directions Traditional shadow and blurred shadow the background and the running kid are located on different layers The effects of the Stylize group 12 3 The Stylize gt Drop shadow effect The Stylize gt Toon Shading effect This effect differs from the drop shadow as it enables creation of a shadow inside an image The transparent pixels are not affected by the creation of your shadow see below Toon Shading Drop shadow Let s take the shape filled with white below as an example to study this effect ow ZE Toon Shading a
298. n image 6 4 Working directly with TVPaint Animation Pro 6 5 The sketch Panel 6 5 Managing the images of an animation layer 6 8 Insert duplicate or delete one or several images 6 8 Cut Copy Paste images 6 9 Cut Copy Paste layers 6 9 Working with instances 6 10 Introduction 6 10 What is instance 6 10 Some vocabulary 6 11 The contents of the cells 6 11 Spliting an instance into two smaller instances 6 11 How to use the instances for animating 6 11 How to change the colors of a rough 6 14 How to transform an image layer into an Animation layer 6 14 Drawing outside the existing layers 6 14 Erasing the content of an image instance 6 14 Remove cells from an instance 6 15 Split a layer 6 15 Merging layers 6 16 Stretch a layer 6 16 Shrink an Animation layer 6 17 Pre and Post behavior 6 18 How to use several layers at the same time 6 18 The Recompute Exposures option 6 19 The Animator Panel 6 19 The classical tools ot the animator 6 21 Rotate workspace 6 21 Using the light table 6 22 The inking process 6 24 The filodfill tool 6 24 The Auto Pick Color option 6 27 Create shadows 6 27 To finish the animation 6 28 Add Music 6 28 Lesson 07 Other TVPaint Animation Pro drawing tools The others drawing modes 7 2 The Saturate and Unsaturate drawing modes 7 2 The Smooth and Sharp drawing modes 7 3 The Colorize and Tint drawing modes 7 3 The Negative and Solarize drawing modes 7 4 The Grain and Noise d
299. n image sequence with all the layers of your project in a single image without transparency The transparent areas will be replaced by the color black lf you decide to export a project in the form of layers in the same way as your project tvp you will have to choose the Project layers tab for this export If you decide to export a project in PSD format in the Project layers tab you will export an image or an image sequence with all the layers of your project in the spatial order with transparency Handling TVPaint projects 5 11 The projects panel The projects panel We have already discussed the notion of TVP project in previous chapters Let s assume that some of them have been already loaded If you don t have a dual screen computer configuration the situation can quickly become confusing on screen see below the we a aF A DRD REEE p peee a a a In the example opposite five projects have been loaded and displayed on screen milk tvp city tvp gazelle tvp a zoom tvp mpc tvp They are all supplied with the TVPaint Animation Pro CD rom We will remedy to this situation without closing any loaded project To do so just begin by clicking on the Project tab located near the well Known Timeline tab The project tab is divided in two parts as shown below On the left part of the tab there is a window displaying the current project It d
300. n saving as your project does not contain all the images it comprises Attention however if the video file to which your project refers is deleted modified or renamed this will have an incidence the next time your project is loaded the layers and images concerned will not be found To avoid having a project which is dependent on external videos you may when video footage is imported for the first time preload it immediately Your project will then be more voluminous when saved but at least there will be no risk of loosing the data when the imported files are modified 4 Ifyou forget to do this it is possible to preload the files later via the main menu O Project gt Dependencies gt Load all This menu also displays the path and name of files on which your project depends 5 8 Handling TVPaint projects Export files Export files Saving a project in TVPaint Animation Pro format with all associated layers may require a considerable amount of storage capacity Even if it contains specific data relative to your project opacity layers etc the TVP format is not a practical solution if you want to share it with your friends at parties or on a website Use of the dependencies function will render your project smaller but it is not more practical in the aforementioned cases The option File gt Export project to is used to convert your project into a format of your choice animated GIF AVI or QuickT
301. n side of your project is now complete If you wish you may now add a sound track in order to give it that final touch see lesson 8 for more details about this subject 6 28 The steps to create animated graphics Lesson Other TVPaint Animation Pro drawing tools In this lesson you will Finish studying the drawing modes Use the clipboard Use the spare image Learn how to use animbrushes as drawing tool Use cutouts and selections The others drawing modes The others drawing modes We studied in lesson 2 several drawing modes color behind erase shade light and panto We are now going to study the other drawing modes at our disposal The drawing and the photography below will serve as a basis in this chapter The Saturate and Unsaturate drawing modes These two modes are used to increase or decrease pixel saturation A highly saturated color is a very bright color whereas a less saturated color is rather dull and closer to gray Here the Penbrush tool was used with an opacity and power of 100 for a radius of 30 pixels Penbrush tool in Saturate mode Penbrush tool in Unsaturate mode The pixels of the house are gray with a light red hue The Saturate mode will therefore increase their red components and render them more vivid The Unsaturate mode will have little effect on the same pixels as they are already close to gray The pixels of the sun and sky are very saturated The Saturate mode will t
302. n the Grid icon in the Tool bar or via the Windows main menu is used to set the width and height of the boxes use the numeric fields of the same name or the mini sliders The Start X and Start Y numbers will help you shift the grid on the surface defined by the work area If required you may adapt these four values in such way as to recover the image using the current brush and the Brush size button The Set button is used to interactively define the grid parameters by drawing a dummy rectangle in the current project window The Show box displays the grid when it is checked 2 16 Drawing basics Further details The Snap box renders the grid magnetic This option imposes that the user may only use the red pixels at the intersections of the horizontal and vertical lines This works as if the cursor on the screen were magnetically attracted to the grid intersections Use the guides The purpose of the Guides of TVPaint Animation Pro Pro is to create customized and magnetic marker points in the current project window When using the guides it is very easy to draw concentric circles or parallel lines To display the latter left click on the Too bar button shown below a right click will open the window for guide parameter setting EA The following options are available in the guide parameter setting window Once the Set button is selected any click with the mouse in the current project window will g
303. n the tool Some examples to help you understand the notions mentioned above ooe0ereeeee cea See opposite a straight line traced with from top to bottom the percentages 300 100 and 0 for the Step variable th i TVPaint written with the airbrush tool E A t Angle 90 and Aspect 20 Mechanical pencil tool left without Smoothing right with smoothing i ee If required the Reset button resets the settings of the displayed tool 2 14 Drawing basics Further details Drawing filled shapes With the exception of the FreeHandDots tool a second mouse click on one of the icons described previously enables the fill function You may thus draw filled disks rectangles and other filled splines A second click on the FreeHandDots tool enables the Simp ePoint tool which is used to draw only a single application of the brush This is an alternative to the Floodfill option in simple cases Setting of the brush profile The right field in the tool panel provides a view of the drawing tool cross section Below you will find two profile examples for the airbrush drawing tool The profile of brushes may be edited in the window shown opposite Right click on the profile of the tool you are using to make it appear You have the choice to create or delete the points of the spline to move the latter to flip to the spline along the horizontal or vertic
304. named ong grg waits for a segment to be drawn on screen and finally returns its length The George Script called clock grg waits for a circle to be drawn on screen and finally draws a clock inside this one The George Script called button Z grg waits for a rectangle to be drawn on screen and returns a bevelled button inside it A few George Scripts don t need any action from the user to be started it s the case with the George Script called Zsurface grg Above the results of the scripts button Z Long Clock Zsurface and Polystar A few George Script are more complicated and some requesters may appear It is the case with the George Script called Polystar grg during its execution a first requester asks you to specify how many vertices should be drawn If you apply your script on an animated layer after selecting all its frames a second and third requesters will ask you more informations see below Select the rotation direction you wish to nse Ready To Process 20 frames as H GhockW ise Counter Clockvvisa Go Ahead Abort OK Cancel Programming in George language George is a scripting language which can do the basics Loops do the same thing n times Conditional testing if this is true then do that Calculations a b sin a The George language is not particularly fast but it is flexible and very easy to use On many points George is c
305. ncil paper and selections when using the latter stencil B ioo o Paper Selection w Satura i ap onnea es in Area Fioldchant soe o The safe area has some additional parameters position of the action and text safe areas may be set in percentages 2 18 Drawing basics Lesson 3 Layers spatial management In this lesson you will learn to Use the paper Create a Color Gradient Study the notion of the layer with its multiple aspects Name move and select layers Assign a color to a layer Manage the global opacity of a layer Layers and timeline Layers and timeline When starting the program select the template TVPAP Image Layer so that the newly created project only contains one Image layer The Oilbrush tool PEPE ddai Color Grain Modium l Ske _P 30 00_ Powar C 504 paciy 100 ar Light 10 00 _ Aspect c 100 ane co e stn ias o Oring We ll start by drawing a little man in the center of our image To do this use the Oilbrush tool select FreeHand and the red color R 255 G 0 B 0 This window shows that our little man was drawn on a layer named Untitled 1 Indeed every layer has a name Rename a layer We will now rename the layer You have the choice to File Edit Project Image Effects View Vir eae Select Rename layer in the Layer main menu Duplicat
306. ng Width Stretch Height Stretch Wrap Note that for this example we used a brush created with the Text tool which will be discussed in lesson 7 but the example applies to all types of brushes 4 16 Temporal management of layers More details The notion of Animated Brushes Using the Deep cut option which was displayed during the brush cut we saw that it is possible to cut a brush in space several layers deep It is also possible to cut a brush in time this is referred to as animated brush We will study this notion in detail using examples Example 1 We ll put a finishing touch to our animation by adding birds Create an Animation layer of 10 images then create a bird with a different wing position in every image of the layer see timeline below s ie Line RShert en 5 New i Mage F Amafi Ti ka 1 5 7 r wv W fair oos py Nie Bana yan Color Y Frame fe ail el Select all the images of your layer Carry out a rectangular brush cut in a size similar to that of the image TVPaint Animation Pro will ask you if you wish to cut an animated brush via a small window Answer yes You have just created your first animated brush We will soon be able to use it Delete the content of the layer you have just created Use the Edit brush option to reduce the size of your animated brush Let s now look at the short animation created previousl
307. ng a value of 100 on one of the axes allows to completely flip your path To move the entire path on the screen you simply select all its keys in the HUD and then click slide using the mouse Save paths We explained above that it is possible to save paths to be used later for an effect of your choice option Add to Bin However a path saved in this manner may not be recovered after closing and re opening TVPaint Animation Pro Three methods are available to solve this problem Save your configuration before quitting the program The effects of the FX stack and their parameters may be saved in a Bin FX menu see lesson 9 This save mode offers the advantage that it also stores the path s associated with your effect so that they may be recovered when re starting TVPaint Animation Pro Te ori T ri w a 4 he a iat ii LF aT File ooth Size Export to LY tWotion T Rename Copy Invert Delete Constant Speed You may also save your paths before closing TVPaint Animation Pro then reload them after re start thanks to the File menu of the Path Manager You can also export a path into Lightwave Motion format pO _ The saved path is that of the Manage popup menu a loaded path will be added A inthe path bin and available in the popup menu of the Manage tab 14 6 The effects of the Motion and Paint groups management of the paths The Pixel Tracker The Pixel Tracker There i
308. ng our animation all the planes seen in the 3D view on the previous page are in focus 15 10 The Rendering gt Multi plane Camera Effect Create and manage focusing blurs However to create a more realistic effect you may wish to create a camera focusing blur effect refer to page 2 of this lesson section Focusing blur You will therefore have to go back to the View tab and adjust the Focusing distance i e indicate at exactly what distance the camera will be focused If you have followed all the steps of this lesson your running kid will be at a distance of 1000 units from the camera and your focusing distance is also 1000 units The running kid is therefore in focus In order to blur the other elements mountain forest trees the Depth of Field parameter will need to be increased when at 0 no blur is applied This is illustrated by the creation of a red cone in the 3D view see below and a blur on the screen The further the objects are away from the apex of the cone the more blurred they will be Inversely the closer they are to the apex of the cone the slighter the blur will be If your focusing distance is now 3000 your camera is located at 1000 units from the center point and the mountains are 2000 units on the other side of the center point 1000 2000 3000 the mountains will be focused and the other planes will be blurred Considering the position of the cone in the 3D diagram it is also safe to say
309. nimation layers as well as their temporal and spatial specificities What we refer to as a TVPaint Animation Pro project or simply project is all image animation or Xsheet see lesson 8 layers in a timeline whether created by drawing scanning or any other method with all associated options global opacity pre post behavior FX stack see lesson 9 number of images per second position in the timeline resolution etc Save a project In lesson 1 we saw how to create a project with the parameters of your choice After having worked with tools and layers lessons 2 3 and 4 you may wish to save your project for later use To do this use the Save project or Save project as functions in the File main menu Save project keyboard shortcut Shift S allows you to save the project under the current name whereas Save project as asks you to choose a new file name for your project This function allows you to easily duplicate your project as you progress with its creation Use the requester A file explorer then asks you to select an access path and file name for your project File c on Pattern All Files v me Thumbs List Scam Daleme Rename New Folder Burenu Type Name w coun Resolution Size E Fawont r seal a foumir avec arire Wp e598 3G ER Poule de travail 1 i Panneau de configuration S _brigves_L3 dip 1 256 5 256 arii H Disquette 3t A iip 1 AAO 2 480 12a fe SY
310. nstalled on your computer wa Wordprocessors spreadsheets and digital creation software packages generally gee use a function referred to as Paste buffer content or Paste which you simply have to call up in order to use your brush or image When you use the print screen key on your keyboard or when you use the Copy option to be understood copy to buffer in the program it is possible to recover the image stored in TVPaint Animation Pro The Get brush from clipboard option makes the current image stored in the buffer memory of your computer available as current brush The New layer from clipboard option creates a new image layer from the clipboard I PON For the latter option ensure the size of your current project is adapted to that of the image stored in the buffer memory otherwise the image may be cropped The Spare image It is possible to virtually store an image of the current layer displayed on the screen in order to use it at a later time mixing options or to use specific drawing modes Merge or Impressionist modes This image is referred to as spare image Swap spare The following examples will provide Copy to spare a better understanding of this Preferences Delete spare notion spare bixer Above you will find the options available in the Edit gt Spare main menu 7 8 Other TVPaint Animation Pro drawing tools Clipboard and spare Save the TVPaint logo oppos
311. nu is located in the left section of the timeline the image s contextual menu is on the right side of the timeline see below Images Contextual Menu D gee The Cut Copy Paste layers options are also available in the Layers main menu Before transferring the layers from one project to another always ensure the resolution is correct otherwise your images may be distorted The steps to create animated graphics 6 9 Working with instances new Working with instances new In this chapter The blue images are the new ones The grey images are those which have been drawn in one of the previous steps The green images are here to show the global render of the animation once it is finished Introduction In traditionnal paper animation the animators are often using the following method Y L Firstly the key images are drawn The purpose is to he lt geta handle on the global movement on the required i number of images on the timing to schedule etc In the exemple opposite the kid is running from the left to the right of the screen Two key images are drawn The second step is to locate and draw the most oe important frames In our example this is when the kid R A i is jumping the two feets are not on the floor Finally the inbetween pictures are added 2 To begin an image is drawn between each picture 2 G already visible on the timelin
312. o back and take a closer look at its control panel The two popup menu allows you to display the images after and before the current image with their original colors a color or a gradient of your choice The two colored boxes near those popup menus allow you to select the colors on the screen or a gradient in a preset list to view the frames before and after the current frame The use of colors in this viewing mode is not mandatory If you wish to keep the original image colors select the option none See below The sliders are used to manage the opacity level of frames displayed the Link button avoids having to move each slider individually by linking them to one another Link mone EJ i None Aa nane F ito nt E EAEC The numbers are used to select the frames to be displayed For example in the panels shown as an example above the number 5 to the right of the zero is selected and its slider is set in the center of the scale This means that the fifth frame after the current frame will be visible with medium opacity The Front button allows to display the light table images in front of the current image The buttons All and None allow to display all the images of the light table or no images On The number zero enables or disables the light table its slider manages the w P global opacity of the table If you use instances only the head cells are taken into account by the lighttable Th
313. o half axes it may be tiresome to reproduce exactly the same drawing on the screen The Re apply option keyboard shortcut Enter was developed to counter this type of problem and facilitate your task When your ellipse is deleted change the tool and adjust the parameters and colors Then select the Re apply option in the Edit main menu A new ellipse is drawn You may even do more than that as before using the Re apply option you have the following choices change the layer select several layers change the type of line to work with filled shapes see the examples above It is even possible to define selections or cut animated brushes from the original drawing Use the Grid The grid is in fact a kind of plotting paper the parameters of which may be set and the basic unit of which is the pixel aes ae foo _ Using a grid is very useful when Statyf oon drawing parallel lines Widlt 50 00 ar l rele oh placing a brush at regular intervals UseGushare ON the screen S Adjust gm aligning a text along a vertical line E Show etc ee ee ee eee m oe O merae snap l S r As you have probably guessed this option is also accessible in the Tool bar and the Windows main menu Once enabled it does not affect your project itself but the way you will draw just disable the option to make the red grid disappear The Grid panel which is accessible with a right click o
314. o your needs do not forget to save the configuration when you quit TVPaint Animation Pro In this way you will have your color parameters at your disposal the next time you start the program You can import or export palettes and mixers at any time via the File sub menu This enables exchanges between users of the software It is possible to return to the default mixers and palettes of TVPaint Animation Pro using the Default palette or Pre defined palette choices in the contextual menus The pre defined palettes et mixers may be restored by resetting the TVPaint Animation Pro settings You should note however that the last two operations will delete the palettes and mixers that you have created yourself unless you have exported them previously 2 10 Drawing basics Further details Colors History When you draw with TVPaint Animation Pro the history of colors you have used is accessible with a right click on the color square on the main panel or a left click on the r_ button see opposite It is therefore very easy to re use a color that you have recently used Y or the color picker and then keeping the button Ctrl pressed when moving the mouse to another color on the screen Itis possible to shade the colors A or B by left clicking on the latter in the main panel The Color Variations panel The Color Variations panel is accessible thanks to a right mouse click on the color box of t
315. of connections applies to pointing peripherals mouse trackball stylus None no connections profile Editor it will be explained in the next chapter Invert invert the effect of the connection chosen Speed the parameter connected to the Speed will change at a speed proportional to the stylus travel speed Direction the parameter connected to the Direction will change according to the direction of the stylus Orientation the parameter connected to the Orientation will change according to the stylus orientation Fade the parameter connected to Fade will decrease its values as the line drawn progresses Random the parameter connected to Random will vary randomly The second set of connections applies only to stylus and graphic tablets Pressure the parameter connected to Pressure of the parameter connected will vary proportionally to the pressure applied to the stylus on the tablet Altitude the parameter connected to Altitude will vary proportionally to the angle formed by the stylus inclination on the tablet Azimuth the parameter connected to Azimuth will vary proportionally to the angle formed between the stylus projection on the tablet and the vertical plane Rotation the parameter connected to Rotation will vary when you roll the stylus between your fingers you need a 6D Art pen from Wacom to use this connection FingerWheel the parameter connected to FingerWheel will vary according to thes
316. of the two tabs enables display of a contextual menu dirty s i n which is specific to this purpose and offers many choices see opposite the inks Mixer tab menu nebula At first you can choose to work with pre defined mixer surfaces blue clouds storm clouds inks dirty nebula etc or pre defined palettes TVPaint Animation Pro 1 2 3 4 violet_red_yellow and gray Pick Color Po A hese If the mixer and palettes proposed are not what you want TVPaint Animation Pro also offers you the possibility to create duplicate New Mixer rename and cancel your own palettes or mixers These options are also Ae accessible via the contextual menus options New Copy Rename Delete Delete Mixer File Default Mixers Slider Picker Mirer Bin It is possible to modify the existing or newly created mixers a left click on the mixer surface incorporates the A color to the visible mixer which can then be spread If you are not satisfied with the color obtained you can delete it with the Delete Mixer choice In the Bin tab you have some additional choices in the contextual menu Replace Swap Spread and Delete These choices act directly on the current palette You may repectively replace the color in one field by the current color swap the colors of two fields spread the colors from one field to another and delete a field PP OT RTS G62 8285 Once you have created the mixers and palettes adapted t
317. of your animation in order to simulate use of a palette with a lot more colors technically referred to as Floyd Steinberg dithering Alpha Options relative to the Alpha function were discussed on page 7 The third section of the panel contains several options The Browse button and an associated text field are used to enter the name and location of the file to be exported The Single image button is used to save the image visible in the right section of the panel only The Sequence button is used to save one at a time the images located between the Mark in and Mark out points The images created in this way are numbered By default the images are numbered as follows file name_1 ext file name_2 ext file name_123 ext At example if the first file name is dessin 000 the images will have the names O Including a 0 in your file name may help with numbering your images For Bs dessin _001 jpg dessin _002 jpg dessin _354 jpg The Animation button is used to save all the frames between the Mark in and Mark out points in a single file and is available for some file formats deep gif quicktime fli avi The fourth section of this panel manages the restrictions and attributes imposed on a file to be exported width height frame rate pixel aspect ratio field Several buttons are present in the fifth and last section The Background button when checked renders all the pi
318. ol Here we are taking a red TVPaint logo brush Its trajectory is of no importance Our red logo will after application of the FX stack be placed on each black image So far nothing new lf before applying the FX stack you select the Erase mode described in lesson 2 in the Blend popup menu Rendering tab you obtain the result shown opposite Our black layer was erased at the logo passage areas which made it possible to see the layer underneath It is as if our logo had been applied with the Eraser color mode The Mixer mode refers to that encountered when using a spare image The effects of the Motion and Paint groups management of the paths 14 15 The Motion gt Stabilization effects The Motion gt Stabilization effects Imagine that the video sequence you just have loaded is slightly shaking It s a common situation when you re using cameras fixed to a mobile support for examples hand held video footages video sequences shot on a boat etc Source Image Slight shakes It is possible to avoid these undesired shakes by adjusting each images as the sequence goes along If you proceed image after image it can be quickly tiresome Fortunately the Motion gt Stabilization 1 point and 2 points effects will take it in charge The Motion gt Stabilization 1 point effect This effect works as follows For each image from the sequence you have to define an Origin point and a Destination point The
319. omparable to the Pascal language or other well known programmation language However it s not aimed at developing heavyweight applications as are for example the C or C languages George is first and foremost a scripting language Instructions and Commands George needs classical instruction to structure the scripts tests loops calculation conditionals events etc For a better readability all the instructions will be written in green in this manual For example If Else End For Do Until While for conditionals tests Cos Sin Tan Rnd for calculations You can also call in your scripts TVPaint Animation Pro commands which call specific tools of the software They can be differentiated from the classical George instruction because they all begin with the tv_ prefix They will be written in blue color The advanced functions of TV Paint Animation Pro 18 13 How to use the George scripting language For instance The command tv_layerCreate allows to create a new layer The command tv_SaveBrushAnim saves the current brush on the hard drive It is possible to change the colors of the bin tab thanks to the tv_SetPalette command Etc You will find in appendix the complete instruction and command listings of the George Language All TVPaint commands need their own arguments and return some values as answer For example the TV LayerCreate command needs a name for the layer that you
320. on gt Multiplane Camera effect The speed of the moved images or the speed of the camera f i i movement will be directly linked to the Progress Profile of Oies those effects o The speed control will then be optimised F The Average tab has four popup menus for you to choose the Bin paths It allows you to set the values for each animation Manage AKeragA Srrmuolte Siow bh mae key of the current path as an average derived from the keys of Para Nona OON chosen path Path 4 Appi Average 1 path 2 path Path average The Smooth tab allows you to smooth the values associated with the animation key of the path chosen the higher the numeric value the more the paths will be smoothed after application File Manage Average Srrvulh Sie Path Mone Smoulh a e iF Srimulh Path gt gt Basic path Smoothed path The effects of the Motion and Paint groups management of the paths 14 5 The Path manager The Size tab allows you to modify the size of the complete path on each of the three axes horizontal vertical or depth This may be useful if you wish to transfer a path from one project to another with a different size File Manage Average Srrivull Size Path Mone Resive Y 1100 On ET Resize Y 1UU UU q Rese 21100 00 4 5 Apply i Basic path Path reduced by 50 on the horizontal axis E _ Usi
321. on and then on the small black Progress Profile v section appearing on the screen see opposite The Progress profile editor will then appear The interface of this window is identical to the one presented for brush profile setting in lesson 2 The File and Spline menus the Flip X Flip Y and Delete buttons are the same as the ones you have studied before This being the case the progress profile editor has a very specific function within the effect stack The abscissa in the graph represents time The ordinate in the graph represents the progress of the chosen effect Let s go back to the fade effect in the house layer Use the Undo option to recover the layers intact Choose the same keys as those indicated in the chapter above Draw the spline above before applying the FX stack After playing the project you will note that the effect is first carried out slowly and then at top speed see timeline below This corresponds to our spline it rises slowly first and then very fast wile dla ha dade d EEN EENEN ENE ahaa In the same way if we choose the spline shown below before applying the FX stack the Fade effect will be fast at the beginning and slower at the end On Choosing a horizontal straight in the profile will stop progress in time of the effect Working with the FX stack 9 7 Working with animation keys Managing effects with several parameters Now close the house
322. on effect with the Rotary Transition effect in the same stack can give this result The effects of the Blur and Transition group 10 9 Increasing the transition possibilities by using the FX stack Below the Classic Transition the Blind Transition and the Gaussian Blur effects were used in the same stack Of course we can t show you here all the possible combinaisons because they are too much a Dauis Afar Progress Profle But we guess you will certainly try some of them wile classic Progen Profile A Bling gt eine Progress Profit Direction Center T Tyn Crop xj Posmon ve d ojt uio F ull 7 Hide HJD Prerje w 10 10 The effects of the Blur and Transition groups Lesson 11 The effects of the Color and Keying groups In this lesson you will learn to e Touch up the colors of a video sequence or an animation e Handle the effects of the Keying group Unless indicated otherwise all images in this lesson have only one layer Color channels Color channels Based on the additive color principle all colors are a mixture of red green and blue more or less dark in exact proportions The color of a pixel therefore has a darker or lighter Red component a darker or lighter Green component a darker or lighter Blue component and a last component which indicates the pixel transparency level This last component is referred to as
323. on is checked the black background will not appear when using the apply button The advanced functions of TV Paint Animation Pro 18 11 How to use the George scripting language How to use the George scripting language Introduction what is George George is a programming language which allows to use the numerous tools of TVPaint Animation Pro Every program written in this language is called George Script Other softwares use sometimes the word Macro instead of Script A George Script allows to execute specific TVPaint Animation Pro command such as Create a new layer draw a circle on this area save the current project add a bookmark etc Those Scripts are usually created to save some time when executing a repetitive task is needed Experienced programmers use TVPaint commands in order to create dll plug ins Some George Scripts are available as example with the software but you can also create your own scripts and or exchange them with some members of the TVPaint Community You can access to the TVPaint forum here http www tvpaint com forum index php Finding Editing and Using George Scripts After installing TVPaint Animation Pro on your computer George Scripts are located in the directory C program files TVPaint Animation Pro George For Microsoft Windows users Application TVPaint Animation Pro George For Apple OS X users Those George Scripts are in fact usual ASCII tex
324. on of the FX stack twice in a row for two different effects followed by the Undo option twice Full Hida HUD Preview ing row change the first effect reapply the two s Apy EX Slack d effects one by one undo option again etc al Result of the FX stack above 1 Itis also possible to accumulate the number of effects of your choice lt or even several times the same effect if you need it amp Remember the Play button to view the effect on the animation layers Current effect preview and collapsing of effects One of the effects in your multiple FX stack is always selected This effect is referred to as current effect the one which seems to appear brighter while the other effects are gray The keys visible in the timeline are always those of the current effect When several effects are used it is possible to collapse them using the buttons top left The boxes close to the arrows indicated above are used to enable or disable the effect they belong to 9 14 Working with the FX stack More details about the FX stack Opposite The Lighting effect is enabled and reduced The Center blur effect is disabled and visible ins e Kala Power 100___ Jed c gt ei Radius 200 ap qc iid gt ry Hide HUD Preview The current effect is the Lighting effect Ful rj Apipity H HIAK e If the FX stack above is applied to our in
325. once The place or places where the particles come from are referred to as emitters TVPaint Animation Pro does not only make it possible to draw such particles but also to manage their movement using the parameters described previously This offers considerable time saving when creating animations and other special effects drawing and animating the particles one after the other would require months of work You have understood already that it is the effect referred to as Rendering gt Particles Generator which will help us succeed in this matter Learn by example You will very quickly notice that the particles generator is an effect which offers a wide range of options Generally you need to learn how to set the parameters of the world or universe in which the particles will move wind gravity collision The parameters of the particle emitter s movement angle rotation The particle parameters life span velocity number opacity The multitude of parameters is so vast that it may discourage the beginner For this reason and for didactic purposes numerous pre defined examples have been included in this program to help you master this powerful drawing tool Many users use them as a model to introduce the particles into their own creations These pre defined examples sometimes referred to as presets are accessible via the Bin FX menu 17 2 The Rendering gt Particles Generator effect Presenta
326. ong the segment you will draw from A color to B eee CO OT You will thus obtain the result shown opposite in the current project window The perspective diagram and the timeline hereafter confirm the presence of three layers although only two are visible on the screen Brick wall layer Glass layer anes Character layer E mon I m White background E om E aa nos da t E No aami Color Frama fo r J is Modify the global opacity of a layer I im M You may modify the global Opacity of a layer Ci by left clicking on the white bar on the timeline by right clicking on the same bar to call up the numeric field shown opposite via the contextual menu of the layer OK Cancel Layers spatial management 3 7 Layers and timeline Global Opacity of the Glass layer with various values Modification of the glass layer s global opacity will vary the opacity of all pixels making up the layer 100 Gradients and Opacity mapping The parameters for the pixel opacity of our glass may be entered as soon as the gradient is established 1 method the opacity gradient Erase the contents of the layer named glass and set its global opacity to 100 Open the Color gradients window right click on Gradient in the Filling shape panel or access it via the Windows main menu CLD a gt The first horizontal bar repr
327. ong three axes width height and depth the effect of which will result in immediate distortion of the current image You may also use the predefined paths to manage intersection movement se k A Above from left to right the initial image movement of the destination intersection along the X and Y axes movement of the destination intersection along the Z axis It is possible to select several intersection points when the HUD is visible by drawing a rectangle inside the HUD Once this has been done it is easy to carry out all movements with a single click and slide on an intersection The effects of the Distortion group 13 13 The Distortion gt Wrapping Grid effect It is possible to choose an intersection interpolation mode linear spline or smooth in the first effect popup menu see below Spline interpolation Smooth interpolation Linear interpolation gt If the interpolation mode chosen is Spline use of the Shift key when moving the B5 handles enables movement of one handle at a time EEE Edit grid bounding box When the second icon is selected it is possible to distort the current grid as a whole by rotating it or by modifying its dimensions see below Original grid Grid with 30 rotation Grid with height divided by two DS Swap the source and destination grids This option is practical when creating a distortion opposite to that of the current distortion Below the
328. ons are available in the current project window Here are the functions of all buttons available m the traditional buttons Play and Stop as you will find on video recorders and camcorders etc au w to advance or rewind one frame in the current layer taa PPI to go to the first or last frame of your current layer aale to go to the previous key or next key the notion of keys will be explained in the following lessons 20 000 to modify the Framerate when playing the animation Note that this value is not necessarily used when exporting your sequences fel Press this button to play the animation in a loop M if you have chosen a sound track to accompany your project see lesson 8 page 2 press this button to play it with your project HIR the Flip button keyboard shortcut W offers you a quick look at your work It allows you to play your animation starting a few frames before the current image and stopping a few frames after the current image Then you come back to the image you were working on just before pressing the button The framerate used is the one selected in the project window popup menu The number of frames played on either side of the current image may also be set in the preview settings see the Preview Settings section of this lesson The yellow rectangle located in the graduated line underneath the buttons indicates the image and the number of the image currently displayed on the screen 4 6
329. ool used to choose whether you wish to work on lighter or darker color ranges The following four tabs Gamma Contrast Gain Brightness control how the LUT curves will be modified when a slider is moved The seven lines correspond to seven LUT curves see a above which may be modified Temperature Magenta a 1 Luminosity Red Green Blue and Alpha Top Hide HUD Pruvviurer Appiy Px Sek J 4 ol When the Gamma tab is selected moving the slider to the right increases the height of the L U T curve and therefore increases the values of Temperature Magenta Red Green for the range selected Shadows MidTones HighLights The ends of the curve are less affected by the slider modifications the modifications take place progressively When the Contrast tab is selected moving the slider to the right increases the height of the L U T curve in its high sections and decreases the curve in its low sections for the chosen range This means that the strong values of Temperature Magenta Red will be reinforced and the weak values reduced for the range of your choice moving the slider to the left produces the opposite effect The Gain tab functions in roughly the same way as the Contrast tab but the ends of the curve are gradually less affected by the slider modifications the modifications of the values of Temperature Magenta Red are the same as with the tab Contrast but work in a mo
330. option may render the preview a bit complicated when many gee particles are on the screen it is very useful to distinguish the position of low opacity particles The Quick Preview button displays a window very similar to the one which allows you to choose a predefined set of particles Here you cannot select a predefined example and any parameter modification within your effect will have a direct impact on the animation shown to you 17 4 The Rendering gt Particles Generator effect The tabs of the Particles Generator effect This is very useful to interactively view and modify a particle animation before applying the effect to all frames of a layer This button is present in all other tabs and sub tabs of the particles generator effect The Seed parameter is used to generate a random particle emission using calculation algorithms This parameter enables changing the rendering so that two effects which would be identical elsewhere are different anes ps Select the pre defined example water gt water jet and copy it to the particles generator see left TETIT In this example our particles are water droplets projected from right to left Open the quick preview window We will be able to study the influence of the various parameters available in the World tab on the movement of the latter The Gravity parameter is used to take the earth s gravity into consideration during particle movement
331. or Delete an animation key Reset the effect parameters to their initial values Duplicate or Delete Reset the effect from your FX stack Duplicate Delete A The Options menu of the effect stack may be used to delete or reset the values of all your effects Saving the settings of the FX stack We have learned how to create and save our own graphic palettes our settings of custom tools our pre defined gradients etc It is therefore only natural to proceed in the same way for our effects The Bin FX menu for each effect offers several options The Add option allows you to store your effect for later use you will first be asked to name this effect The Export option saves the current effect to a storage support The mport option recovers an effect from a storage support The Delete option deletes an effect The effects added may only be re used when re opening the program if you save the configuration when quitting Resetting the latter will delete all the effects of the user The Bin FX menu for the entire stack works in the same way but may be used to add import export or delete an entire stack FX stack and TVPaint Animation Pro projects We may be repeating ourselves but it is important to remember that it is indispensable to Apply the FX stack so your effect is taken into consideration and affects the current layer if not all you do is preview it 9 16 Working with the FX stack Mo
332. ost behavior of the layers Let s take the case of post behavior as an example pre behavior works in the same way You may choose between the options None Repeat PingPong the last option only applies to animation layers Hold These options have the same effect as those offered when stretching a layer However in the present case the layer is not stretched and the post behavior will be taken into account until the end of the animation How to use several layers at the same time If you use instances when working it could be sometimes helpful to use several layers at the same time for instance if you want to stretch a drawing and its colors You can select one layer by using the left mouse button on its main thumb If you want to select more than one layer you can use the ctrl key and select the needed layers by using the same method Of course you can also use the layers contextual menu Let s imagine we have selected the two layers _ opposite We are currently located on the fourth image of the timeline If you stretch the instance on the Edges layer by moving its tail the corresponding instance on the Colors layer will be stretched in the same way If you stretch the Edges layer by movig the right tab the Colors layer will be stretched in the same way we chose here to add empty instances If you click and slide a selected layer on the timeline the other will follow 6 18 The steps
333. ot bottom Increase a plane s size with pivot centered Once you have understood this concept positioning planes becomes much easier All you have to do is Position your pivot Place your plane at the bottom of your project Adjust the size of your plane Let s go back to our running kid plane and apply the aforementioned procedure using the following settings Position parameters X 0 Y 246 Z 0 Pivot parameters X 0 Y 130 Size parameters 75 of initial size Create an animation with the multi plane camera effect part 2 Now that your position pivot and size parameters are correctly set you may if you wish modify the angle and opacity of your plane as well as adjust the blur to be created with the focusing parameter we will discuss this again later It is also possible to select a color mode to be used for drawing the plane color tint add screen etc For our running kid plane we have chosen Angle zero Size 75 Opacity 100 and Blur 100 The Blend mode is Color The HUD color box allows you to choose the HUD color for the current plane This will help avoid any confusion when several planes are present on the screen we have chosen a reddish orange color for our running kid plane 15 8 The Rendering gt Multi plane Camera Effect Create an animation with the multiplane camera effect part 3
334. otte a a h i V 2 4 Ag 4 Dieron A Angle 45 00 Soorte Fri Statk aj Pre Behavior Mold Fired A Anim Normal i Posi Babeviot Hohi Land Hst dE The effects of the Distortion group 13 7 The Distortion gt Wave effect The Distortion gt Wave effect This effect imitates water waves as if a rock was thrown into water look at the images below The Center parameter defines the center of the effect the position where the rock hits the water The Radius parameter defines the maximal distance the waves will go The Wave parameter defines the number of visible waves The Amplitude parameter defines the maximum height of the waves The Angle and Rotation permit to animate the waves in time fs _ Once again these parameters can be partly adjusted in the project window through S the H U D The Distortion gt Tornado effect We will take advantage of this image which show clouds to study the Distortion gt Tornado effect Have you ever noticed how a whirlpool behaves in a washbasin for example The Distortion gt Tornado effect produces the same kind of effect distorting the image or the image sequence look at the images below Like the Wave effect you will need to define a Center and a Radius which can be locked with animation keys if needed gt gt B gt gt 13 8 The effects of the Distortion group The Distortion gt
335. ou may obviously combine various Copy te Layer Selection tools with each other in order to obtain the required selection Cl Lir Daia The effect of the Replace option is that drawing a new selection will Oito Brush_ automatically replace the previous selection Crop The Smooth option works in the same way as that presented in lesson 3 to draw a filled rectangle When checked the Anti Aliasing box smoothes the contours of the future selection The nvert button inverts the current selection The Clear button deletes it The four buttons which follow are used to copy or cut the pixels contained in the selection and incorporate them in a new layer or new brush animated brush or animation layer if several images were selected previously The Crop button is used to create a new project containing only the contents of the selection Your new project will contain an image or animation layer depending on whether you have selected one or several images in the current layer If your current project contains several layers you will find the same number of layers in the new project Other TVPaint Animation Pro drawing tools 1 23 The transformation tools The transformation tools It is possible to transform all or part of several images using the three tools shown opposite Panning Transform and Wrap The Panning tool is used to shift an image or a selection on the screen Papot imoge with a left
336. ou to choose how the opacity mapping will be applied in the filled shape you will Let s take for example the opacity mapping left in order to floodfill a shape created using the spline tool see below eh k umi api j e e ao 3 Depending on the options chosen at the bottom of the panel the opacity mapping will be applied without modifications 1 adapting to the shape you will floodfill 2 according to a vector of your choice 3 in a circular fashion along a vector 4 For case 3 you must draw a vector on the screen as you have done for drawing a gradient For the fourth option modify the X spline as shown in the example opposite For case 4 you must fN draw a vector on the screen Note that the option on the Y CERTAT axis is disabled sj Y i S85 Layers spatial management 3 17 Further details Some remarks for using the Opacity function The Gradients and Opacity mapping functions combined for use in a layer are very useful for creating effects of lighting or transparency independent of the background color or scenery as they are not part of it This is the case for windows tinted windows lamps projectors etc Above the opacity gradients were used on a layer to create car headlights They must no longer be modified when the background color changes which results in considerable time saving 3 18 Layers spatial management Lesson 4 Temporal management of
337. our disposal in the bin menu of your effect Above you will find the results obtained with the matrix Blurred Image Pen E A Embossed TE Special lightning Other Results 12 20 The effects of the Stylize group Lesson 13 The effects of the Distortion group In this lesson you will e Manage the symmetry effects Flip Mirror Kaleidoscope e Manage the Wrapping effects Bump Waves Tornado e Create a shadow in perspective e Animate with the Wrapping Grid effect The Distortion gt Flip effect The Distortion gt Flip effect This effect permit to flip horizontally and or vertically images in the current layer see the examples below This effect does not use or require animation keys v dii Horizontal and vertical flip Source Image Vertical flip Horizontal flip The Distortion gt Mirror effect This effect allows you to do a symmetry in relation to an axis in the current layer The Pivot X Pivot Y and Angle numeric fields allows you to define the axis the symmetry will be applied to When using animation keys the Rotation parameter reflects the number of complete rotations to be carried out before arriving at the chosen angle The Opacity parameter allows you to adjust the transparency of the reflected image gt gt gt Source Image Mirror effect opacity 50 gt If needed you can move the axis through the HUD interactively in the current project
338. ow fade in as time progresses EF Color adjuel Here is the result We used here the effect Rendered gt Simple Text you can fill in the text adjust the font the border the shadow their colors or gradients Fate ot as T i F i i i HEI A E pe This effect is very convenient because it allows to keep all the colors border font and shadow settings and to re use them with another text line for exemple if you need to do a translation a For the final touch we need the Rendered gt Lens flare effect Lens Flare effect on the check background Here on a new animation layer 9 20 Working with the FX stack Introduction to the video effects Here is the resulting timeline with the text the rainbow and the Lens Flare on separate animation layers Teel ee tna LA tae hea ee HE fS HA zj Ar PAC ata FES m i a T i i Soi te al Ce i 1 i w w fw ilai w ai Wiji ar d E Bi uy ur a bs J iE ii Fa Ta ee a Fill Working with the FX stack 9 21 Lesson 10 The effects of the Blur and Transition group In this lesson you will e Discover the various Blur effects at your disposal e Discover the various Transition effects at your disposal e Learn how to increase the transition possibilities by using the FX stack The Blur group effects The Blur group effects The b
339. pposite each coefficient is equal to 3 a fi except the central coefficient which is equal to 1 All the other coefficients are equal to zero and not visible here Using this 3x3 matrix 3 rows 3 columns will make each pixel modify itself according to its neighboring pixels The surrounding pixels will have more weight or will be more represented than the central pixel this is exactly the common process to render a blur effect Paint Here is an example In the TVPaint logo opposite 3 3 3 The white and opaque pixels outside the TVPaint logo are most often lal4 4 i surrounded by opaque white pixels lalala A weighted average of white pixels gives a white pixel 12 16 The effects of the Stylize group The Stylize gt Convolve Effect The blue pixels inside the TVPaint logo are most often surrounded by blue pixels A weighted average of blue pixels gives a blue pixel For the pixels located at the frontier between the blue and white areas the situation is a bit more complicated a weighted average of blue and white pixels gives a more or less light blue as shown below Below two zooms on the T letter of the TVPaint logo From the result above it is possible to deduce the result of the Stylise gt Convolve effect on some pixels Before applying the effect After applying the effect Here is the result on a wider area of pixels
340. project layer paper spare Anim M tm l F Post Behavior bold Last image etc and you may set the pre post behavior ost e animation mode settings etc Flip Biru lie Moose Nome ball dinear ai Tools valian x ao a ated af e ai iio 4 Rotation J Angie noo f Roatan D Bimi 75 4 jp TOU a Alend Galt KEEA Full z Hide HDT Preview We will select the running kid layer for our project Choose a tile mode Choose none in tile mode for our running kid Linke Poston jo Set the Pivot and Position parameters These parameters have the same functions as those discussed in the Keyframer effect but don t worry we will be taking another close look at them The Rendering gt Multi plane Camera Effect 15 7 The Position Pivot and Size parameters The Position Pivot and Size parameters When the Pivot parameter is zero the Position parameter represents the distance between the coordinate point X 0 Y 0 and Z 0 and the center of the source image chosen Perspective L c Front T Biati The Pivot parameter allows you to use a reference point other than the center of the source image to adjust the position and size of your plane This is very useful when you decide to modify the Size of your source image Size modifications use this pivot point as origin point below in orange N Increase a plane s size with piv
341. pup menu the pixels considered to be barrier pixels will be those with a different color to the original pixel color a different density a different color and density a different luminosity a color identical to the B color Opposite the border pixels in black and the color dispersion from the origin pixel in blue Depending on your choice in the Source popup menu the pixels considered to be barrier pixels are located on the current layer by default on all layers behind the current layer on all layers in front of the current layer 6 24 The steps to create animated graphics The inking process on all layers displayed on the screen It is therefore possible to color our running kid on a layer independent of its contours Let s take a look at the timeline below in this case the white pixels are Habepaicn following a clean uP of the animated jogs Time Line esheat TPioletts H S Now Monge IF Jl IF fcr Ts No Sound Color Wn J fis r Ji el Go to the coloring even located behind the eeunning Kid aver and choose the layer placed in front of the current layer to color the running kid in the coloring layer using the outline of the Running Kid layer It is then possible to obtain the following result Time Line MSheul Projets H Sj Nuw Mange TE Ji IF fcr Ts Mo Sound Sion Mtoe 1 a wit
342. r r 10 for i 0 to 360 ang step ang Loop to draw the 12 hour markers on the clock a cos i d b sin i d tv_Dot x a y b 0 end i h 360 12 Draw in the hours d r 2 a sin i d b cos i d tv_Line x y xta y b i m 360 60 Draw in the minutes d r r 8 a sin i d b cos i d tv_Line x y xta y b End of the example And below a few clocks which were drawn with the script The advanced functions of TV Paint Animation Pro 18 15 How to use the George scripting language Commands Description Here are some information regarding the commands that you can find on the previous page Below each command will be followed by the syntax of the variables it requires For example to draw a straight line from one point to another you must give the coordinates of the start point then the end point The syntax to draw such a line would be tv_Line x1 y1 x2 y2 0 1 The 0 1 parameter indicates that you can use either the left 0 or the right 1 mouse button This is optional by default it s always the left button that will be used To summarize Variables inside square brackets are optional The P symbol separates several options of which only one is used For instance 0 1 means either 0 or 1 tv_Circle x y r 0 1 This command allows to draw a circle with a radius r and a center located on the pixel with x y coordinates The 0 1 parameter indicates that you c
343. r effect 17 17 The tabs of the Particles Generator effect The Pre Render parameter displays the particles on the screen after the number of seconds entered here have timed out Let s go inside the framework of a typical set of particles pyrotechnic gt smoketrailc Setting the pre render value to 10 seconds will ensure you do not see the outset of the flames as they will already be well developed right from the beginning of the animation The Range parameter is used to define the emitter opening angle The particles bundle will then be emitted within the arc defined The Angle and Spin parameters are used to define the Direction in which the particles are ejected see opposite Some examples A Do not confuse Direction of emitter and Direction of the bundle of particles from the emitter In the example opposite the emitter is a straight line at an angle of 45 oblique and the direction of particles emitted is 90 to bottom right with an opening angle of 1 The New first check box when checked ensures that newly emitted particles are displayed in front of the older particles The result obtained with the predefined example text gt titre7 is similar to this option New first box not checked New first box checked All other parameters Number Life Size Velocity Weight Bounce Friction Opacity Motion randomness and Spin are the same as those encountered in the Emitters gt Parti
344. raight line from the light source to the camera lens used Sometimes the lens flare effect obtained takes the shape of blades used as the lens diaphragm see drawing below Diagram of a camera with a Examples of the resulting Photo with a true Lens Flare effect 6 blade diaphragm Lens Flare effect hexagonal effects The larger the lens the more the Lens Flares will be visible and the size is proportional to this lens when using the zoom for example We will now take a closer look at the various options proposed for this effect in order to allow you to obtain results similar to those illustrated in the image above 16 2 The effects of the Rendering group The Rendering gt Lens Flare effect When you choose the Lens Flare effect in the Rendering effects menu the first parameter to be entered is the Position of the light source and the lens The first four numeric fields are used to adjust these positions The Lens radius is measured in pixels and is used as a reference for the size of future light interference effects you wish to create ring streaks circles The Luminosity parameter controls the luminosity of all light interference visible on the screen A HUD O The position of the light source lens and lens radius may also be adjusted with the Lincar X m33 Position i F inns F E Fea Linear o x afas Lone Gente Fl St Tools F y e598 dk Radius 210 262 dl Luminaire 100
345. rant Parti ies a Purtcles a reer die Artive a d HR b gt Barai aieia rodie Pre Rendar 0a 4 mens Eran ld at Angle noot 4 mean Pain baja wie Diraetan EEN E pi ET Rotaticr 0 ii har E 1 r 1 PriF j EEL J Bi Toss ali ee Range y k ee S orein Gee ee s igir Number 100 4 4 Corni Faria Lite jior ae acto dd I Site 10 ae i ae velocity TO0 ab Hg ik Retain 0 Weight 100m a s Rangt pa d Ej aie m limig E fl i j Bounce i irs HF a Lee jier ped gg Friction i00 ae Bee ire 3 yeiocey Tage ol g priii 100 iF dp E Motion Randomness 100 a 4 Faunce r gji EF Frichon arw ggj Spin 100 el bs party 100 ued Now Firat k en Randomness 100a 0 gl Brin pan E Gc Lulick Pithitw hayley e Full Hide HUD Preaew CM itio a E 7 ore Fiun iias sip hie be Apply EA tack J Abele EM Dias The Active button either displays or hides the emitter named in the Emitters popup menu of course your particle settings are retained This function will render your task easier when working with several emitters at the same time and a large number of particles are displayed on the screen In order to understand the way the parameters described below work we recommend you make full use of the Quick preview window The Rendering gt Particles Generato
346. rawing modes 7 4 The Emboss drawing mode 7 5 The Add and Sub drawing modes 7 5 The Multiply and Screen drawing modes 7 5 The Healing drawing mode 7 6 Clipboard and spare 7 8 The clipboard 7 8 The Spare image 7 8 The Merge drawing mode 7 9 The Impressionist drawing mode 7 9 To perfectly master the drawing tools 7 10 The warpbrush 7 10 The Special brush 7 10 The Text tool 7 11 The connections 7 13 The connections Profils 7 15 Use of the brush as a drawing tool 7 18 How to use the brush modes 7 18 The Alpha Stamp and Alpha Stamp Max modes 7 19 The drawing tool panel Bin tab 7 20 The tool bin panel 7 21 Selections and cutbrushes 7 22 Use the magic wand cutbrush 7 22 Working on a specific area on the screen 7 22 The various types of selections 7 23 Complex selections and brush creation 7 23 The transformation tools 7 24 The Panning tool in the main panel 7 24 The Transform tool in the main panel 7 25 The Wrap tool on the main panel 7 26 Lesson 08 Xsheet panel and Xsheet layers How to add an sound track to your project 8 2 The XSheet Layers and XSheet Panel 8 3 Introduction and principle 8 3 The projects used in this chapter 8 4 First approach of the XSheet panel 8 4 The Timeline tab 8 5 The XSheet tab 8 5 A few simple options of the XSheet panel 8 6 How to create a XSheet layer 8 7 How to create and manage a XSheet layer 8 8 A concrete example 8 9 Manage the content of a XSheet layer 8 9 Sel
347. rce a lt l was added at its right all the layers have been merged before lying the effect fo Jo fo PP gt Before applying the effect After applying the effect Now let s study a few notions We saw that our effect was modifying the color of the pixels on the screen It is also possible to modify the pixels transparency by using the Use alpha button The effects of the Stylize group 12 19 The Stylize gt Convolve Effect In this case the calculation of the weighted averages is applied to the alpha component of the pixels too The Border popup menu allows to choose how the pixels at the border of the image will be calculated The pixels located at the border of your image don t have neighboring pixels You can choose to use as neighboring pixels Black pixels none option Pixels resulting from a symetry of your image mirror option Pixels resulting from reproduction of the image tile option Pixels resulting from reproduction of the last first line or column of pixels repeat option The multiplying coefficient allows to multiply all the coefficients of the matix by the same value It does not change anything to your picture if all non zero coefficients of your matrix are the same Otherwise your convolution effect will be more or less pronounced Some preset examples Now that you have some basis about the convolution matrix you can try to modify the numerous matrices at y
348. re All changes to the numeric fields or using the mini sliders will be taken into account and displayed interactively on the screen for several seconds in order to allow you to view the result of changes and settings made Now all that is left is to apply the text to the layer in the location of your choice Below you will find a detailed description of the parameters at your disposal for this tool The first popup menu is used to select the font best suited to your project amongst those installed on your operating system The two arrows are used to quickly scroll through the list of fonts available The popup menus Script and Style are used to select the character type to be used occidental oriental Greek etc and their style bold italic underlined amp format for PC l pO The fonts used by TVPaint Animation Pro are of the ttf True Type Font The Size variable defines the font size in pixels The XScale variable manages the font width The Space variable defines the space between characters a negative value overlaps the characters The talic variable modifies the inclination applied to characters The Rotate variable is used to increase or decrease the angle formed between the text and the horizontal axis The Track variable adapts the space between characters but this time in proportion to the size of each letter in the text field The Opacity variable defines the
349. re details about the FX stack Also note that when you save a project as well as saving the layers their position and the associated parameters Position Duration Pre Post Behavior etc you also save the current effects stack This makes it possible to keep a complete and intact animation and the effect stack necessary for your finishing touches Useful isn t it gt When you work with several projects at the same time note that each w f project has its own effect stack Introduction to the video effects A lot of notions here need a good understanding of the multiple FX and FX stack concepts So it is advised to read the last chapters before beginning with this one Please note that we will only mention here the function of the effects and their place in the FX stack The parameters and options of the effects will be described deeply from lesson 11 to lesson 17 In this section we will create a small opening sequence for a weather report Do to so we have several video sequences at our disposal The first one with a forest another one with a sunset and the last one with some clouds pee ee oa Begin by importing those sequences in your project Resize them if it is necessary note that the sequences can be directly imported from your camera into the software by using the Video Grabber panel Don t forget to use a project with fields if your video sequences are fielded Move them inside your timeline a
350. re different Grain modes available which are shown below silk soft medium hard Using the mask Using the mask is very handy when handling the layers It enables you to draw on the layer of your choice the opaque pixels of another layer in exactly the same place In this way it is possible for example to modify the texture of a drawing without changing its shape see below 3 14 Layers spatial management Further details How to proceed First of all create two layers in the timeline then draw the little red man shown above in one of them Then enable the Mask for this layer to do this click on the little gray rectangle in the second column of the timeline on the current layer The little gray rectangle must turn yellow Hide the layer with the little red man then move to the empty layer Any drawing will then be limited to the opaque areas of the layer containing the little red man For example drawing a filled rectangle with color gradient and use of a paper on the screen will display image 1 drawing with drawing tools gradients papers and specific modes will obtain the results 2 and 3 It is possible to flip the mask and only draw on the transparent areas of the layer containing the initial little man examples 4 and 5 below To do this proceed as described above and click on the button nvert the mask indicated in the following diagram this
351. re subtle and progressive manner The effects of the Brightness tab are similar to the Gamma tab but the modifications are not applied in a progressive fashion due to the identical attribution from one end of the curve to the other 11 10 The effects of the Color and Keying groups The effects in the Color menu The Color gt Scan Cleaner effect This effect is used to clean up a scanned image drawn by hand Let s take a look at the sketch below to the left This effect will not only make the light pixels of the image transparent and color the remaining pixels black 1 but will also remove unwanted pencil marks 2 ink high opacity after application of the ofiect paper sheet low opacity after application of the effect luminosity The Colors gt Image Source effect i It is necessary to know a few effects of the Stylize group like Drop Shadow Add Border or Lumix in order to master the Image Source effect perfectly So it will be studied at the end of lesson 12 The effects of the Color and Keying groups 11 11 The effects of the Keying menu The effects of the Keying menu The Keying menu contains all effects which are used to make a color on the screen transparent These effects are sometimes called cut out and incrustation effects The Keying gt Luma Keyer effect The Luma Keyer effect is used to render pixels transparent according to their luminosity
352. remain opaque Those which are progressively made transparent Those which will be completely transparent Bi It is recommended to combine the Luma Keyer effect in a multiple FX stack S with the Colors gt Histogram or the Colors gt Slider effects to be able to precisely adjust pixel transparency use the parameters relative to the alpha component and remove the gray aspect light of semi transparent pixels 11 12 The effects of the Color and Keying groups The effects of the Keying menu The effects Keying gt Luma Keyer and Colors gt Scan Cleaner change the opacity of the pixels differently the Luma Keyer doesn t remove the unwanted pencil marks The Scan Cleaner change the color of the pixels and the Luma Keyer doesn t HF PE oike Samni The Color Keyer effect uses the same principle as the Luma Progresa Prose FF Keyer effect It deletes the selected color on the image or digib video footage of your choice 4 lbl Itis no longer required to concentrate on pixel luminosity but on the entire color Full Hide HU Freee Two types of parameters may be locked with a key Tolerance and Smooth In the FX stack above we see the higher the value of the Tolerance parameter the more colors close to blue will be deleted The higher the value of the Smooth parameter the less abrupt the transition between opaque and transparent pixels will be Opposite most of the bluish colors of the sky and c
353. rence images for our examples VPa nt N The running kid and the TVPaint logo are located over different background layers The Stylize gt Glow effect It is possible to create an aura around a text or any other image containing transparent pixels The Width Height Color and Opacity of this aura may change in time thanks to the key system TVPaint TVPaint The Stylize gt Grain effect This effect adds a noise polychromatic or monochromatic to the image or video footage of your choice The Size parameter is used to set the size of the grains the Range parameter controls their distance It is also possible to adjust their color using the parameters Red Variation Green Variation and Blue Variation as well as modify their transparency If a logo is placed in front of a filmed sequence application of a light noise on the logo helps integrate it into the sequence and minimize the computer look of the latter The noise effect may also be used to smudge an image or drawing in a different way than a blur effect o gt Original image Monochromatic noise Polychromatic noise 12 2 The effects of the Stylize group The Stylize gt Grain effect TVPaint TVPaint 1 VPaint Original image Blue polychromatic noise Noise with larger grain size The Stylize gt Bevel effect This effect is used to give volume to your logos or drawings The Mode popup menu is used to choose betwee
354. rent image These are referred to as source images or footages Several choices are available for the so called source images or video footage the project of your choice the layer of your choice the current brush or animated brush the spare image the paper the current display the FX stack Ad FX 7 Oplivns T Bin T w v Lum Progress Pronte Pre Aehavior Holti First Anin Hormial xj Prost Aehawor Holt Lasi mai e 1 Flip Hone gt Luma From Project paletie typ v Fe Stack Pre Dehavior Hold first Current Layer Anim Moral Display Post Dehavior Hold Last Spare oseto ss pn Paper riip None a Custom Brush Full r Hide HUD Pridew v Layer List Apply FX Stack J ProjectList gt The choice FX stack will use the current image with the effects of the FX stack applied as Source Image before applying the parameters set for the Source Image The choice Current layer allows you to apply the effect from the current layer The choice Display allows you to apply on the current layer the effect from the footage viewed when playing your project the effect will be that all layers appear to be merged while the hidden layers are not taken into account You may also choose to use the Spare Image or Paper if they are available When choosing another project layer or brush you may adjust the Pre and Post Behavior the position and the animation mode the number n of the Position param
355. rent project only its aspect in the project window will be different The Remote Control The icon in the top right hand corner of the current project window is a used to hide display the viewing commands described previously iat a tirma If required it is possible to display some of these buttons in a separate wis os ee window referred to as Remote control which is accessible via the Windows main menu The buttons containing numbers are used to define the play frame rate in frames per second Makin fi e Makova St Other movement methods You may use the timeline or project window to move within the project To do this just click and slide on one of the rectangles shown below nef oe gt Oisptay ow lo la 100 00 hi Mark in q Flip te an geet et 30 000 Mark Qul A 1 Temporal management of layers 4 7 Animation layers Time Lino Sheet Prajects e i 0O Dial clouds a PL Fai a p a gm F i li H S New Marga oF Amort Y e aa os T a E c 1 3 5 7 3 11 E Sigl ams JaLe E Biat a w mob oas vall 10 id a moks fall 109 aL et e T Ne Sama reru None F Frame 7 aut EESE If you use the left mouse button you change the image If you use the right mouse button you return automatically to the original image when releasing the button
356. resented by the symbol will be created automatically The timeline is modified as below WE Nis Mary E ha Gallo ee ee eee ee i E lins s a m a l e E M M a oM MH E BO iran TR aT a ES EE ee ee a 3 H i f slm ea Samm Gum Fine 20 Note that by sliding along the timeline using the e and keys of the keyboard or pressing the Play button allows you to view the progress of the chosen effect from the first to the last frame Now select all frames of the layer and apply the FX stack This time application of the effect stack will modify progression of the fade effect in time see following images TVPaint Animation Pro has calculated an effect with a progressing position parameter for the intermediate frames To sum up an animation key is a sort of adjustable time parameter lock which sets the value chosen by the user to a precise point in the timeline However the drawing tool parameters vary dynamically according to the user s direct action on the project and may therefore not be assimilated to animation keys 9 6 Working with the FX stack Working with animation keys Manage the effect s progress You have probably noticed the Progress button under the name of each effect This button is used to manage the speed at which the chosen effect will be carried out Progress Profile Click on the Progress butt
357. roach of TVPaint Animation Pro After having followed the installation instructions in the Start up guide you may now start TVPaint Animation Pro To do this proceed as follows Double click on the desktop icon or use the start menu for Windows users Double click on the applications folder icon or dock icon for Mac OS X users The TVPaint Animation Pro program and most of the associated files are saved in the program directory of your operating system To use TVPaint Animation Pro you may choose between the mouse or stylus The latter is more appropriate for persons wishing to have that freehand design feeling The various program panels When the program is started the following screen appears This screen enables selection of your future workspace and managing all your configurations Configuration default New Copy Delete Template Mone From File x VGA VGA T Yntited 01 ooo idth a Aspect Ratio 1 000 Height 490 a Frame Rate 30 000 Field Progressive w start sd cancel The various options available on this screen will be discussed in further detail elsewhere in this lesson For the moment simply click on OK Once the program has loaded the following image illustrates what your screen will be like for a display resolution of 1280 x 1024 pixels 1 2 First approach of TVPaint Animation Pro The various program panels a ns i pee kilaj RA y ai TEs Te
358. rogram is TVPaint Animation Pro will surround the name of the software with single quotation marks The arrays As in other programmation languages George can create and use arrays with one two or more dimensions To create an array you only need to add parentheses or square brackets after the name of a variable You can use either parentheses or square brackets For instance MyArray i ou MyArray i represent the same array with one dimension MyArray i j ou MyArray i j represent the same array with two dimensions MyArray i j k ou MyArray i j k represent the same array with three dimensions And so on gt With the George language it is not necessary to indicate or declare the dimension Es oor the number of elements before using an array In the exemple below an array called co or with one dimension was created It contains four elements Magenta Cyan Yellow and Black We used a loop to display its content color 1 Magenta color 2 Cyan color 3 Yellow color 4 Black For i 1 To 4 tv_warn color i displays each color Magenta Cyan Yellow and Black in a dialog box End The advanced functions of TV Paint Animation Pro 18 21 How to use the George scripting language Functions and procedures Let s assume that you are writing a script which needs some instructions conditionnal tests etc to be
359. roject Load e none shiftm none 7 none shiftn File Project New none shito Brush Toggle Handle Corner none shiftp Tools Pantograph Set none shiftq TVPaint Animation Quit braquet Image Flip Horizontally shiftr none Interface Toggle Coordinates shifts File Project Save Panel shitt none none shiftu Undo Multi Redo _ none shiftv Zoom Show full page none shiftw File Project Close none shiftx Brush Double Width none shifty Undo Multi Redo Image Flip Vertically shiftz Brush Rotate 90 none ctrl a TVPaint Animation Select All none ctrl b none none ctrl c TVPaint Animation Copy Selection none ctrl d TVPaint Animation Magic Number none ctrl e Tools Brush Previous none ctrl f Layer Slide To equal Layer Toggle Display All ctrl g none none ctrl j none a none ctrl k Interface Configure Keyboard u none ctrl Layer Light Table Mode e none ctrl n Layer New a none ctrl o Project Hide Other f1 TVPaint Animation Help ctrl p Project Show All f2 Drawing Mode 01 Color ctrl q none f3 Drawing Mode 02 Behind ctrl r none f4 Drawing Mode 03 Erase ctrl s Layer Select Image From Keys f5 Drawing Mode 04 Panto ctrl t none f6 Drawing Mode 05 Merge ctrl u none f7 Drawing Mode 06 Shade A 10 Appendix The available keyboard shorcuts and commands
360. rreful when you save a custom panel the papers linked to your tools are not The options relative to the custom panels are numerous Create a new panel a new button grab a tool with colors call a George script import and export a panel use a Plug in use the TVPaint commands etc They are all described in lesson 18 of this manual Other TVPaint Animation Pro drawing tools 1 21 Selections and cutbrushes Selections and cutbrushes Use the magic wand cutbrush S z Aolo a In lesson 4 we saw that it is possible to cut a rectangular polygonal or Eege TIE freehand brush It is also possible to use the Magic wand cutbrush Ser al eh am ee jae TASAN IBID 0 4 R Bse Let s take a closer look at this function don t worry it s no sorcery When using the Floodfill tool the boundary points not filled in are defined and the other points are colored see lesson 6 adjustment of shape settings The same applies to our magic wand except that the floodfill area of the image becomes the current brush The current brush may therefore take all kinds of shapes For example by adding the Expand and Range parameters it is easy to obtain the following two brushes I gt gt Original image Brush cutout Working on a specific area on the screen Selecting an area of the screen will allow you to work without changing anything in the area of the screen not selected For example in the image below w
361. rrent project in an other file format 4 You can also use the following shortcuts instead of the contextual menu s7 Hide other projects Ctrl O SB ShowAll Project Ctrl P Show the Timeline tab Ctrl 1 Show the XSheet tab Ctrl 2 Show the Project tab Ctrl 3 Once you will have mastered the project tab it will be easy for you to turn the situation described on the last page into something clean functionnal and ready to use rat ee oe ee ee oe ee Pe oe oe ee Pa Aue od At this state you only have to nn click on a thumbnail in order to en ati begin your work on the corresponding project SE a Biy The project tab is especially designed for those who need to use at the same S time several sequences being part of a same animation Each sequence is easily available Handling TVPaint projects 5 13 Video grabber Video grabber It is sometimes useful to refer to video footage to create the drawings necessary for an animation For this reason it is possible to enter a video directly into the software TVPaint Animation Pro is compatible with WDM standard equipment without having to install specific drivers or plugins For information WDM devices are Windows Device Manager devices used by most WebCam and DV format camcorders On Mac OS X TVPaint Animation Pro is compatible with QuickTime devices To grab video footage you must
362. rtain repetitive shapes such as a brick wall Proceed as follows Floodfill in the current layer gray blob with a dark gray color Open the Paper window which is accessible in the Windows main menu or with a right click on the Papers icon on the tool bar Select any type of wall in the papers window A he 7 Er F iow F Fou iEn Sa seer Pe n Me s Wa i a a i j m i F ij i FEJ g m i Sal j J q m m 7 i a i F n an ae a ag ra TFE i rh it P F Apam i al h i re 0 he TR A 1E aT I ie ff e F yi g j a4 ri Ee j ia Sy j H Weavo 9 WoaveWicke Wood Hard Wood Son Hardness 100 a Invert Change A color for a light color close to white Size me Angie 000 4 Finy Floodfill in the gray blob layer using this color You will note that the paper you have chosen is used as a pattern to paint the layer surface see drawing above Our brick wall has been created and the gray blob layer may now be renamed brick wall Layers spatial management 3 5 Layers and timeline Soften the contours of a surface EAFA mE Let s continue our drawing check that the brick wall is the current layer deselect the function Paper on the tool bar Smooth 0 00 select the Rectangle Fill shape in the main menu then the Gpacity 00 00 Mechanical Pencil icon in the tool panel Ad
363. rticular for studying the drawing modes You will notice that the RGB information is indicated at the bottom of the panel you can try to get as close as possible to them A right click on the same window enables the choice of other ranges the colors of which vary according to hue luminosity and saturation or according to the intensity of the colors red green and blue Now click inside the rectangle in the project window and you will obtain the result shown opposite Recover a color from the screen Redo and undo m ss Itis possible to recover a color among those present in the ge current drawing in order to work with it again To do this either click on the A color on the diagram opposite the main color is marked with a circle or on the Color Picker icon The cursor of the mouse or tablet appears with a question mark You may then point the cursor wherever you want the color A will change into the color you point at The shortcut for this action is the key We will now draw the roof of our house For this purpose you may use the Line tool and the Floodfill tool However attention must be paid not to leave any holes before floodfilling in a surface or the entire screen will be floodfilled Your turn now You should be able to draw the picture opposite without any trouble Drawing basics 2 3 Your first drawing Nevertheless if you do not like the result you can
364. s also another way to create paths follow the movement of the pixels in an animation in time To do this you use the Pixel tracker panel This panel is accessible in the effects requiring use of paths in the Too s popup menu or directly via the Windows main menu see the corresponding window below We will now try to create a path from an eye movement of the Running Kid or the blue screened character see below When a path is created we may for example re use it with the AutoPaint effect and the pen tool in smooth mode to create a blur on it It is also possible to use a lighting effect to create a luminous spot following the movement of Running Kid etc Ret 290 00 i TrackHi 4500 et Curent i Laver Curent by win jfi Moa aS Mut F4 Ja 290 09 Reis i710 T Reay ionoo 4 Rey iad0n 4 Rei noo a Roiw poon e RerH eou a Feet 20 00 a OS AT be w O iracki 40 000 a Track H 0 itaference Satie F Feterante Sale j beheld egg MEDA cna Channel Roa Tj Arcuri lz Tj Aniar Aloo F clack Rew track Pixel Tracker with the Running Kid path created from pixel tracking at eye level Opposite the path of the eye was re used with Omni lighting The effects of the Motion and Paint groups management of the paths 14 7 The Pixel Tracker This is how to use the Pixel Tracker panel In the first section you must define the layer on wh
365. s in the form of a gray rectangle This will be studied in greater detail at the end of this lesson The l button displays all the planes in the perspective view see page 10 The popup menus of each window allow you to customize your viewing options left right top bottom front back camera and perspective The front and back views are not in perspective If you choose to use them remember that you are viewing the various planes orthogonally projected on the Oxy plane see next page 15 4 The Rendering gt Multi plane Camera Effect Positioning in space Positioning in space Of course we will not be working in the same way as with a 3D software but it is still important to know your position in space when working with this effect Compliant with the diagram below The crosses visible on the 3D view represent the coordinate point X 0 Y 0 Z 0 which will be used as our reference point when positioning our camera and objects mountain forest etc The indications X Y and Z indicate the direction of the orientation of the camera in space Al FX Optinn at w V Mut Plane Camera The multiplane camera effect has two tabs Progress Pronle m The View tab relative to the camera and its setting parameters Dirin Lita y 7 s iF oosa afin el The Planes tab relative to superimposed planes notation G Angie u o a4 b making up the final animation rotamer fi ih
366. s shown below and import the music A color has been added to the layers to make them more recognizable LEL wj ifii Fine Line Sheel Provects HS Ni Mong Auto Fit Uh PERONON H Treo E m S i m oF Dun j amooo a bi _ a ka r a ae Gio oo i E iti ara jy 000 0006 0006 20 00 001 210 F Sound wa ee Check v BM Tene coos 00 00 0000 ja fs eis You should have three overlapped layers look at red areas in the timeline above This will help us to use the transition effects Above a transition effect has been applied on the first animation layer of the timeline The zoom factor of the timeline has been increased to make it more visible aohoooh Oboe IO ndiii Working with the FX stack 9 17 Introduction to the video effects UO 2 a Ota RERI i e p 4 af pd l D ed te pees jae ee a p H See a ee ee ed 4 Ss pE ee pipe N Oe Si ea i a no D a j a e ee po 00 1 2 00 o podia 00 00 1210 on0001320 ee ee Ee ee ogogoro bonoo100 odomoid iw a Po is o onto00 i Transition Here is the resulting transition To add a personal touch to our weather report it is possible to use several effects Below the Blur gt Radial Blur effect was used Therefore the animated sequence appear progressively on screen You can easily make butterflies fly in front of the
367. s the choice and Configure setting of a video and audio codec click on the Config Mama Goda IMoiMoni ON tHe Nines button to display the corresponding settings panel Handling TVPaint projects 5 9 Export files The codecs present in the popup menus and their configuration options are those installed in your operating system A PON _ In order to save a TVPaint Animation Pro project in DVD format you must have a MPEG 2 encoder codec installed in your operating system When required and depending on the various formats of export you may need to set the following option parameters Mode You may choose to export your work in the form of images or a video with a limited palette 8 bits 256 colors a large palette 24 bits 16 777 216 colors a palette which takes into account the pixel transparency 32 bits a palette with no color data but only pixel transparency a mask The palette In the case of a limited color palette you may choose to use A gray scale palette The program palette located in the Bin tab of the palette panel A global quantized palette to be used for all frames of your footage or animation A local quantized palette which is modified for each frame of an animation The number of colors You may also choose a precise number of colors between 2 and 256 to do this you must first choose one of the two quantized palettes Dither The Dither button is used to disperse the pixels
368. s under 100 will darken the image values higher than 100 will brighten it Omni lighting lights up a circular area of your choice similar to a projector located on an axis perpendicular to the image The parameters to be set are color lighting intensity center and radius of the circular area as well as altitude of the virtual projector Omni projector diagram Omni HUD Omni lighting The effects of the Rendering group 16 9 The Rendering gt Lighting effect Spot lighting lights up the image similar to a tilted projector Two position parameters are available for this mode which allow you to adjust the position of the light source as well as its direction k a spot ore Spotz Det Spot projector diagram Spot HUD Spot lighting S For many of the parameters described above the settings may be made S directly on the screen don t forget to display the HUD Spot and Omni lighting have a profile editor which works similarly to that of the drawing tools see lesson 2 for more details Omni profile Spata art With the Light popup menu it is possible to use several light sources regardless of type as well as to rename duplicate or delete them This is how our cave may be lit up in various ways Spal Gre ply Bre This Lighting effect only applies to the opaque pixels of the current layer To obtain the examples above it is therefore necessary to first merge the layers of
369. sides of the XSheet tab can be adjusted by dragging the middle with your project Do not confuse the source columns on the right part of the XSheet tab and the layers columns on the left part of the XSheet tab The source columns are used to manage the content of the XSheet layers and are not visible in the timeline whereas the layers columns are also visible in the timeline see below PECETE T ala Tei PRRP m eS J r f F iT ii Layers columns Source columns for XSheet Layers 8 8 The XSheet Layers and Panel The XSheet Layers and XSheet Panel A concrete example If you have followed this lesson from the beginning you should have two projects on the TVPaint Animation Pro screen The project Running Kid tvp and a new project called Untilted 01 containing an XSheet layer You can take a look at the Project tab to check tt The project Untitled 01 has an XSheet layer see below Ww Hohea Layer a ma LT Di Tng E Bie 214 0274 Fran Foe HiH For Apert 1 005 FH FFER PE E In the project called Untilted 01 we added the project Running Kid tvp as source as shown below Now we only have to add some images from our source into the XSheet layer Mime Line Sheet Pryjects PARERE aen ee Xm al aT Mame Kig Kid Type Project x Project CAbuecuments mi A Md pes Here agai
370. son for the ayer notion At the moment you release the button the layer goes back to its initial position This is very useful when you are working with a large number of layers and you do not know which one is enabled This function is called Shaker and is accessible with the keyboard shortcut A A simple touch on this key will make your current layer shake and reposition it immediately with the aim to rapidly view the current layer Drawing basics 2 5 Your first drawing Notion of pixel opacity After having zoomed to approximately 2000 it is to be noted that the pixels in the center of the sun are somehow yellower than those on the outside In reality the pixels making up our sun are all yellow However the pixels in the center are less transparent or more opaque than those on the outside You will notice that the pixels of the sun let the colors of the check background through with more or less intensity while the pixels of the house are completely opaque it is impossible to see the check background through the house R G B and H S L color systems Open the Slider tab of the color picker It is possible to define a color from its components RGB Red Green Blue or from the HSL system Hue Saturation Luminosity You may move the sliders to obtain the desired color or use numeric values Select the color blue to continue the drawing Hue R101 6 216 8 21 If the Sliders tab of
371. ssly one of the most used effects in TVPaint Animation Pro It is found in the Effect gt Motion main menu It is used to move all kinds of drawings on the screen To use the Keyframer you must define the following The object to be moved on the screen brush layer spare image paper The path taken by the object on the screen using animation keys or pre defined paths The rotations to be applied to this object using keys The motion blurs and if required pre and post behavior A To start our study of the Keyframer we have created a TVPaint brush 320 100 pixels as shown opposite The word TVPaint is written in black on a transparent background g In some of the images hereafter the background chosen is gray so that you can see the white pixels of the HUD 1 example movement zoom and motion blur We will now move the TVPaint brush on the screen am ms i feet a Pert Linear T oog T Postion poet VGA formal with SO images 1 animlayer 1st kay 1st frame position A 150 Y 240 Z 0 2nd key 50h fame osition X 790 Y 240 Z 0 nt Go to the Render tab and select the custom brush as source Go back to the Position tab Place the TVPaint brush outside the current project to the left using the HUD see below and then create an animation key for the position variable at the beginning of the layer Now create an animation key for the Pos
372. stortion gt Displacement Mapping Effect 13 10 The Distortion gt Wrapping Grid effect 13 11 The Distortion gt Optical Flow effect 13 15 Lesson 14 The effects of the Motion and Paint groups The Paint gt AutoPaint effect 14 2 Management of Paths 14 4 The Path recorder 14 4 The Path manager 14 5 Save paths 14 6 The Pixel Tracker 14 7 The Motion gt Keyframer effect 14 9 1st example movement zoom and motion blur 14 9 2nd example Pitch Heading Bank and Pivot 14 11 3rd example 14 13 4th example 14 15 The Motion gt Stabilization effects 14 16 The Motion gt Stabilization 1 point effect 14 16 The Motion gt Stabilization 2 points effect 14 17 Lesson 15 The Motion gt Multiplane Camera effect The concept 15 2 The blur caused by focusing 15 2 Editing table and computer multi plane camera 15 3 The project used in this chapter 15 3 3D views 15 4 Positioning in space 15 5 The View tab 15 5 The Planes tab 15 6 Create an animation with the multi plane camera effect part 1 15 7 The Position Pivot and Size parameters 15 8 Create an animation with the multi plane camera effect part 2 15 8 Create an animation with the multi plane camera effect part 3 15 9 Creating movement move the camera 15 10 Create and manage focusing blurs 15 10 Make the kid run 15 12 The multi plane camera wizard 15 12 Other situations 15 14 Lesson 16 The effects of the Rendering group The Rendering gt Lens Flare effect 16
373. studied in the lesson 6 All you need to know here is that the first image is identically reproduced several time in the timeline 4 8 Temporal management of layers Animation layers Select and erase the contents of the images in an Animation Layer Select the sun as current brush As with the cloud it is now possible to make the sun move up in the sky and leave the screen However before using the brush the sun must be erased in every frame of our sun animation layer This may be done with the button on the main panel for all images one after the other but this may be too time consuming when working on long animated sequences The trick is to select all images of the layer using the option Select all in the contextual menu keyboard shortcut Ctri A Your timeline must be displayed as shown below a light yellow rectangle is present underneath the selected images Pressing the button will erase the contents of all selected images in the layer On It is possible to only select a part of the layer by clicking on and sliding from a h the first image to be selected to the last Our instance has been replaced by empty images you may now make your sun move as you did for the cloud Tire Line XSheal Projects heres AFi Fl z A E Pi L00 i T 5 1 th b orase fal 100 dL wan mjok fajL 1w J aj m P NoSound None iFrame
374. t Let s go back to our planet image used in previous lessons We ll assume that your cartoon is finished Now you want to scroll the list of participants in the form of end credits We ll assume that this list is contained in another project much higher than the one of your planet opposite Pay attention that the text is written on a transparent background then select Background None in the timeline of this second project This is how to scroll the list from bottom to top In the Rendering tab select the Projects list as source and then the name of the project containing the list of participants Place two keys at the beginning and the end of the animation layer with the position parameters close to the illustration on the following page The effects of the Motion and Paint groups management of the paths 14 13 The Motion gt Keyframer effect Apply the FX stack It s done The list moves from the bottom to the top as intended Thanks to the Keyframer anything may be moved on the screen a brush another project the layer of your choice the spare image the current image etc You simply choose what you want in the Source popup menu of the Rendering tab For example exchange the current brush with the butterfly animated brush in the Bin tab This animated brush may also be moved as you wish and why not follow one of your pre recorded paths Below our butterfly lands on th
375. t RotoTracking effect The Rendering gt RotoTracking effect e Presentation and concept The RotoTracking effect is first of all a cut out effect like the Chromakey Colorkey or Lumakey effect It can also be used to animate drawings in way comparable to those you can encounter in vector based animation softwares Here is the principle of this effect the RotoTracking use one or several closed splines called B splines and allow you to change their shape in time thanks to the key system of the FX stack Once the effect is applied the area inside or outside the spline becomes transparent e Two examples This effect is very usefull when the other keying effects are unable to cut out a picture or a movie sequence properly On the picture below we see a red squirrel walking on red and brown leaves As the leaves colors are very close to the squirrel color the common keying effects will not allow you to cut out the squirrel correctly In that case it is advised to use the rototracking effect RotoTracking F background al Original picture a r mr RotoTracking spline Applied result The RotoTracking allows also to draw and animate quickly The control points of the spline can evolve softly from a position to another one As a consequence the shape of the whole spline will evolve in time too In the example above a dolphin has been drawn with the rototracking effect The control points are colore
376. t Animation Pro 18 9 How to use the plug ins To preview your animation using the LightTable set the Layer opacity to half or a bit less set the previous frame color to none and tweak the level sliders of the 1 2 3 5 6 previous frames to make them visible see below SY Of course you can have a display with the video and the LightTable enabled s gt simultaneously EI i E Y OW Myr Oar j E g is zi i f Pe clin T an hes Se k See a ee ee es eee eee ee eee ee It is advised always to close your Video Grabber and Video Canon panels before quitting the software The Direct Show plug in DirectShow is an application programming interface from Microsoft which contains a set of software librairies It is a component of DirectX and allows to manage multimedia files The DirectShow Plug in provides support for USB SCSI FireWire compatible hardwares in theory all Windows Driver Mode WDM compatible hardwares 18 10 The advanced functions of TV Paint Animation Pro How to use the plug ins The WaveForm plug in Generally speaking an oscilloscope is an electrical equipement which allows to control and measure periodic signal voltages If it is calibrated in order to receive video signals it is also called WaveForm monitor In the audiovisual environment they are often used to check if the transmitted video signal has its characteristics in conformit
377. t Selection 333 TVPaint Animation Select All 334 TVPaint Animation Delete Selection 335 Color Up 336 Color Down 337 Color Right 338 Color Left 339 Color Invert A B 340 Color Hue lt lt 341 Color Hue gt gt 342 Color Saturation 343 Color Saturation 344 Color Luminosity 345 Color Luminosity 346 Color Red Color Red Color Green Color Green Color Blue Color Blue Gradient Next Gradient Previous Gradient Load Gradient Save Gradient Default Gradient Invert Grid Toggle Grid Snap Grid Display Guides Toggle Guides Snap Guides Display Guides Add Guides Remove Display Show SafeArea Display Show FieldChart Display Show Stencil Display Show Selection Display Show Paper Grab Video Input Grab Switch Modes Grab Grab Length Grab Increase Grab Length Grab Decrease Grab Length BookMarks Set BookMarks Clear BookMarks Toggle BookMarks Next BookMarks Previous Appendix A 9 The available keyboard shorcuts and commands Shortcuts a Zoom Shake ctrl v TVPaint Animation Paste b Brush Toggle CutBrush ctrl w none C Brush Rotate ctrl x TVPaint Animation Cut d Shape Freehand Selection e Tools Brush Next ctrl y Brush Flip Vertically f Shape Flood Fill ctrl z Undo Last Action g Grid Toggle 0 Interface Toggle Layer Panel h Brush Halve Size 1 Zoom Scro
378. t files and have a grg extension It is possible to edit or create them with any text editor like Notepad from Microsoft Windows or Text Edit from Mac OS X The scripts are in theory working on the both standards PC and Macintosh whatever the computer was used to create them Namie Pobystar gry To use one of the George Scripts at your disposal just follow the commer i O steps below icon e open a custom panel List Tool scolar Create anew button on this panel 0 Script Poida gry select the action Select a script for this button 1 None select a file with a grg extension in the file requester F Empi 3 rab i Once finished if you click on the just created button the George ay Script will then be launched a mpi 6 Empi T Erriphy 8 Empi g Erraji W Cantel TORETE At every moment you can stop the execution of a George Script by using the mam ANB POW aie LINE 12 Esc key bree A window indicating on which line the execution of the script was stopped should popup Once a George Script has finished its programmed tasks the Undo option of the TVPaint Animation Pro main panel allows to cancel all the changes it has generated 18 12 The advanced functions of TV Paint Animation Pro How to use the George scripting language A few examples of George Scripts Often George Scripts need an action from the user in order to be launched For instance The George Script
379. t is similar to the previous one regarding its principle and its working However it requires two Origin points and two Destination points The Stabilization 1 point permitted to adjust horizontal and vertical camera shakes Using the Stabilization 2 points tends to fix not only the shakes on X and Y axis but also the slight rotation or Zoom movements there can be on Z axis The effect considers the distance and the angle between the Origin points which improve the process and make it more efficient Acid Fs Opbon Wl Stabilization 3 Points Pegasas Profle A Timeat MX e333 0 Taoa v afno e Orie Linear w Xm fara enr oe Tonis vama e Linear X g 23 3d ii Devingient vake seston aa x aE Tonis Tj Y TEE Mode gene e Below the cameraman has rotated a little bit the camera while shooting the sequence If you define two origin and two destination points in the Motion gt Stabilisation 2 points effect and check the Rotation box the effect will then calculate the x rotation angle of the image and makes the Source and Destination points coincide see below at the extremity of the arrows 2 Origin points Rotation moves of the camera 2 Destination points If the camera has zoomed a little bit while the sequence was recorded you will have to use the same process and check the Scale button As we did for the effect Motion gt Stabilisation 1 point you can check the fill button to remove
380. t mouse button to draw a rectangle while pressing the Ctrl key You will then be able to move at the same time all the points located in the rectangular area i By clicking on the little padlock buttons it is possible to lock your control points in space Y mj so that they cannot be moved along the axis or axes of your choice This enables in particular avoiding untimely movement The locked points may be subject to animation keys and intermediate points in time may be created from the locked points The animation keys influence the position of the points in time and not in space 16 16 The effects of the Rendering group The Rendering gt RotoTracking effect A The third icon allows to add new control points on the B spline Once activated you will note that if you drag your mouse near the B spline a small cross appears see below It means that you can create a new control point A The fourth icon allows to delete the control points of your B spline You only need to use the left mouse button on the point of your choice to do so A The fifth icon allows to modify the value of the edge of a point To do so you only have to select this icon and drag n drop a control point of your spline You can also use the numerical field of the edge parameter see below UU mf yos g aF Edge o Charn I0 ak lt Modifying the edge parameter for a control point allows to change the
381. tails A This icon offers you access to more complex Splines By default it is possible to trace multi point splines The latter are also referred to as B zier Splines by mathematicians By modifying the options in the Shape Settings window it is also possible to draw three point splines see following section To trace a multi point spline in your project window with a few clicks or presses with the stylus on the current project window you can construct a broken yellow line interspersed with knots Debate Point bse Piil This line is not directly integrated in the drawing The option Apply spline or the close Spline keyboard shortcut Enter is required to obtain a result a right click calls up the contextual menu shown opposite Mew Sigh lite Apply Saline Add i bin The advantage of this tool is that it allows to work on the knots A left click on one of the knots followed by a movement of the stylus allows you to move or edit the spline line of the broken line at this point In the latter case the tangental lines of the spline appear see the red spline in the diagram below For more precision the Ctrl key allows you to work on the line of your choice without influencing the position of the second You may also move the spline globally by pressing Ctrl left click outside the spline Finally it is also possible to close the spline via the option in the contextual menu AYA described above
382. te a new button in this panel Select the plug in you need as action to do for this button The panel relative to the plug in will then be visible once you click on the corresponding button The Canon Plug in is available only if you have selected it during the installation A process of the software It is available only on PC computers at this time The Color Factory plug in The Color Factory plug in allows you to modify the values of the R G B and Alpha channels the selected images thanks to mathematical formulas ie R G B and Alpha values of the pixels of your images Based on the additive color principle all colors are mixture of red green and blue more or less dark in exact proportions Each color can be broken up in various ways depending on the color system For example the Slider tab of the Color Picker panel gives the numerical values of the A color in the R G B and H S L color systems Red r reer jy Blue Alpha Each text field of the Color Factory panel describes one component R G B or Alpha and can contain a mathematical formula The new values of those components will be calculated regarding the formulas you have entered the Alpha component indicates the opacity of the pixels The variables that you can use in your formulas are listed in the table below all in low case The variables Value of the Red component of the pixel Value of the Green component of th
383. tes the photographic solarization procedure The Grain and Noise drawing modes The Grain mode adds a multi colored grain to the current image This creates a texture imitating a light photographic grain The Noise mode adds a single colored grain the color applied is the A color The Grain and Noise modes themselves also depend strongly on the power and opacity of the drawing tool Here the A color is a gray color 1 4 Other TVPaint Animation Pro drawing tools The others drawing modes The Emboss drawing mode Airbrush tool in Emboss mode The Emboss mode accentuates the image contours by adding a shadow Once the tool is used on the image it appears to have more volume The Add and Sub drawing modes The Add mode adds the R G B A values of the current tool with the color A to the R G B A values of the source image pixels The result is the image shown on the left The Sub mode subtracts the R G B values of the color A from the R G B values of the source image pixels The result is the image shown on the right Here the color A is purple R 128 G 0 B 128 A These last four modes Add Sub Multiply and Screen are more useful when cr Sy they are used with brushes or with certain effects We will come back to them in further lessons The Multiply and Screen drawing modes The Multiply mode multiplies the individual values of the R G B channels of the source image pixels with the sum of the
384. text transparency The Outline variable creates an outline of varying thickness around the letters but renders the interior of the letters transparent The Smooth variable applies a blur to the letters The Border variable creates an outline of varying thickness around the letters The Glow variable creates a luminous halo around the letters The border and glow may be of any color of your choice If the Letter button is selected an Anim Animation popup menu is present you may then choose to apply the letters in the text field once only in a loop randomly or in ping pong If the Word button is selected a Step variable is present this variable functions in the same way as for standard drawing tools see lesson 2 The Reset button resets all settings The button provides access to the last phrases or words entered in the text field The B button opens a larger text field in order to work with longer texts The number in the bottom left hand corner of the panel represents the text width in number of pixels a width which is dependent on your settings The Create brush button allows you to transform your text into a custom brush and switch to the brush settings in the tool panel AN In addition to the settings via the mini sliders do not forget to tick the boxes to take these variables into account 7 12 Other TVPaint Animation Pro drawing tools To perfectly master the drawing tools
385. that the closer the camera comes the more the image will be blurred see next page _ y_ The focusing plane is also visible in the perspective view and in the front view in the S form of a gray rectangle In the case of the perspective view you will see a gray viewing angle at the focusing distance The Rendering gt Multi plane Camera Effect 15 11 Create and manage focusing blurs In the diagram above the blur is applied to your plane either inside or outside the Ay red cone The width of the cone only indicates the blur amount A On The Blur parameter present on each plane of the Plane tab is used to adjust the blur for each plane individually It is expressed as a percentage of the blur generated by the Depth of field effect parameter Make the kid run Now that the various elements of our scenery move correctly and the focusing blur has been adjusted we may for example decide to move our red running kid using another animated source at the running kid plane level You may choose to use the Running_Kid_1 tvp sequence studied in lesson 6 by modifying the position parameters of the running kid plane using animation keys in this case he is not running on the spot You may also use the Running_Kid_ 2 tvp project studied in the same lesson In this case you will probably not need to modify the position parameters with animation keys as the running kid moves from left to right
386. the borders by tiling the image The effects of the Motion and Paint groups management of the paths 14 17 Lesson 15 The Rendering gt Multiplane Camera Effect In this lesson you will e Study the concept of a Multiplane Camera e Learn how to use the Multiplane Camera effect we will discuss various examples The concept The concept With the multi plane camera effect you may control movement of several planes with background scenery Each plane has a specific depth and consequently its own speed in the eyes of the observer In the image above the following are placed one over the other in the order of furthest away to closest the starry sky the mountains the forest the first row of trees the running kid and finally the second row of trees much closer When the animation is complete The trees in the front will move from right to left very quickly as they are closer to the viewer The mountains at the back will also move from right to left but much slower The blur caused by focusing This effect can also take into account the fact that the human eye cannot focus on all elements of the scenery at the same time Just like in traditional photography if you focus on a object close to you the objects further away will be blurred and vice versa focusing on a distant object will result in blurring of closer objects In the photos above the tree is a long way from the rose In the left photo the c
387. the spline is set to 100 A The seventh and last icon turn on the display of a control box which allows to do a lot of modifications directly on the project window see below You may contract stretch rotate or translate the current B spline as a whole by using the handle of the box don t forget to activate the HUD ks ge Use the Shift key with a drag action to translate the whole B Spline The master controllers r Snline B Gplinie 4 AAANAA amp You could find annoying to create animation keys for every spline and every point of a spline for example a rid Paints GUS stein G five points spline need almost 30 animation keys to be y ee 4 Eb created if you want to move it from a place to another Postion Fiori lp one snami olb That s the reason why the animation key controllers have Alirrufing Modo Add y been added in the panel They are black encircled in the Opacity 100 a Dp Ehia HUD PJ pictu re opposite The animation key controller near the spline popup menu allows you to create an animation key for each parameter of the spline points opacity by using only one mouse click The animation key controller near the points popup menu allows you to create an animation key for each parameter of the point position sharpness edge by using only one mouse click e Working with several B splines It is possible to use several B splines
388. the 4 mini sliders will help you non unsaturated hues progressively unsaturated hues completely unsaturated hues unsaturated and vice versa If necessary the popup menu Display enables recovery of source image viewing zo The nvert button is used to invert the final result saturated pixels become F The Color gt Color Replacer effect w S Color Replace Bia The Color Replacer effect is based on the same Progress Prole T principle as the effect Color Eraser with the difference Dinpiay Roa oT that you do not unsaturate the colors aad palei sa Indeed using Shifting values enables progressive sta d modification of the hue saturation and luminosity of the i chosen color range You may thus easily toggle one z0 u 56__ 56 a u color range to another ae The Shifting values are calculated as being gap in eaa Neen n aa the H S L system between the two colors of the panel Huani 4 it blue and yellow in this example sashti aiqd gib Luin Shit T Full Hide HUDI Proview at apn fd Sine 11 6 The effects of the Color and Keying groups The effects in the Color menu Original image Sn Yellow colors changed to blue The Color gt Curves effect Each pixel on the screen is defined by its components The so called R G B A generates the color of a pixel with four components red green blue and alpha In this system the values of the four components vary between 0 and
389. the configuration At this point if you wish to keep the current layout of panels on the screen for the next time you open TVPaint Animation Pro as well as the effects palettes and various settings used this list will be completed as the lessons progresses tick the Save this configuration box You may then choose to Leave TVPaint Animation Pro or Stay and return to the TVPaint Animation Pro interface 1 10 First approach of TVPaint Animation Pro Managing the configurations Managing the configurations A configuration contains a lot of useful informations like the layout of panels the interface colors the palettes etc You certainly guess it it is possible to create several kind of configurations For exemple a configuration adapted to dual screen computer a configuration adapted to HDTV another one with other interface colors etc The current configuration can be saved when you quit the program The starting panel of the program allows you to manage the configurations G Eai 5 Y F a TELL EERST Y Configuration default Y Mew Copy Delete Template Mone w From File od VGAVGA z Width o AspectRatio 1 000 i Height 490 a Frame Rate 30 000 Field Progressive w start ao OE Cancel When restarting TVPaint Animation Pro the user may either create copy or delete a configuration you can also select their storing folder To create a new configuration click
390. the possibilities given by the TVPaint solutions from its creation A samples of their works as well as brushes scripts and tips for the benefit of all Feel free to post your own productions and to share your techniques Join the TVPaint users Community O It s the share place The TVPaint forums gather the discussion of our users When contacting us via email forum phone please don t forget to give us the following informations Your computer PC Macintosh its CPU AMD Intel it s amount of RAM Your operating system apple OS X Microsoft windows The version of TVPaint animation Pro that you are running you can find it in the about section of the software see below Your video hardware if you have one TYR ain Animabon EO Fp Pury te Oe Licema accorded Fabrice Dabing Dormia 91 06 Here ADAM IDEN FA mit 75005027A P19 26 mh A 14 Appendix The technical support and internet resources Here are our full coordinates TVPAINT DEVELOPPEMENT Route de Marange 5 7280 Maizieres les Metz FRANCE Phone 33 0 387 173 598 Fax 33 0 387 173 599 Email tvpaint tvpaint fr TVPaint Developpement is located at Maizieres Les Metz 10 km aways from Metz Transporation means for meeting us are London Eruxelles LULEMOSuUTG Metz Nancy Planes Metz Nancy Lorraine Airport 40 Km http www metz nancy lorraine aeroport fr Lux
391. the video grabbed by your peripheral device should be automatically inserted into a new layer or simply added to the current layer The Length option defines the number of frames to be grabbed If this value is set to 5 and you grab a video the resulting video will be duplicated on 5 frames of the destination layer This is very useful as it allows you to monitor the rhythm of your animations The last menu is the Field menu which is used to define management of your video fields Four options are available As is keeps both fields Upper first and Lower first will only use one of the fields interpolated to correspond to your project window The Mix option is useful for non interlaced frames and enables reduction of frame flicking Finally this panel is completed by the Grab input button which grabs the video each time it is pressed A detailled example of animation created with the help of the video grabber and a Canon camera is available in the lesson 18 chapter plug in Canon of this manual mi 5 14 Handling TVPaint projects Video grabber fideo Grabber a The Video Input tab of the Video Grabber panel allows to manage the visualization of the project window through an Video Input Video Output external hardware such as television overhead projector Enable Gut Petrash Fa The popup menu allows to select the device you will use to display the content of the project window Kever a Fit
392. tion and concept Browse The Bin FX menu appears as illustrated opposite Add You are already familiar with the functions Add Load and Save they are present Import for each effect available in TVPaint Animation Pro However the functions Export Browse and Presets are new Delete F Presets P Choosing Browse opens a window that is specific to the particles generator see below In the popup menu you may choose a pre defined example from the following categories cartoon misc nature objects party pyrotechnic sci fi text water Using the and A buttons you may scroll from one example to another When you have chosen an example its name will appear in the header of the popup menu and you may observe the changes made to the particle system directly in the window Two boxes may be checked in order to improve the quality of the particle animation depending on the power of your computer Full Quality and AAliasing If a pre defined example is close to the result you wish to obtain for your project you may choose to set the parameters of the particles generator according to this example To do this just click on the Copy to FX button then close the window above Now you study the example in detail and modify it to your needs We will come back to this process to illustrate some situations The tabs of the Particles Generator effect The Particles Generator works with various tabs and sub tabs which
393. tion in color mode in the various cases Creation Inverted creation Light to lens Lens to light e The Lens Flare Obscuration layer Let s assume our drawing is animated as indicated below When the planet moves and the sun becomes visible the Lens Flare effect becomes visible at the same time all a Obscunilion Lan bs phe __7 4 1 In general if an object of any kind passes in front of the oie Aas 3 pis a e c Source Layer planet light source the lens flare tends to disappear Pre Behaviot Hold Firat Anim Normal The Obscuration layer parameters above allow you to manage this phenomenon Post Behavior Hold Last tset 0 e Flip Mone To do this you must first define what is going to block the light source This may be an image or animation in a layer project brush etc Pre Post Behavior Animation Mode Position will also be defined if necessary The Type of obscuration to take place when the effect is applied must be indicated here The Alpha option will block the lens flare wnen an opaque object passes in front of the light source The Invert alpha option will block the lens flare when a transparent object passes in front of the light source The R G B option will modify the lens flare color so that it becomes identical to that of the object passing in front of the light source The R G B A option functions in the same way as the R G B option but also takes into
394. tion in time of its images have to be done in the XSheet panel Once your XSheet layer is created you have to specify in the XSheet tab one or more sources Otherwise it will be not possible to use it because you can t draw ona XSheet layer The images of the choosen sources will constitute the elements of the XSheet layer How to create and manage the sources The source management can be done in the right part of the XSheet panel In order to add a source column you have to use the src button encircled below The src button allows to remove a source column from the right part of the XSheet tab The choice of a source for your column can cha tun be easily done thanks to the popup menu located at the bottom right of the XSheet table Your source can be an animation layer in the current project another opened project F 5 Prp Its also possible to change the names of rlia your source layers for a better readability d Undefined Liner Propet You only have to use the popup menu name Tre Laer If more than one project or layer is open a new menu will allow you to Hanie A We Lirethefin rey opposite p Limited 4 i aes choose which one you want as source see opposite neha Image layers are not available as source separator The thumbnails options and the position of the separator are also saved PON The width of both
395. tionOnly 1 The line DdrawEmulationOnly 0 have the reverse effect DDrawRgbaOnly By default the DirectDraw functions works with YUVA chanels If you want them to work with RVBA chanels add the line DdrawRgbaOnly 1 The line DdrawRgbaOnly 0 gives the same result as the default setting Language This option allows to select the user interface language The line language french will make you use the french interface The line language english will make you use the english interface Locfile This option indicates the name of the file containing the translations of the user interface locfile french tvpaint loc for the french interface locfile tvpaint loc for the english interface Appendix A 13 The technical support and internet resources The technical support and internet resources We did our best to provide you a detailled user manual with a lot of illustrated examples However you may still have questions regarding the software You can find additionnal and helpful informations about the TVPaint technology on our website www tvpaint com You will find Lastest news about the TVPaint Technology Tutorials palettes custom brushes papers scripts and plug in Some user stories Lastest demos and updates For your current Software Discussion forums with a technical support in french english and spannish language A gallery where hundreds of pictures and animations will show you
396. to create animated graphics Working with instances new The Recompute Exposures option This option of the Layer main menu will try to transform the images of the current layer into heads or exposures cells This option will only work if there are several indentical images in your layer We have not yet discussed these windows which appear when the program is started They comprise a wide variety of functions which will help you save a great deal of time when you start to get the hang of using the program You would have noticed that many of the functions already discussed are present in the Animator Panel It was however important for us to start by explaining the Navigation mym 3 aan fundamentals of the program before introducing you to some z shortcuts l aS iid i Amongst these you will find the possibility to add images before or after the current image split a layer after the current image Image delete an image or layer convert an image layer into an animation gn m F ae pe layer and vice versa define bookmarks add delete etc Erja Sa 1 Now we are going to take a closer look at these functions Layer alll img men The first thing you will notice is that the panel is sub divided into E several sections Navigation Image Layer Project and Misc Everything in relation with the creation or modification of custom panels will be discussed in lesson 18 The Navigation icons
397. to the left by repeating the operation amp described above with the left tab 6 16 The steps to create animated graphics Working with instances new Original layer to be stretched to the right Stretch without interpolation Stretch with interpolation Repeat Loop Repeat Ping Pong Repeat Hold Repeat Exposure Add empty Images Add empty Exposures It is also possible to reduce the number of images in a layer using an Shrink analog method interpolate Click and slide to the left on the encircled tab below to call up the panel shown opposite The example below gives you an idea of the effects produced by the various options Option Shrink without interpolation Option Shrink with interpolation Option Cut images With interpolation the numbers 1 2 3 are mixed in the same image the numbers 4 5 6 in the next then 7 8 9 etc Without interpolation the intermediary images between images 1 4 7 and 10 are deleted AN It is possible to shrink a layer to the left by repeating the operation described above with the left tab The steps to create animated graphics 6 17 Working with instances new Pre and Post behavior i Mone Repeat Did you notice the small triangles on either side PingPong of the layers Hold A left click on the triangles offers you access to the options regarding pre and p
398. tograph Open Remote Panel Tools Open Shape Settings Panel T Paint Animation Open Tools Panel Twain Open Video Grabber Panel Undo Toggle Coordinates Panel Zoom Toggle FX Panel Toggle Gradient Panel Toggle Grid Panel Toggle Guides Panel Toggle Layer Panel Toggle LightTable Panel Toggle Navigator Panel Toggle Palette Panel Toggle Paper Panel Toggle Remote Panel Toggle Tools Panel Toggle windows display The advanced functions of TV Paint Animation Pro 18 3 Customized windows The actions at your disposal Several possibilities are available if you decide to create an action You can Select a shortcut in the numerous program functions See previous page Select an FX Bin file stored in the FX stack to re use it Open Plug in allows you to place a button to fast start plugins they will be introduced and explained in the next section of this lesson Open panel allows you to create dependencies between your panels i e you may display secondary panels from the main panel for example This may be useful for organizing your custom brushes or the contents of your various Bins For example the button a at the bottom of the Animator Panel is used to open the Tool Bin panel which is a default Bin in which your tools are saved Nevertheless it is possible to create a Bin for each type of drawing tool Airbrush Penbrush etc which may be opened from the Animator Panel using other buttons of this type M
399. tograph mode With a bit of practice it could be easy for you to remove the dimple of your photographs The face with dimples The same face with the dimples removed Please note that the reference area can be located on a different picture than the current one The reference area can be the background the displayed picture the current image the previous image a paper or an image copied into the spare It is therefore possible to fake your photographs here below some scars have been added to the skin by using this fissured wall picture as reference layer The same face with scars added The reference picture for the Healing tool Other TVPaint Animation Pro drawing tools 1 1 Clipboard and spare Clipboard and spare The clipboard Clipboard Copy Brush to ClipBoard Spare Get Brush from Clipboard Copy Image to Cliphoard Preferences Mew Layer from Clipboard The clipboard menu is located in the Edit main menu and comprises four useful options which in a way serve as an interface between TVPaint Animation Pro and your other software packages The Copy brush to clipboard option makes the current brush available for other software packages installed on your computer The Copy image to clipboard option makes the current image displayed in your project including the background available for other software packages i
400. top right to the bottom left of the image The Canon plug in PC only The Canon plug in allows the user to retrieve photos from a Canon digital camera and to put them directly into a TVPaint Animation Pro layer This plug in is very convenient for the animator who want work in stop motion directly with the software Here are the steps to use the Canon Plugin with TVPaint Animation Pro What is required The Canon driver of your camera must be correctly installed in your system Microsoft Windows only at this time You should have a compatible Canon camera see the list in Appendix powered and plugged to an USB port of your computer You have to set your camera in playback mode Don t use the shooting mode as it does not allow to manage your camera via the computer wee 2 R i T 30 000 arut L the gab size must be How to make it work Launch TVPaint Animation Pro Open the Video Grabber panel It is accessible in the Windows main menu In the device list choose your Canon camera if other devices are listed Hit the settings button to access the second panel in which you have to adjust your grab settings Choose Apply in current Layer in the menu so it will append the new image just after the current one in the current layer When you think it looks fine in the little preview hit the Grab Input button 18 8 The advanced functions of TV Paint An
401. tor effect Below you find two summary illustrations for the trajectory of any object gravity f With aloha calsa oS a n wind s direction 1 weal 1 wands direction lt stro winds direction The Emitters tab The Emitters tab see below as its name implies is used to set the parameters of the sources emitting the particles jit F w Progres Profile World Ernitters Emitters Pointi m H ETERN a Center er ee tools aan Toots F zalo Direction g Anglo 0 00 4 Jet t Fiviation 0 Faall x Hiti HU tid Proiow The Rendering gt Particles Generator effect 17 7 The tabs of the Particles Generator effect The following emitters may be chosen A point see pre defined example sci fi gt galaxywarp a line see pre defined example objects gt tetris a rectangle see pre defined example nature gt lava or cartoon gt eyes an ellipse These are the various HUD displayed according to the chosen emitter Point Line Rectangle Ellipse The center of the emitters is shown in green its shape is marked by red dots The purple handles describing the shape of circular arcs indicate the angle at which the particles are projected We will study them in detail when discussing the Emitter gt Current tab Below the smoke coming from the steam engine was created using a Point type emitter A
402. turns yellow to indicate that the tool is chosen see Culot a image opposite OF Bn Then adjust the size of the penbrush to 1 5 pixels in diameter dire P 150 a Power P 1008 Ped zisk daniel i Select the Rectangle icon on the main panel by clicking on it once EA Again the color of the icon changes from gray to yellow once the EEEE Y ahili air p selection is made niea SERENE This applies to almost all icons in this application 4 al mal Select the Bin tab of the color picker and choose a gray color if necessary use the slider to get there After having clicked on the desired color or pointed to it if you use a graphic tablet this color will appear in the main panel and in the color picker as main color or A color Click on the center of the image and without letting go of the mouse button slide it towards the bottom right hand corner Release the mouse button A gray rectangle has now been drawn in the current project window see diagrams below gt gt gt gt T gt gt 2 2 Drawing basics Your first drawing The Floodfill option We will now floodfill this rectangle with color LWW el By Saluralon Select the Floodfill option in the main panel Go the the Picker tab of the color picker panel and choose a color as in the diagram opposite a gray color with a slight yellow hue The choice of this color is important for the continuation in pa
403. tween opaque pixels and transparent ones The Gain parameter permits to turn opaque and to darken pixels which are almost transparent This is very useful to stand out the little imperfections especially the ones that have not been fully removed when using some Keying effects On the opposite the Lift parameter can turn opaque the pixels which are almost transparent Use of the Erode parameter Use of the Shrink parameter Use of the Gain parameter set to 1000 The effects of the Color and Keying groups 11 17 The effects of the Keying menu The Keying gt Advanced Keyer effect The Advanced Keyer is the most complex and the most powerful Keying tool in TVPaint Animation Pro Experienced users often use it for very accurate keyings We have already seen that each color can be broken up in various ways depending on the color system RGBA HSLO YUV while each system defines color channels the YUV system is used by the NTSC and PAL video formats The Advanced Keyer effect permits to cut out on each color channel which allows you to do very accurate keyings see below Y a Fuchs ricer kirit a Y at Fuchs ricicedl kirit Progress Fronle Progress Fronle Mispila As Mispila A s KY Matt Spill Remdral Key Matte Spill Removal Kangor Meche wE Karvor Moke RGB halerance Sul halerance Bonne Sub Bonne Hirde reer a Premier
404. ue etc In the main part of your script it is possible to save it into a variable and after to re use it This instruction is optional If you don t use it you have created a procedure instead of a function End This instruction is needed to finish your function or procedure 1 The functions and procedures written in George language can be recursive In other lt words a function can call itself It allows to create more sophisticated scripts EIS For instance drawing a fractal curve can be done thanks to a recursive script see below a a el Ua How to create libraries of functions and procedures We have just seen in the last chapter that it was possible to create your own George functions and procedures This may be taken even further as you can store your functions and procedures in grg files and you can re use them in other scripts written in George In other words you can create your own libraries To insert one of your libraries in a George Script you only have to write the following line in your script Include MyLibrary grg The instruction nclude will search the file called MyLibrary grg in the directory containing the current George Script or in the root directory of TVPaint Animation Pro The following line allows to specify a more precise access path from the basis directories Include MyFolderOfLibraries MyLibrary grg
405. ump tv_circle tv_circlefill tv_clear tv_colorfactory tv_crazyblur tv_densitylinex tv_densityliney tv_densityx tv_densityy tv_display tv_dot tv_ellipse tv_ellipsefill tv_fastline tv_fieldcopy tv_fielddouble tv_fileinfo tv_fill tv_filter tv_firstimage tv_flipimagex tv_flipimagey tv_fixmotion tv_framerate tv_gauge tv_gblur tv_getactivetool tv_getactiveshape tv_getapen tv_getbpen tv_getfield tv_getheight tv_getpixel tv_getpixeldisplay tv_getpixellayer tv_getprojectname tv_getuser tv_getwidth tv_ghostline tv_grab tv_imagefromclipboard tv_imagetoclipboard tv_lastimage tv_layeranim tv_layercopy tv_layercreate tv_layercurrentid tv_layercut tv_layerdensity tv_layerdisplay tv_layerduplicate tv_layerfetch tv_layergetid tv_layergetimage tv_layergetpos tv_layerhold tv_layerimage tv_layerinfo tv_layerinsertimage tv_layerinvert tv_layerkill tv_layermerge tv_layermergeall tv_layermove tv_layerpaste tv_layerrename tv_layerselect tv_layerselectinfo tv_layerset tv_layershift tv_layerstencil tv_layerstretch tv_line tv_listrequest tv_loadbrush tv_loadbrushanim tv_loadimage tv_loadpalette tv_loadproject tv_loadsequence tv_loadspare tv_lockcacheflush tv_lockdisplay tv_lockmouse tv_magicnumber tv_menuhide tv_menushow tv_panning tv_penbrush tv_pencil tv_perswrap tv_piccolor tv_preserve tv_propelling tv_projectclose tv_projectcurrentid tv_projectduplicate tv_projectenumid tv_projectinfo tv_pro
406. unning Kid 2 and display only the current layer Start by choosing the color option in the popup menu on the left hand side of the Light table panel to display all frames behind the current frame in the color indicated default color red Then disable all the frames in front of the current frame that you do not want to see by clicking on the corresponding frame number Go to the frame in the center of the animation To enable the light table in your layer click on the LT icon in this layer The following image will appear in the current project window The frames in our animation layer which precede the current frame are displayed on the screen The frames closest to the current frame in time are the most visible and those furthest away in time are the most transparent The light table is an extremely practical tool as it is also possible to display all frames after the current frame in time and for a given layer If you configure your light table as indicated below choose the gradient option in the popup menu on the right hand side of the Light Table panel the frames after the current frame in time are displayed in a colored gradient with more or less opacity depending on their position in relation to the current frame 6 22 The steps to create animated graphics The classical tools of the animator Nene oy at non Front J utd are Now that you understand how this tool works let s g
407. ur gt Directional blur effect 10 4 The Blur gt Median blur effect 10 5 The Median blur in Smooth mode 10 5 The Median blur in Light halo mode 10 5 The Median blur in Dark halo mode The Median blur in Light mark mode The Median blur in Dark mark mode The Median blur in Double edge mode The Median blur Impressionist mode The Transition group effects Increasing the transition possibilities by using the FX stack Lesson 11 The effects Color channels The Transition gt Hide effect The Transition gt Block effect The Transition gt Classic effect The Transition gt Fade effect The Transition gt Slide effect The Transition gt Rotary effect The Transition gt Page Turn effect of the Color and Key groups The effects of the Color menu The Color gt Black amp White converter effect The Color gt Color Adjust effect The Color gt Color eraser effect The Color gt Color replacer effect The Color gt Curves effect The Color gt Histogram effect The Color gt Sliders effect The Color gt Scan cleaner effect The Color gt Source Image effect The effects of the Key menu Lesson 12 The effects The Keying gt Luma Keyer effect The Keying gt Color Keyer effect The Keying gt Chroma Keyer effect The Keying gt Alpha Control effect The Keying gt Advanced Keyer effect The Keying gt Cross Keyer effect of the Stylise group Introduction The Stylize gt Glow effect The Stylize gt
408. ush application modes Color mode Alpha Stamp mode Luma Stamp mode Invert Luma Mode Hue Stamp mode original brush The brush application modes will also be studied in lesson 7 in the chapter i Use of the brush as a drawing tool shift 100 opacity 100 shift 100 opacity 0 shift 100 opacity 15 Normal brush Centered handle Handle top right Handle custom placed Traditional drawing modes are applied to the brushes and sometimes provide interesting results Original brush Image on which the Application in Application in the white pixels brush will be applied Multiply mode Screen mode are opaque Temporal management of layers 4 15 More details x2 zs 3 be 5 iD PERERIN Lock Acpect pen wun eps Je Height Ela __ Angle 6000 o Bode ol AAliasing ca Opacity Mapping Let s talk about the Edit button it is used to display the panel shown opposite The various buttons from left to right and top to bottom have the following functions double the size of the brush double its width or height turn the brush 90 flip brush on X axis optimize the brush cut brush size in half cut brush width height in half turn the brush 90 flip brush on Y axis replace the transparent areas with B color lock the width heigth aspect ratio modify the size of the brush numerically or in the project window rotate th
409. utton assigned to this script in a custom panel as explained below After this operation it should be easy for you to test this George Script in the project window Once this stage is passed you can try to edit the George Script to modify it and to test it again in TVPaint Animation Pro This should help you to learn the basics of the George Language The best way to get used to George scripts is probably to try the example programs pO that come with TVPaint Animation Pro se Study them and make small alterations to them then run them and see the effects of your changes 18 14 The advanced functions of TV Paint Animation Pro How to use the George scripting language The clock grg script Param Circle TVPaint should wait for the coordinates of a circle before running the program The user must therefore draw a circle to start the program Parse result command x y r button Fetches the coordinates of the user s circle if cmp command Circle 0 tv_Warn This program needs the coordinates of a circle exit lf there are no coordinates for a circle warn the user and end the program End t time parsethms II Fetches the hours h minutes m and seconds s of the current time m m s 60 The seconds can slightly alter the minutes arm of the clock tv_Pen r 30 Selects a pen proportional to the clock size tv_Circle x yr Draws the outline of the clock ang 360 12 d
410. ve copy and paste a selected range of frame Here is a small recapitulative diagram The options that allows to cut copy or paste the cells can be applied from an ge XSheet layer into itself or into another one however it is not possible to cut s source images Select a default source When you click on the name of your XSheet layer a popup menu called default source appears at the bottom of the XSheet tab It is then possible to assign a source column by default to your XSheet layer all the references of the cells will only need a number of picture in order to be taken into account This is very convenient to create new XSheet layers synchronised with the current one You only have to duplicate the current XSheet layer and cefauti Source Kid change the default source of the duplicated XSheet layers About the projects When a project needs some images to be repeated several times it s advised to use XSheet layers It allows to decrease the size of the project when you save it on your harddrive because each repeated image is saved only one time When you save a project in TVPaint Animation Pro the related XSheet tab and AN layers are saved too Your project will still be available usable with previous softwares from TVPaint But the XSheet and sound quotes layers will not be viewable nor usable 8 12 The XSheet Layers and Panel The steps to create a lip sync The steps
411. ve a profile editor which works similarly to that of the drawing tools see lesson 2 for more details Profile Omni With the Light popup menu it is possible to use several light sources regardless of type as well as to rename duplicate or delete them This is how our cave may be lit up in various ways Spal Gre Spel Ere 9 12 Working with the FX stack More details about the FX stack This Lighting effect only applies to the opaque pixels of the current layer To obtain the examples above it is therefore necessary to first merge the layers of our project Single effects multiple effects Up to now we have only used a single effect in our stack TVPaint Animation Pro also offers the possibility to use a succession of effects For a better understanding of this notion we will use the merged prehistoric project that we have used before Using the parameters below place a Center blur effect in your FX stack You now have the following preview AnG FH ra Center Blur Progress Profile inal Center Linear 2 iasa Bel g Tools afz T Power t00 Radius i00 _ 4 ci gt Full O HieHUD Preview Bingle FX May be you noticed the options Multiple FX and Simple FX in the Effects main menu or in the Add FX popup menu of your stack Biur malat i If you select a new effect in the popup menu When Multiple FX is checked the chosen effect is add
412. veral choices Normal Size Full and Last These are results obtained using these modes The Normal mode progressively reproduces your stroke on the screen This is the one we have been using since the beginning of this lesson The Size modes requires adjustment of the parameter with the same name and will erase the stroke progressively in time The Last mode is a kind of Size mode parameter set to value 1 which only draws one point of the stroke at a time In Complete mode the complete stroke is drawn on the screen independent of the circumstances The last is the Noise parameter it defines a possible deviation from the original path and is used to obtain less regular curves see opposite the TVPaint logo is slightly distorted as if written with a trembling hand The AutoPaint effect is in a way similar to the Re apply option as the result depends on the drawing tool selected just before application of the FX stack Here two interesting examples Opposite after recording a simple stroke in the shape of a semi circular arch the AutoPaint effect was applied using the TextBrush tool in Letter mode with the rotation parameter connected to the stylus direction The text seems to follow the defined path in time each letter having its own rotation depending on its position on the path The effects of the Motion and Paint groups management of the paths 14 3 Management of Paths Management of P
413. w time to explain some programming conventions 1 A sharp caracter at the beginning of a line will not affect the execution of the script For instance the line Pause 20 will pause the execution of your script during 20 seconds And the following script line will have the same result Pause 20 2 You can use only one instruction or command on the same line For instance if you use the following line in a script Print wait a little Pause 20 An error message will be returned The two lines below will not return any error messages Print wait a little Pause 20 3 Everything on a line that is after a double slash is ignored They are only comments that have been put into the script to make it more understandable and readable by humans For instance the line Pause 20 wait 20 seconds makes TVPaint Animation Pro wait during 20 seconds However the line II Pause 20 will not pause the execution of your script letters For instance TV_layercreate tV_LaYeRcReAtE tv_LAYERCREATE are s TVPaint Animation Pro sees no difference between uppercase and lowercase O all exactly the same command How to use the variables It is not necessary to declare the types of your variables in a George Script For instance you can write the two lines below
414. white pixels gives a blue or white pixel That s is not always the case as we will see later 3 For the pixels located at the frontier between the blue and white areas the i situation is a bit more complicated they will become more visible than the 4 J blue and white pixels surrounding them 2 In other words they will become a little darker It results a sharper image 4 example how to draw the edge of a picture In order to obtain the edges of a picture you need to have a sharper image and you need also to make the pixels surrounded by same color pixels become black 2z le le To do so we will use a matrix which coefficients are close from those we 2 Jhe l 2 used in the last example Please note that the sum of the surrounding s fe E coefficients is equal to the opposite of the central coefficient In this case the pixels surrounded by pixels with the same color will become black The weighted average of the values or colors is equal to 0 The pixels at the frontier between the blue logo and the white background will be strengthened Here is the result TVPaint Before applying the effect After applying the effect 5 example How to emboss an image Adding relief to an image can be done by strengthening the pixels colors in a given direction and by reducing the impact of the pixels colors in the opposite direction o io sdf The matrix opposite allows to emboss the image as if a light sou
415. will find in this menu some options already encountered in the lessons 3 and 4 Insert Duplicate Delete Rename Copy Paste one or more images Fre H hiri PaE Set Post or Pre behavior iari hha Set Opacity AE etc Baill La toon Shading The green or red coloured square once you click on it allows to Opposite and below The background layer is hidden The Toonshading layer is locked The Lightable of the Colors layer is activated The Shadow layer is reduced The Running Kid layer is the current layer display or hide the corresponding layer The small lock button allows to manage the locking of a layer The LT button manage the activation of the light table The black triangles allows to reduce or increase the size of the columns in the Xheet panel The current layer is lighter than the other layers In the XSheet tab opposite The letter A indicates that the column represents an animation layer The letter indicates that the column represents XSheet tab an image layer Before enabling the lightable for the layer of your choice Don t forget to enable the global lightable by clicking on the button JF H 8 6 The XSheet Layers and Panel The XSheet Layers and XSheet Panel At the ends of the column it is still possible to set the pre and post behaviour of your layers See below In the examp
416. window A 13 2 The effects of the Distortion group The Distortion gt Kaleidoscope effect The Distortion gt Kaleidoscope effect As the name implies the effect imitates the view through a kaleidoscope In the following paragraphs the projects will be considered as having the layers merged gt gt Original image Use of the Kaleidoscope effect Add Fe Opbane TA r a D E Kaleidoscope Progress Profle oe W Destination nwa C ECCE ate a Dnem j xan ee Toae v ano Wumber oi Segments E____ lt uO F Angle 000 angie Eh Rotation o Global Angie ae nian t Fill a m a The number of segments is the number of symmetric axes used to obtain the final image see below Two symmetric axes axis horizontal and vertical The effects of the Distortion group 13 3 The Distortion gt Kaleidoscope effect And so on The value of the first angular parameter varies the axis formed between the symmetric and the horizontal axis The grayish diagrams indicate the area in the original image which will be duplicated by the symmetry In black the rotation angle applied before symmetry in relation to the red axes Here for one symmetric axis Here for two symmetric axes 13 4 The effects of
417. wn opposite 4 rl Some layers may be reduced for future fel ts timelines see lesson 3 at jo Mi rel We have just created a single image empty To make our first film we have to increase the number of images in our roll To do this you can use the keyboard shortcut Shift l or choose Insert Images before current image in the Layers menu to add frames to the current layer Now you just have to enter the number 9 in the numeric field This will give you a total of 10 frames Movement and orientation within the timeline Use the T and J keys to change the current layer When you are in an animation layer you can move between the images of this animation using the lt and arrows on the keyboard __ You may also use the mouse to move inside the timeline by clicking on the w S space time location of your choice Temporal management of layers 4 3 Animation layers Time Line Wiha Projects H n New F Merge Autorn tt a faller 100 Je Curent elo nise all 10 o Layer molken FEL os I O mOl oase ajl inns gt aolre la ms Jarl 7 Na Sauna a Check Fram i fe sell 7 Curent fame of Anim Layer The white square with two red bars enables you to identify the image of the animation layer viewed in the window of the current project The title bar contains several indications From left to right The name of the proj
418. xels of your images opaque using the background selected color check or none which is placed behind the transparent pixels of your images The Correct aspect button is used to correct the pixel aspect ratio of the images to be exported in accordance with the setting made in the fourth section The Stretch to frame rate button when checked imposes a previously selected frame rate on the file to be exported while retaining the original duration 5 10 Handling TVPaint projects Export files If the aforementioned button is checked the Time interpolation button allows you to decide whether the frame rate or fields correction should be carried out by interpolation smoothing or duplication or deleting as the case may be To export an animated brush The options are the same as those available to export a project display To export project layers The options proposed are Choose the path and file name Choose the file format TVPaint or PSD both file formats retain the layers you have created Exporting in PSD format Earlier we saw that the Export panel contains three tabs Project display Project layers and Custom brush The Custom brush tab does not concern us at this point in time as we are only interested in the differences resulting from the choices made in the Project display and Project layers tabs If you decide to export a project in PSD format in the Project display tab you will export an image or a
419. y refer to the first chapter of lesson 5 explaining how to save your projects with the sun and cloud Check that you are working in color mode then click several times anywhere in the blue sky This is the result The birds you have drawn before have become your brush each in turn as you place them on the screen A few words on parameter setting for animated brushes Handle At the bottom of the Tool Brush panel you will find the number of the Anim image currently used r The Anim popup menu of the Tool Brush panel controls how the images appear 4 10 The images in your animated brush may appear in various ways None Once Start amp Once Loop Pingpong Random Stylus pressure Temporal management of layers 4 17 More details Stylus speed Stylus direction All other options and parameter settings for the brushes studied previously modification of size opacity direction also apply to animated brushes Example 2 Reproduce an animation Let s now look at the short animation created with our sun and cloud but without the birds We start by merging all layers except the clouds layer and rename the new layer You will obtain the following timeline H S ew Thapa Aut Fi T Te a Oi ouda P O one BO gt backgrewnd ol E oe bid Mo Ammit T None j Fame J 0 ie I Ebi m l oe eee a tt Jals
420. y also use the Shift key to select all layers between the last selected and the one you are clicking on Another possibility is to slide one layer on top of another and call Color x up the merge options shown opposite Stamp p If you tick the Stamp field the merger is made according to the Erase Source ma opacity of the layer moved and the A color You may choose to cancel or keep the original layer as well as Apply Cancel apply one layer on another in color erase behind mode etc Further details Delete duplicate a layer Delete Selected Layers P Duplicate Layer It is possible to delete a layer an option which is quite different from erasing its contents To do this select Delete selected layers then click on Confirm in the contextual menu of the timeline to do this you may also use the Layer main menu To duplicate a layer proceed in the same way using the same menus Lock a layer To lock a layer may be useful under several circumstances Click on the little padlock located in the timeline in front of the layer to be locked Once a layer is locked you may neither draw on it nor delete it or modify its global opacity nor select it as current layer Click again on the padlock to unlock the layer Reduce a layer TER PEM T i He j i Timo Line Renee Pajea It is practical to reduce a layer when there are too many of them to be displayed on the screen HI amp bey 7 Mong
421. y available in this menu erasing the source image pixels nearby a white opaque logo on a transparent layer with a black background The Channel menu gives several others possibilities Invert Alpha Lighting comes from the image opaque pixels see below for example Alpha Lighting comes from image transparent pixels that s what s happening in the example above Luminosity The more luminous a pixel is the more lightrays it will let go Red Green Blue The more red or green or blue component a pixel has the more lightrays will go through it In the source image on the left below only the sky and the green tree will emit lightrays when the blue channel option is selected The green tree color is partially composed of blue The effects of the Rendering group 16 11 The Rendering gt Volumetric Light effect Source Image Luma channel Invert Alpha channel Blue channel The Shimmer section permits to generate interferences in the Volumetric light The Size setting is used to manage the distribution of these interferences The Angle and Rotation make these interferences pivot and can give the feeling that the lightsource is rotating The Variation setting accents the contrast between rays Without Shimmer With Shimmer gt The Mask section allows you to limit the lighting in a circle whose radius has A N to be defined 16 12 The effects of the Rendering group The Rendering g
422. y with the applicable broadcasting rules et E E A a Gomposin yE yorimga T GOmponers vif Laer i Ey i eet ta Dupli TH i Redtuie fe Trine end E3 Pedcule Trankpacerd e Lirimit 1 Tr LEJ Cergunem ROH E Laren kis 1E Sr aie 1 ae T Retcule Manim i Ap h l Appi Appi Our WaveForm Plug in allows the audiovisual professionals to use their classical tools Thanks to this Plug in it is now easy to check the integrity of a signal manage calibration and colorimetric adjustments control the validity of numerical signals The popup menu alllows you either to select A Composite WaveForm monitor A Componant WaveForm monitor A VectorScope current picture where merged A The monitors at you disposal in this WaveForm Plug in act as if all layers of the Here are some options relative to the different displays at your disposal The VectorScope can use two calibration sets 75 and 100 The component WaveForm monitor can use the R G B or Y U V systems The composite WaveForm monitor can use luminance and or chrominance signal s Let s now explain the other options It is possible to set the uminosity of the display thanks to a mini slider The reticule button allows to show or hide the different axis and channels The apply button allows to copy on the current image the results obtained in the WaveForm Plug in panel If the transparency butt
423. your choice wind with a negative value affects the particles in a direction opposite to the one you have chosen Wind 0 Wind 100 Wind 200 Note that using animation keys will allow you if necessary to change the direction of the wind in time as well as its strength to avoid creating a wind that is too uniform The Alpha Collision menu is similar to the Source tab studied in lesson 14 when using the Keyframer We will not go back to the concepts Source Pre Behavior Animation Post Behavior and Offset There is however a functional difference when the Alpha Collision box is checked the particles will take into consideration the shape of the image s selected by you as source and in case of a collision with one of them bounce off them Draw a slope with an angle of approximately 30 with the horizontal line on all images of a layer with 120 images In the particles generator choose the pre defined example objects gt apples check the Alpha Collision box and then select FX stack as source To finish apply your effect You will note that the apples bounce off the surface that you have just drawn This may be taken even further as the surface on which the particles bounce may evolve in time for this you have to choose an animated source It is even possible to modify the height of the particle bounce as we shall see later 17 6 The Rendering gt Particles Generator effect The tabs of the Particles Genera

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

User Manual - Home Health and Fitness  Fuel Fitness FE46 User's Manual  Guida all`uso delle comunicazioni di rete ed Internet  CTAn UserManual - Bruker microCT  Fujifilm FinePix L55  Epson ActionNote 910C Product Information Guide    DVP-CX995V - Manuals, Specs & Warranty  Sarkozy piraté, Derval parasité, La Mée hackée  Wizcom Quicktionary 2 User's Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file